Tekla Handbook LT

eSe

TEKLA

Tekia Structures Connection map

Tekia Structures 10.1 June 09, 2004 Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Copyright © 2004 by Tekla Corporation All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of Tekla Corporation. Limitation of warranty and liability NOTICE: THE FOLLOWING LIMITED WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE CIRCUMSTANCES SET FORTH HEREIN. THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WAR. RANTY AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT TRADEMARK OR COPYRIGHT EXCEFF AS OTHERWISE HEREIN PROVIDED. Tekla Corporation (Tekla”) warrants that its software products will perform on computer configurations approved by Tekla as described in this manual and other Tekla’s documentation accompanying the relevant software so long as they are installed, implemented and operated in accor dance therewith. Furthermore Tekia warrants that the instructions and information contained in this manual will, when applied by adequately qualified operators (or developers as the case may be), or where appropriate, qualified civil/structural engineers, result in the software performing substantially as described in the documentation accompanying the software. This warranty sets out Tekla’s entire liability to the customer, its employees, servants, agents and sub-contractors, including but not limited to, its liability in contractor tort and including any liability for the actions and omissions of Tekla’s employees, servants, agents and sub-contrac tors. Tekla does not exclude or limit the application of any warranty or condition implied by the relevant legislation which may not be excluded, restricted or modified by agreement. Tekla does not give any warranty in respect of third party software except that Tekla’s software is, to the extent referred to in this manual and other documentation accompanying the software product, compatible with third party software products. Neither does this warranty extend to any modifications or enhancements of Tekla’s software products made by other than Tekla. The results and performance of the software prod ucts due to modifications or enhancements including direct interfacing with Tekla’s software shall be the sole responsibility of the person mak ing such modifications or enhancements. The customer is not entitled to make any modification or alteration in or to the software without the prior written consent of Tekla. Tekla’s sole responsibility under this warranty shall be limited to correcting errors in or replacing Tekla’s software so that it performs substan tially as specified in the documentation for such software products or correcting such errors in this manual that prevent the use of software. The contents of this warranty are supplemented by the terms and conditions that are defined in the TAC2000 agreement document that has been reviewed by and agreed to comply by the customer’s primary officer who signed the COSLA for the Tekla software at the time of purchase. Tekla does not warrant that the software products will: I.

Be suitable for use as intended by the customer.

2.

Operate uninterrupted or error-flee.

3. 4.

tnteract with application packages other than those specified in the accompanying documentation and/or this manual. Operate with hardware or hardware configurations other than those approved by Tekla.

Except as expressly set out in this manual Tekla shall not be liable for: t.

Misuse or negligent use and/or use by unqualified persons of the software products including ilure to use the software products in accor dance with accompanying manuals.

2.

Loss or damage arising from any errors that may be contained in the text of this manual or other documentation accompanying the relevant software product, or of the operation of the software.

3.

Indirect special or consequential damages (including loss of profits revenue or contracts) whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory. The foregoing limitation of liability shall not apply in the event that the software product is determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to be defective and to have directly caused bodily injury, death, or property damage provided that, to the extent permitted by law, Tekla’s liability shall in no event and for any damage exceed the license fee for the specific software that caused such damage.

This warranty shall be null and void and of no effect unless and until the customer shall advise Tekla in writing of any and all claims based in whole or in part on warranty within ten days of the customer becoming aware of such claims. This warranty shall be interpreted pursuant to the laws of Finland. Trademarks Windows XP, Internet Explorer, FrontPage, Visual C++, COM and VBScript are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ttt Unix is a trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc. JavaScript is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc. Xsteel is a trademark of Tekla Corporation.***

Tekia Structures Connection Map Table of Contents Connections are listed by the connection number. There are some duplicate numbers. For an alphabetical list of the connections see the Index.

Connections Windbracing (1) page 13

Stiffened shearplate(l7) page II

Cold rolled overlap (I) page 22

Bracing cross (19) page 13

Seating cap plate (2) page 16

Cold rolled overlap (19) page 23

Eave Beams-Stanchion (3) page 22

Tube gusset (20) page 13

Cross (4) page 16

Tube crossing (22) page 13

Cold rolled sleeved (2) page 22

Round tube (23) page 12

Rubber window gasket (4) page 22

Two sided end plate (24) page 1 I

Cold rolled sleeved (4) page 23

LS Brace Col End P1(24) page 25

Wind column (5) page 21

TS Brace Col End P1(25) page 25

Tube splice (6) page 17

Muffe (26) page 17

Bearing plate (7) page II

Wind Col 1 (26) page 26

Gutter (7) page 22

Stiffened end plate (27) page II

Shaped Valley Cleat (8) page 22

Bolted Cap Plate (27) page 26

Shear plate to hip (8) page 22

Stub (28) page 21

Notched seating (9) page I 6

Brace Clamp (28) page 25

Welded gusset (10) page 13

End plate (29) page Ii

Stay (10) page 22

H/V Sloped Shear P1(29) page 24

Bolted gusset (11) page 13

Seating (30) page 16

Purlin connections (11) page 22

H/v Shallow Framing (30) page 24

Stiffener seating (12) page 11

Welded column (31) page 12

Diag brace conn (12) page 22

Simple Clip Angle (31) page 24

Fitting (13) page 12

Welded Tee (32) page Il

Joining plates (14) page 17

Simple Endplate (32) page 24

Simple hip (14) page 23

Tab plate (33) page]?

Tekia Stuctures Reterenco3

Two Side Clip Angle (33) page 24

Diagonal splice (53) page 13

Two Side Endplate (34) page 24

Bracing Wrap Around w/Attachments (53) page 25

Shear P1 Simple (35) page 24

Seat Conn Type 2 (54) page 26

Seating with nail (36) page 16

Corner tube gusset (56) page 13

Shear P1 Welded Top (36) page 24

Splice Type 1(56) page 25

Seating cap (37) page 16

Corner bolted gusset (57) page 13

Shear P1 Full Depth Special (37) page 24


Shear P1 to Top Special (38) page 24

Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) page 13

Seating (39) page 16

Joist Seat (58) page 26

Haunch (40) page 16

Boomerang tube diagonal (59) page 13

Shear P1 Parallel (40) page 24


Cranked beam (41) page 16

Boomerang bracing cross (60) page 13

Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41) page 24

Seat Type 5 (60) page 26

Column splice (42) page 17

Wrapped cross(61) page 13

Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42) page 24

Purlin 1(61) page 25

Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) page 26

Splice Plate 2 (62) page 25

Welded shear plate (43) page II

Gusset wrapped diacro (62) page 13

Shear and Flange Plates (43) page 24

2L Splice Connection (63) page 25

Line/Part INTERSECTION (43) page 26

fLV Shear P1(64) page 24

Weld preparation (44) page 12

Partial stiff end plate (65) page II

Brace Corner Tubes and P1(44) page 25

Tube Column Splice (65) page 25

Clip Angles (44) page 26

Hss Brace Special (66) page 25

Box girder splice (45) page 17

Standard bracing connection (67) page 13

Bracing Cross Under Beam (45) page 25

Hss Brace Special (67) page 25

HQL (46) page 11

Column Splice 3 (68) page 25

Bracing Wrap Around (46) page 25

Shear P1 Built-up T (69) page 24

Plate with nail (47) page II

Rail Joint (70) page 21

Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) page 24

Brace w/L’s (70) page 25

Spacer plate (48) page Il

US base plate connection (71) page 14

Bent Shear Plate (48) page 24

Brace w/L’s (71) page 25

New notch (49) page 12

US seat joint (72) page 21

Brace Corner Simple (49) page 25

US seat joint 2(73) page 21

Double plate (50) page 16

Seat type 9 (73) page 26

Central Brace Tube/Conn P1(50) page 25

US seat joint 3 (74) page 21

Fit haunch (51) page 16

US seat joint 4 (75) page 21

Central Bracing Simple (51) page 25

Notch (76) page 12

Traction bar (52) page 16

US Splice joint (77) page 17

Seat Conn Type 1(52) page 26

Simple Clip Angle 2 (82) page 26

4

Tekla Structures Reference

r

p

Purlin connections (93) page 16

End plate (144) page 10

HQ end plate (97) page II

Brace Middle Tubes and PL (144) page 25

Column tube seating (100) page 16

Shear plate simple (146) page 10

End plate (101) page 12

Welded to top flange (147) page 10

Eaves haunch (102) page 16

Welded to top flange special (149) page 10

Shear plate(103) page 12

Brace Middle Simple (149) page 25

Tube seat (104) page 16

Tapered column-beam stub (150) page 11

Eaves beam to stanchion (104) page 23

Joist to beam typel (160) page 21

Portal bracing (105) page 13

Joist to column type 1(161) page 21

Gable Post Fin Plate (105) page 23

2-sided joist to column (162) page 21

Apexhaunch(106)

Joist to column type 2(163) page 21

page 16

Non-Continuous Rail (106) page 23

Joist to beam and column (164) page 21

Windbrace connection (110) page 13

Heavy brace (165) page 13

End plate Comp flange (111) page 12

Angle profile box (170) page 21

Two sided end plate Comp flange (112) page 12

Gusset stiffener (171 page 14)

Tube rail (113) page 16

L splice (175) page 17

Panel stabilizer (114) page 16

Parallel L profiles (176) page 17

Two sided end plate (115) page 12

Leg -2 or 3 diagonals (177) page 13

Two sided shearplate (118) page 12

Leg-i diagonal (178) page 13

Joining stub (119) page II

Moment connection (181) page 10

Welded beam to beam (123) page 12

Column with stiffeners W (182) page 10

Circularjoining plates (124) page 17

Beam prep (183) page 12

Moose splice (125) page 17

Full depth (184) page 10

Turnbuckle connection (126) page 17

Full depth special (185) page 10

Welded column with stiffener (128) page 12

Column with stiffeners (186) page 10

Beam with stiffener (129) paQe 10

Column with stiffeners special (187) page 10

Moment connection (130) page 12

Column with stiffener (188) page 10

Column with shear plate (131) page 10

Shear plate tube column (189) page 10

Column splice (132) page 17

Bent plate (190) page 10

Stub (133) page II

Offshore Z(192) page 17

Bolted moment connection (134) page 10

Offshore U (193) page 17

Beam to beam stub (135) page II

Offshore (194) page 12

Tapered column (136) page 17

Offshore 4(195) page 17

-

-

Column site weld splice (137) page 17 Double bent gusset (140) page 13 Clip angle (141) page 10 Two sided end plate (142) pa2e 10 Two sided clip angle (143) page 10 Tekia Stuctures Reference

5

Details Simple Base Plate (55) page 26

Angle profile box (1040) page 21

End plate detail (1002) page 14

Stiffeners (1041) page 14


Base plate (1042) page 14

Base plate (1004) page 4

Stair base detail (1043) page 20

Stiffened notch (1006) page 14

US bearing plate (1044) page 16

Shear stud (1010) page 15

Twin profile connection plate (1046) page 15

Stub (1011) page 15

US base plate (1047) page 14

Stub plate (1013) page 21

US seat detail (1048) page 21

Stiffened base plate (1014) page 14

US seat detail 2(1049) page 21

Wood girder bearing(l015) page 16

Standard Tee(L050) page 14

Web stiffened base plate (1016) page !4

Standard L0051) page 14

Horizontal stiffener (1017) page 14

Circular base plate (1052) page 14

LProf base detail (1020) page 22

Base plate(l053) page 14

Doubler plate (1022) page 15

Dividing part (1054) page 17

Connection plate (1026) page 20

Folded plate (1055) page 17

Duct hole sleeve (1029) page 15

Ladder pieces (1056) page 20


Angle cut (1057) page 15

Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) page 15

Penetrating diaphragm (1058) page 14

Simple Base Plate 2(1031) page 26

Inner diaphragm (1059) page 14

Manlock column (1032) page 15

Web stiffeners (1060) page 14

Seat Det Type 2(1032) page 26

Nethooks (1061) page 15

Manlock beam (1033) page 15

Safety rope hooks (1062) page 15

Seat Del Type 1(1033) page 26

Staging paris (1063) page 15


Multiple stiffeners (1064) page 14

Pum #1(1035) page 15

Standard gusset (1065) page 14

Pum #2 (1036) page 15

Box column base (1066) page 14

Pum #3(1037) page 15

Joist bearing plate (1067) page 21

r

C

Stair base detail (1038) page 20 Stair base detail (1039) page 20

Stairs and handrail Ladder (35) page 19

U-pan stairs (S71) page 19

Helicoida] stairs (S59) page 19

Wooden step stairs (S72) page 19

Cage ladder (S60) page 19

Polybeam pan stairs (S73) page 19

Zinc coating hole (S61) page 15

Z.pan stairs (S74) page 19

Spiral stairs (S68) page 19

Kickplate (S75) page 19

S

Tepda Structures Reterence

a

Stanchions (S76) page 19

Stanchion weld (85) page 20

Railings (S77) page 19

Stanchion side profile (86) page 20

Stairs (582) page 19

Stanchion double plate (87) page 20

Multiple beam railing (S84) page 19

Railing beam to beam (88) page 19

Handrailing (1024) page 19

Railing beam to plane (89) page 19

Connection plate (1026) page 20

Railing plane to plane (90) page 19

Stringer stanchion Lprof(68) page 20

Railing plane to beam (94) page 19

Stringer stanchion stiff (69) page 20

Railing double curve (95) page 19

Handrail 1 (74) page 26

Grating penetration (92) page 20

Stanchion side plate (83) page 20

Stringer cut (1023) page 20

Stanchion curved (84) page 20

Macros Portal span (S2) page I 8

Sagrods (S54) page 18

Turnbuckle bracing (S3) page 18

Windbracing (555) page 18

Built up box(S6) page 18

Vertical bracing (S56) page 18

DWG profile to library (6) page 22

Shed (S57) page 18

Panel in database (8) page 22

Building (S58) page 18

Generation of profiles (9) page 22

Tower member (S63) page 18

Profile cross-section from plate (10) page 22

Footipak anchoring (564) page 14

Box girder (S13) page 18

Cross arms (S65) page 18

Rolled cans (S2l) page 17

Tower diagonal (S66) page 18

Tubular NC data (S22) page 17

Auto position (567) page 8

Cross profile (S32) page 18

Hollow column stubs (569) page 17

Cross plate (533) page 18

Set Clearance (S70) page 17

Dowco Bolt Macro (41) page 26

Truss (578) page 8

Tower generation (S43) page 18

Composite brace (S79) page 18

Tapered column (S44) page 18

Bridging Macro (S80) page 22

Tapered beam (S45) page 18

Batten plates (585) page 15

Crushed tube in points (S46) page 15

Tapered beam (598) page 18

Gusset tube in points (547) page 15

Tapered column (S99) page 18

Crushed tube in bolts (548) page 15 Gusset tube in bolts (549) page 15 Cross angles between points (550) page 15 Double angle between bolts (S51) page 15 Concrete var beam (S52) page 18 Tapered frame comonor (S53) page 18

Tekia Structures Reterence

7

0

U 8

Tekra Structures Reference

I

Tekia Structures Connection Map

Introduction This connection map is intended you help familiarize you with the location of the connections contained on each page of the Tekia Structures connection menu. This map is current through Tekia Snuctures version 101 The connections shown in this map are those found on the All components toolbar. (Found on the menu: Window> Toolbars> All components.) There are some minor dif ferences found between the All components toolbar and the Components toolbar. (U.S. connections)

TaMe Structures Reference Tekra Structures Connecton Map

9

Display AutoConnection dialog

Create current connection

Find a component

Next page arrow

Previous page arrow

4 I

Two-sided end plate (142)

End plate (144)

Clip angle (141)

Two-sided clip angle (143)

Shear plate simple (146)

Bent pLate (190)

Welded to top flange S (149)

Welded to top flange (147)

Full depth S(185)

Full depth (184)

Column with shear plate (131)

Beam with stiffener (129)

Column with stiffeners (186)

Column with stiffeners (188)

Column with stiffeners S (187)

Column with stiffeners W (182)

Moment connection (181)

Shear plate tube column (189)

Tekla Structures Connections Page 1

FJ1

I)I

Bolted moment connection (134)

Bent plate (151)

‘3 10

Tekja Structures Reference Tekia SucIures Connection Map

2 End plate (29)

1fr:


Welded shear plate (43)

]: ]J

Stiffened end plate (27)

]j[

Stiffener seating (12)

Spacer plate (48)

Hql (46)

Plate with nail (47)

Stiffened shear plate (17)

Partial stiff end plate (65)

I V II jff [ J[


fl

fl E I______

Welded tee (32)

Bearing plate (7)

HQ End plate (97)

Stub (133)

Beam to beam stub connection (135) Joining Stub (119) Tapered column-beam stub (150)

Tekia Structures Reference 11 Tekia Structures connectton Map

0 )

3 Fitting (13)

rr

Beam prep (183)

Offshore (194)

or:

Welded column (31)

It ElF

-

Clip angle (116)

Moment connection (130)

Welded column with stiffeners (128)

Welded beam to beam (123)

0 -I


End plate (101)

End plate Comp flange (111)

New notch (49)

Weld preparation (44)

Notch (76)

Round tube (23)


n

]fl H

Two-sided end plate Cfl (112) -

Two-side clip angle (117)

Shear plate (103)

Two side shear plate (118)

‘S 12

Tekla Structures Reterence Tekia Structures Connection Map

4

H fl fl

Boomerang bracing cross (60)

Boomerang tube diagonal (59)

Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58)

Bolted gusset (11)

J II L{

Tube gusset (20)

Diagonal splice (53)

Windbracing (1)

Leg

-

1 Diagonal (178)

Double Bent Gussets (140)

Corner bolted gusset (57)

Corner tube gusset (56)

Corner wrapped gusset (63)

Bracing cross (19)

Tube crossing (22)

Wrapped cross (61)

Gusset wrapped diacro (62)

Welded gusset (10)

Tekla Stmctures Connections Page 4

fl

Portal bracing (105)

fj44

Std bracing connection (67)

fl

Leg -2 3 Diagonals (177)

Windbrace connec tion (110) Heavy brace (165)

Heavy brace gusset (166)

Tekia Structures Reference 13 Tekta Sthjctures Connection Map

r

Stiffeners (1003)

5 DC ULAII

Web stiffeners (1060)

Stiffened notch (1006)

Horizontal stiffener (1017)

Standard gusset (1065)

Stiffeners (1030)

I I

Base plate (1004)

Base plate (1042)

Circular base plates (1052) Box column base plate (1066)

C fl

1 1 ‘h 1F1 •40• i11 Içi 1F1F •.II., ‘I I’

a

mni Diaphragm (1059)

Standard Tee (1050)

-S

Standard L (1051)

U.S. Base plate connection (71)

Multiple Stiffeners (1064) Stiffeners (1041)

End plate detail (1002)

Penetrating diaphragm (1058)


in

Gusset stiffeners (171)

U.S. Base plate (1047)

Stiffened base plate (1014)

Web stiffened base plate (1016)

Base plate (1053)

liii

Footipak anchoring (S64)

Caste-in plate (1069)

0 14

Teka Structures Reference Teka Svuctures Connection Map

6

She&Stud(l0l0)

StubilOll)

Lifting/alignment pieces (1031)

Puml (1035)

Pum3 (1037)

LI[1E I51j3L

Manlock column (1032) u0011 Duct hole sleeve (1029)

g

4

Manlock beam (1033)

Gusset tube in points (S47)

Crushed tube in bolts (548)

[]j

Doubler plate (1022)

Gusset cube in hefts (549)

Twin profile connection plate (1046) In

Batten plates (S85)

Net Hooks (1061)

Pum2 (1036)

Zinc coating hole (561)

Crushed tube in points (S46)

Double angle between bolts (S51)


Cross angles between points (S50)

a

1 [‘

Angle cut (1057) Safety rope books (1062)

Staging Parts (1063)

Tekia Structures Reference 15 Tekta Stuctures connection Map

n

7

Cross (4)

Seating (30)

4

Seating with nail (36)

Seating cap plate (2)

Seating cap (37)

Column Tube Seating (100)

U.S. Bearing plate (1044)

Cranked beam (41)

Haunch (40)

Lø

Tube rail (113)

IF fl4 $

Panel stabilizer (114)

I$

Tekia Stnjctures Reference Tekia Structures connection Map

Fit haunch (51)

Double plate (50)

Apex haunch (106)

Eaves haunch (102)

Wood girder bearing (1015)

Purlin connections (93)

Seating (39)

Notched seating (9)

Tube seat (104)

Tekia Structures Connections Page 7

2

Traction bar (52)

8 Joining plates (14)

X


Tab plate (33)

Column splice (132)

r’ i

Column splice (42)

,, ,,

Tube splice (6)

t- -4

Box girder splice (45)

Turnbuckle connection (126)

Muffe (26)

L splice (175)

U.S. splice joint (77) ‘I

Parallel L profiles (176)

0

Etz

o[

Offshore 4(195)

Offshore Z (192)

Dividing part (1054)

PL IT Offshore U (193)

t1;

Folded plate (1055)

Tubular NC data (522)

Tube Rolled NC Cans

Set Clearance (S70)

J

Inner diaphragm (1059) Moose splice (125)

Circularjoining plates (124)

Q: I

Rolled cans (S21)

Penetrating diaphragm (1058)

tapered Column (136)

I

Column Site Weld Splice (137)

Hollow column stubs (S69)

2L Splice (152)

Tekia Structures Reference 17 Tekia Structures Connection Map

e


Cross profile (S32)

i$

Box girder (S 13)

o o’

I

Cross plate (533)

Tapered beam (598)

I

if

Tapered column (S99)

Concrete var beam (S52)

Tapered beam 2 (545)

Composite brace (S79)

Tapered frame comonor (S53)

Truss (S78)

Tumbuckle bracing (S3)

Sag rods (S54)

Vertical bracing PS (556)

Jf]9 r’t” j5f’

i 1 rf

Tower member macro (563)

Portal span (52)

Windbracing (S55)

Shed (557)

Tower Generation (S43)

Building (S58)

Tower diagonal (566)

Tapered column 2 (S44)

Cross anns (565)

,._JI

Auto Position (S67)

Built up box (S6)

N’ 18

TelcIa Structures Relerence Tekia Structures Connection teap

10

4

Stairs (S82)

4:

Wooden steps pan (S72)

Z pan (574)

Ladder (535)

Handrailing (1024)

Stanchions (576)

6 U lEt 0

OKA II

11111 iii

Kickplate (S75) I

! ‘I


U pan (571)

Polybeam pan (S73)

Helicoidal stairs (559)

Cage Ladder (560)

Multiple beam railing (S84) Railings (577)

Railing double curve (95)

‘I

Railing beam to plane (89)

Railing plane to plane (90)

Railing plane to beam (94)

Railing beam to beam (88)

Spiral stair (S68)

I

Tekia Structures Reference 19 Tekia Sfructures Connectbn Map

II

Stanchion weld (85)

Connection plate (1026)

Stanchion side plate (83)

Stanchion double plate (87)

JkJ fl>j .f[]

Stringer cut (1023)

Tek[a Structures Reference Tekia Shuctures Connection Map

Stanchion curved (84)

Stringer stanchion stiff (69)

Stairs detail (1038)

20

Stanchion side profile (86)

Grating penetration (92)

Stringer stanchion Lprof(68)




4’5 4.-J

Ladder pieces (1056)

I2 Rail joint (70)

Stub plate (1013)

Angle profile box (170)

U.S. Seat detail (1048)

llhI I I Ifr 111ki flj H 111= [II


Stub (28)

Angle profile box (1040)

US. Seat joint (72)

U.S. Seat joint 2(73)

U.S. Seat joint 3 (74)

U.S. Seat detail 2(1049)

‘awl U.S. Seatjoint 4(75)

Wind column (5)

Joist to Beam, type 1(160)

]j

Joist to Column, type 1(161)

2-Sided Joist to Col. (162)

] [J

Joist to Column, type 2(163)

Joist to Beam and Col. (164)

jj

Joist bearing plate (1067)

Telda Struclures Reference 21 Telda Stuctures Connection Map

f

13 Cold rolled overlap


Cold Rolled Sleeved (2)

Eave Beams-Stanchion

Shear plate to hip

Shaped Valley Cleat (8)

LProf base detail (1020)

Stay (10)

Diag brace conn. (12)

DWG profile to library (6)

Panel in database (8)

Generation of profiles (9)

Purlin connections (11)

Gutter (7) Profile cross-section from plate (10)

Rubber window gasket (4)

Bridging Macro (S80)

to

22

Tekla Structures Reterence Teka Sfruclures Connection Map


Cold rolled sleeved (4)

Eaves beam to stanchion (104)

Non-Continuous Rail (106)

Cold rolled overlap (19)

Gable Post Shear Plate (105)

Shearplate to hip (8)

SimpTe Hip (14)

Tekia Structures Reference 23 Tekia Sbuctures Connectron Map

V1

Tekla Structures Connections Page 1X

Simple Clip Angle (31)

] ][

Simple Endplate (32)

Two Side Endplate (34)

Shear Pt Simple (35)

Shear P1 Welded Top (36)

Shear P1 to Top Special (38)

Shear P1 Full Depth (37)

Shear P1 Full Depth Special (39)

Shear P1 Built-up T (69)

Shear P1 Parallel (40)

JtL

H/V Shear P1(64)

Shear P1 to Tube Column (47)

Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41)

Two Side Clip Angle (33)

IjJ

Bent Shear Plate (48)

WV Sloped Shear P1(29)

H/V Shallow Framing (30)

Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42)

Shear and Flange Plates (43)

tl 24

Tek[a Structures Reterence Tekia Stuctures Connecflon Map


Brace Corner Simple (49)

Brace Corner Tubes and PL (44)

ll1

Brace Middle Simple (149)

Brace Middle Tubes andPL (144)

Central Bracing Simple (51)

Cenfll Brace Tube! Conn P1(50) Bracing Wrap Around w! Attachments (53)

Bracing Wrap Around (46)

LS Brace Col End P1(24)

t

TS Brace Col End P1(25)

Bracing Cross Under Beam (45)

Brace Clamp (28)

Hss Brace Special (66)

Hss Brace Special (67)

Brace wit’s (71)

Brace w!L’s (70)

Splice Type 1(56) :‘

Purlin 1(61)

Iuu

II 2L Splice Connection (63)

DC

Splice Plate 2 (62)

Column Splice 3 (68)

II Tube Column Splice (65)

Tekia Structures Reference 25 Tekia Structures Connecton Map

n T

Seat Conn Type 1 (52)

Simple Clip Angle 2(82)



Seat Det Type 1(1033)

ru’I

Seat Det Type 2(1032)



Seat Type 5 (60)

Joist Seat (58)

Wind Col 1(26)

1’

)

Seat Type 9 (73) Simple Base Plate (55) Simple Base Plate 2(1031)

A

Bolted Cap Plate (27)

Handrail 1 (74) Dowco Bolt Macro (41)

Stiffeners (1034)

Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42)

DC

31F

Clip Angles (44)

Line/Part INTERSECTION (43)

1 26

Tekla Structures Reterence Tekia Structures Connection Map

Index

NUMERICAL

C

2L Splice (152) 2-Sided Joist to Col. (162)

17 21

A Anglecut(1057) Angle profile box (1040) Angle profile box (170) Apex haunch (106) Auto Position (S67)

15 21 21 16 18

B Base plate (1004) 14 Base plate (1042) 14 Base plate (1053) 14 Batten plates (585) 15 Beam prep (183) 12 Beam to beam stub connection (135) 11 Beam with stiffener (129) 10 Bearing plate (7) 11 Bentplate(151) 10 Bent Shear Plate (48) 24 Bolted Cap Plate (27) 26 Bolted gusset (11) 13 Bolted moment connection (134) 10 Boomerang bracing cross (60) 13 Boomerang tube diagonal (59) 13 Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) 13 Box column base plate (1066) 14 Box girder (S13) 17 Box girder splice (45) 15 Brace Clamp (28) 25 Brace Corner Simple (49) 25 Brace Corner Tubes and PL (44) 25 Brace Middle Simple (149) 25 Brace Middle Tubes and PL (144) 25 Brace wIL’s (70) 25 Brace w/L’s (71) 25 Bracing cross (19) 13 Bracing Cross Under Beam (45) 25 Bracing Wrap Around (46) 25 Bracing Wrap Around w/ Attachments (53) .25 Bridging Macro (S80) 22 Building ($58) 18 Built up box (56) 18 .

Cage Ladder (S60) Caste-in plate (1069) Central Brace Tube/Conn P1(50) Central Bracing Simple (51) Circular base plates (1052) Circularjoiningplates(124) Clip angle (116) Clip Angles (44) Cold rolled overlap Cold rolled overlap (19) Cold Rolled Sleeved (2) Cold rolled sleeved (4) Column Site Weld Splice (137) Column splice (132) Column splice (42) Column Tube Seating (100) Column with shear plate (131) Column with stiffeners (186) Column with stiffeners (188) Column with stiffeners 5 (187) Column with stiffeners W (182) Composite brace (579) Connection plate (1026) Corner bolted gusset (57) Corner tube gusset (56) Corner wrapped gusset (63) Crankedbeam(41) Create current connection Cross (4) Cross angles between points (S50) Cross arms (565) Cross plate (S33) Cross profile (S32) Crushed tube in bolts (S48) Crushed tube in points ($46)

19 14 25 25 14 17 12 26 22 23 22 23 17 17 17 16 10 10 10 10 10 18 20 13 13 13 16 10 16 15 18 18 18 15 15

D Diag brace conn. (12) Diagonal splice (53) Display AutoConnecfion dialog Dividing part (1054) Double angle between bolts (S51) Double Bent Gussets (140) Double plate (50) Doubler plate (1022) Dowco Bolt Macro (41)

22 13 10 17 15 13 16 15 26

Tekia Structures Reterence Index

27

Duct hole sleeve (1029) DWG profile to library (6)

.15 22

E Eave Beams-Stanchion Eaves beam to stanchion (104) Eaves haunch (102) End plate Comp flange (111) End plate (101) End plate(144) End plate(29) End oate detail (1002) -

22 23 16 12 12 10 11 14

J Joining plates (14) Joining Stub (119) Joist bearing plate (1067) Joist Seat (58) Joist to Beam and Col. (164) Joist to Beam, type 1(160) Joist to Column, type 1(161) Joist to Column, type 2(163)

Find a component Fithaunch(51) Fitting (13) Folded plate (1055) Footipak anchoring (564) Fulldepm(164) Full depth S (185)

10 16 12 17 14 10 10

G Gable Post Shear Plate (105) Generation of profiles (9) Grating penetration (92) Gusset stiffeners (171) Gusset tube in bolts (649) Gusset tube in points (547) Gusset wrapped diacro (62) Gutter (7)

23 22 20 14 15 15 13 22

H HN Shallow Framing (30) HNShearPl(64) Handrail 1 (74) Handrailing (1024) Haunch (40) Heavy brace (165) Heavy bracegusset(166) Helicoidal stairs (S59) Hollow column stubs (S69) Horizontal stiffener (1017) Hql(46) Hss Brace Special (66) Hss Brace Special (67)

24 24 26 19 16 13 13 19 17 14 11 25 25

I Inner Diaphragm (1059)

17

r

K Kickplate (S75)

F

17 11 21 26 21 21 21 21

19

L L splice (175) Ladder (535) Ladder pieces (1056) Leg 1 Diagonal (178) Leg -23 Diagonals (177) Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) Line/Part INTERSECTION (43) Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) LProf base detail (1020) LS Brace Col End P1(24) -

17 19 20 13 13 15 26 26 22 25

c’

M Manlocic beam (1033) Manlock column (1032) Moment connection (130) Moment connection (181) Moose splice (125) Muffe (26) Multiple beam railing (S84) Multiple Stiffeners (1064)

15 15 12 10 17 17 19 14

N NetHooks(1061) New notch (49) Next page arrow Non-Continuous Rail (106) Notch (76) Notched seating (9)

15 12 10 23 12 16

0 Offshore (194) Offshore4(195) Offshcre U (193) OffthoreZ(192)

12 17 17 17

‘4 28

Tekla Strucwres Reference ndex

p Panel in database (8) Panel stabilizer (114) Parallel L profiles (176) Partial stiff end plate (65) Penetrating diaphragm (1058) Plate with nail (47) Polybeam pan (573) Portal bracing (105) Portal span (S2) Previous page arrow Profile cross-section from plate (10) Pumi (1035) Pum2(1036) PumS (1037) Purlin 1(61) Purlin connections (11) Purlin connections (93)

.22 16 17 11 14 11 19 13 18 10 22 15 15 15 25 22 16

R Rail joint (70) Railing beam to beam (88) Railing beam to plane (89) Railing double curve (95) Railing plane to beam (94) Railing plane to plane (90) Railings (S77) Rolledcans(S21) Round tube (23) Rubber window gasket (4)

21 19 19 19 19 19 19 17 12 22

S Safety rope hooks (1062) Sag rods (S54) Seat Conn Type 1 (52) Seat Conn Type 2 (54) Seat Conn Type 3 (59) Seat Conn Type 4 (57) Seat Det Type 1 (1033) SeatDetType2(1032) Seat Type 5 (60) SeatType9(73) Seating (30) Seating (39) Seating cap (37) Seating cap plate (2) Seating with nail (36) Set Clearance (570) Shaped Valley Cleat (8) Shear and Flange Plates (43) Shear P1 Built-up T (69) Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41) Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42) Shear P1 FuW Depth (37) Shear P1 Full Depth Soecial (39)

15 18 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 16 16 16 16 16 17 22 24 24 24 24 24 24

Shear P1 Parallel (40) Shear P1 Simple (35) Shear P1 to Top Special (38) Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) Shear P1 Welded Top (36) Shear plate (103) Shear plate simple (146) Shear plate to hip Shear plate tube column (189) ShearStud (1010) Shed (557) Simple Base Plate (55) Simple Base Plate 2 (1031) Simple Clip Angle (31) Simple Clip Angle 2 (82 Simple Endplate (32) Simple Hip (14) Spacer plate (48) Spiral stair (S68) Splice Plate 2 (62) Splice Type 1 (56) Staging Parts (1063) Stairs (S82 Stairs detail (1038) Stairs detail (1039) Stairs detail (1043) Stanchion curved (84) Stanchion double plate (87) Stanchion side plate (83) Stanchion side profile (86) Stanchion weld (85) Stanchions (S76) Standard gusset (1065) Standard L (1051) Standard Tee (1050) Stay (10) Std bracing connection (67) Stiffened base plate (1014) Stiffened end plate (27) Stiffened notch (1006) Stiffened shear plate (17) Stiffener seating (12) Stiffeners (1003) Stiffeners (1030) Stiffeners (1034) Stiffeners (1041) Stinger cut (1023) Stringer stanchion Lprof (68) Stringer stanchion stiff (69) Stub (lOll) Stub (133) Stub (28) Stub plate (1013)

24 24 24 24 24 12 10 23 10 15 18 26 26 24 26 24 23 11 19 25 25 15 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 19 14 14 14 22 13 14 11 14 11 11 14 14 26 14 20 20 20 15 11 21 21

T Tab plate (33) Tapered beam (S98) Tapered beam 2(S45)

17 18 18

Tekia Stwolures Reference Index

29

Tapered Column (136) .17 Tapered column (599) 18 Tapered column 2(S44) 18 Tapered column-beam stub (150) 11 Tapered frame comonor (S53) 18 Tekia Structures Connections Page 1 10 Tekla Structures Connections Page 10 19 Tekla Structures Connections Page 12 21 Tekia Structures Connections Page 13 22 Tekta Structures Connections Page 14 23 Tekla Structures Connections Page 1X 24 Tekla Structures Connections Page 2 11 Tekla Structures Connections Page 2X 25 Tekla Structures Connections Page 3 12 Tekla Structures Connections Page 3X 26 Tekla Structures Connections Page 4 13 Tekla Structures Connections Page 5 14 Tekia Structures Connections Page 6 15 Tekla Structures Connections Page 7 16 Tekia Structures Connections Page 8 17 Tekla Structures Connections Page 9 18 Tower diagonal (S66) 18 Tower Generation (843) 18 Tower member macro (S63) 18 Traction bar(52) 16 Truss (S78) 18 TS Brace Col End Pt (25) 25 Tube Column Splice (65) 25 Tube crossing (22) 13 Tube gusset (20) 13 Tube rail (113) 16 Tube seat (104) 16 Tube splice (6) 17 Tubular NC data (S22) 17 Turnbuckle bracing (S3) 18 Turnbuckle connection (126) 17 Twin profile connection plate (1046) 15 Two Side Clip Angle (33) 24 Two Side Endplate (34) 24 Two side shear plate (118) 12 Two-side clip angle (117) 12 Two-sided clip angle (143) 10 Two-sided end plate Cfl (112) 12 Two-sided end plate (115) 12 Two-sided end plate (142) 10 Two-sided end plate (24) 11

U.S. splice joint (77)

17

t

V Vertical bracing PS (856)

18

w Web stiffened base plate (1016) Web stiffeners (1060) Weld preparation (44) Welded beam to beam (123) Welded column (31) Welded column with stiffeners (126) Welded gusset (10) Welded shear plate (43) Welded tee (32) Welded to top flange (147) Welded to top flange S(149) Windbracing (1) Wind Col 1(26) Wind column (5) Windbrace connection (110) Windbracing ($55) Wood girder bearing (1015) Wooden steps pan (572) Wrapped cross (61)

14 14 12 12 12 12 13 11 ii 10 10 13 26 21 13 18 16 19 13

z Zpan(S74) Zinc coating hole (561)

19 15

(

-

U Upan (S71) U.S. Base plate (1047) U.S. Base plate connection (71) U.S. Bearing plate (1044) U.S. Seat detail (1048) U.S. Seat detail 2(1049) U.S. Seat joint (72) U.S. Seat joint 2 (73) U.S. Seat joint 3(74) U.S. Seat joint4 (75)

30

Tekla Sbuclures Reference index

19 14 14 16 21 21 21 21 21 21

a

*

1EKLA

Tekia Structures Basic Training Steel

Teka Structures 13.0 Basic Training 9 November 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

F’

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Introduction

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Introduction to Tekia Structures Basic Trainhig Overview Basic Modeling 1 System Components Basic Modeling 2 Interactive Detailing Numbering and Reports Principles of Drawings Assembly and Single Part Drawings General Arrangement Drawings Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering Drawing Management How to use the training material

Copyright@ 2007 Tekla Corporation

.1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6

TEKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININS Introduction

iii

C

0

I U iv

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAINING Introduction

CopflbtCO7TaCcqwdm

Introduction to Tekia Structures Basic Training

Overview This training course will demonstrate how to create a 3D model of a building, and produce drawings and reports from the model with Tekia Structures. The training is divided into lessons, each of which covers a certain particular task of the design process and introduces the commands and functions required to complete that particular task. The training workflow is designed to resemble a real design project, and the training model is taken from a real building project. The model is a paper industry building. a de inking plant, which is comprised of two blocks mode] I and model 2. The substructures are made of reinforced concrete, and the superstructures are modeled with both steel and concrete structures. —

Copydghl © 2007 Tekla corporaton

IESLA STRUCTURES 13M BASIC TRAINING Introduction

e Basic Modeling I This lesson introduces the basic modeling thnctions of Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: • start a new structural 3D model •

create rids

•

create views

•

create concrete and steel parts.

•

use CAD principles like absolute and relative reference points

•

use polar tracking

•

manipulate memtrs within the model (copy, move, mirror)

System Components This lesson introduces the basics of creating connections in Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: • create connections

2

•

work with connection parameters

•

save the parameters for later use

•

clash check the model

IEKLASTRuCTIJRES 130 BASIC TRAiNING Introduction

Copyrightt 2007 Tetla Corporation

Basic Modeling 2 In this lesson we will recap the basic functions introduced in lesson 1, and you will learn some more about the basic functions. You will learn how to: • adjust member attributes •

use coordinate locks

•

input construction points

•

work in true planes (sloped, skewed)

•

combine separate models.

•

create a backup model

•

import a previously created model

•

define select filters

•

work with phases

•

setup job specific information

Interactive Detailing This lesson introduces how to interactively create unique or customized connections between paris You will learn how to: • explode system connections and modi connection objects (parts, welds, bolts, cuts) •

add system components to previously exploded connections

•

create unique connection objects interactively.

•

define and apply custom components

Numbering and Reports How to handle part marking within Tekla Structures is covered in this chapter. You will learn: • numbering basics •

how to customize the numbering system

•

numbering in phases

•

how- to create reports

CopyiigfiI ® 2007 Tekla Corpoiation

TLKLA STRUCtURES 13.0 BASIC TRAJNINS Introduction

3

Principles of Drawings

F’

This lesson introduces the basics of how to create and handle drawings in Tekia Structures. You will learn: • the integration between the drawings and the model •

the drawing types available in Tekla Structures

•

the basics of the drawing list

•

the various levels of editing drawings

Assembly and Single Part Drawings The next step is to learn how to create fabrication drawings for the items that were created in the model. You will learn: • how to create individual drawings •

how to use selection filters to create groups of drawings of members with similar attributes

•

how to create drawings automatically using wizards

•

editing drawings manually

•

handling drawing after changes are made to the model.

General Arrangement Drawings This lesson covers how to create erection plans, details and section views. You will learn how to: • create anchor bolt plans

4

•

create erection plans of individual views

•

create general arrangements of multiple views on one sheet

•

modi& drawings properties

•

modi view properties

•

modi& object properties

•

create drawing objects

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13t BASIC TINlNG Introduction

Copyright® 2007 Tekla corporaton

Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering This lesson introduces multi-drawings and explains the principles of multi-numbering. You wilt learn how to • create multi-drawings •

collect multiple assembly or single-part drawings to one multi-drawing sheet

•

apply multi-numbering to multi-drawings

•

update and modib’ multi-drawings.

Drawing Management This lesson covers more advanced aspects of handling drawings You will learn how to • control revisions •

edit drawings more effectively using classifiers and cloning

•

customize drawing borders by adding logos

•

make and use basic drawing templates

•

plot drawings

•

export drawings in other file formats

•

share your model eleconically

CopyrfhI ti 2007 Tekla Corparafion


5

r How to use the training material Al] the lessons in this training material deal with the same project (except the Analysis & Design lesson). Therefore you should go through the lessons in numerical order. Each lesson starts with a short introduction to its contents. All lessons are comprised mainly of step-by-step instructions, which are complemented by background and additional information. The label titles in the left side margin are an indication that you will be asked to do something. Pictures of the dialog boxes and of the mode] help you to visualize the instructions and show the desired result. The necessary background data is given either by the teacher (in training courses) or through links to the Tekla Structures online help. If you cannot attend a training course, the links provide you with the information you need to complete the course by yourself. These links give you the related information quickly and easily, and enable the usage of this training material also for self-learning. The online help will assist you in getting the most from this course. Note that with the assistance of online help you will learn to use Tekla Structures as efficiently as possible from the very beginning. See the figure below for an example of the step-by-step instructions and an online help link. We wilt tios create Etevetjou and Plan t-iews alone the ecidluies created in the previous it cc jot, A V]C’A is a ‘epresenranion oft model from a specik oeation. Each view is displayed In its own window inside the TekIa Sr.’ucrures window. Each view has a view plane on which the nith al-c visible and points are i epiesented as yellow crosset Points outside die view plane appear asoed dots. Help link

Label

For mote infonna lion see

views

(rRieate views aIon5 idhnes. I

2 Step—by—ste instruction

&

j1Zling>ftthgsta,iedTeii

Select one widtine Riahi-click and select Create view> Grid views from die pop-tip menu to open the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

lekia Structures Online Help

Hide

Back

çoreerts

Irdex

-

Print

Qptions

Starch

Fevctaes

.

A -

[21 Telda Slrtfl.res orfrie he [2) ustig crhne ne4o I? TekStrflresrodcies

U

Re,easa lisa Mcdeg

j Prelece Introduction 2 Getting Slatted 1

*

EVJ

Basics

-t

•Lia 2.2 Grids

2)View plane [j View properties Defining grid View ProF [2) creating end modifyng

)

-

-

6

ocerw, ctstg, 2)Dispeyt,gw’dh’±o

) Retresh. the sc-eel,

TEKLASTRuCTSJRES 13_a SASIC TRAINING Introduction

1]

TEJCLA

2.3 Views Intro d u cti on There are severaJ ways to create views in Tekia Structures. For example, you can create views:

structure part(s) and component(s) • along the grid lines • of the entire • of selected

Each view has properties whch define its aFpeaance You tar c1ane the appearance of a -new afta you create t so choose the rrpatinn mpthnri that q,,it en’’ This cpr,inn

Copyright (5 2137 Tukla Corporation

Certain styles of text will be used throughout in order to help the reader differentiate between different instructions: Normal text is wTitten in Times New Roman 10 Pt Filenames are written in Mat Qpt Terms that are first introduced are written in Times New Roman Italics lOpt Items that are shown on screen are written in Aria! Bold Spt Help File Paths are written in Times New Roman Bold. Blue. lOpt

Program text is written in Courier New lOpt Icons are also used to highlight certain information:

A warning triangle highlights a note that is worth remembering. Or it may serve to point out a potential problem to be avoided.

• •

‘...

Stop Signs are severe warnings. lgnonng the text accompanying these may cause something to fail or cause a process to produce unexpected results.

Tips are shown with a light bulb icon. They provide additional information that may help speed up your learning or help you produce better or quicker results.

Technical Information is denoted by gear wheels. You can choose to ignore this info until you are more confident with the system or you can pay attention to it if you are curious.

The aim of this training material is to teach you best practices, the most efficient way to use Tekla Structures. However, the aim is also to introduce alternative methods to carry out tasks. This means that repeated tasks are occasionally calTied out with using different procedures than those presented earlier in the lessons.

Copyri9ht © 2007 Tekla CoiparaCon


7

1)

‘Ii

8

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAS[C TRAINING Introduction

Copyright© 2007 Tokla Corporation

e*e

TEKLA

Basic Modeling I

Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

)

0

1—li

TEKL STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

Copyght © 2007 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Basic Modeling 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1,8 1.9 1.1 1.11

Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporation

I

Start Tekia Structures Create a New Model BasicModell Create Grids Create Plane Views along Gridlines Create Foundations Create Columns Silos Create Beams Create Bradng Add lnfill Beams Add Horizontal Bracing

2 3 6 10 17 24 27 30 45 52 55

—

TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-ui

C

I -iv

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNG Basic Modeling I

Copyrighl© 2007 Tekla Corporation

F,

-

Basic Modeling

In this lesson

In this lesson we will go through the basic fUnctions of Tekla Structures: How to create anew structural 3D model, grids, grid views and structural members in the model. When you have completed this lesson the model will look as shown below.

,çr

7

p

Copyhght © 2007 Tekia Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1—1

1.1

r.

Start Tekia Structures

Start Tekia Structures

To start Tekla Structures, dick the Windows Start button. Navigate through Programs> Tekia Structures> Single user> Tekia Structures enu US Imperial. This Will start Tekla Structures in an imperial measure environment using the English language.

Documentation

Tco[s 1’

felda Sfructajres enu US Irnperi T&da

—

S

k

:tit-es enu US ‘etrc

The modeling interface is now opened as shown below. At first, most of the menu options and icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open an existing model or create a new model, the icons and available menu options will become active.

— -—. j.

,.

—-

— —

fl—I

— — — — —

niAWC

IAI

-*tij

a’,MMa

iPAPflaiØdI

1-2

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TMINING Basic Modeling I

tniai—’-*.

•Ø ’ 1 ’.

ala

Ic.-

A4

Copytght © 2007 TekIa corporation

4’)

1.2 Create a New Model

—

BasicModell

To stan a new model, you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name. In this lesson use the name BasicModel 1 followed by your name. Start a

new model

J

1.

Select File> New... from the pull-down menu or click the New model icon in the Standard toolbar to open the New model dialog box.

2.

At the lower center of the New Model dialog box, Tekla Structures suggests the name New ModeL for the model (see below). The fill path of the model folder is shown in the top field.

3.

Name the model BasicModell-yournarne. (Adding your own name to the model name helps to identii your model on a netwurk, especially during the training class)

C:\TeklaStnjcturesModels\Vi 3.fl\SteeN

Save in

Model nate: Basic iodeI1-FirstNaneLas1ame Single-user

Model type:

[ 4.

OK

Select single user mode. ‘I,

5.

The Multi-User facility in Tekla allows a multiple amount of users in one model. This is particularly usefUl when a number of detailers are working on one contract.

Click the OK button to create the new model.

The menus and icons become activated and the model name appears in the title bar of the Tekla Structures window.

r: TekLa Structures zIe

Eda

J

1 h il

View

1 i aIj

-

Points

C:\TektaStructuresModels\BasicModetl Parts

€1 t 1

)I,

Loads

Detailing

c4d-¾-d

Drawing

Prcperties

CQC!

L

Setup

Tools

LLL V

Every model must have a unique name. Tekia Structures does not allow model names. Do not use special marks ( / \; ) in model names. duplicate

Copyraht © 2007 lekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRArNINIG Basic Modeling I

1-3

‘I,

You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model.

V

‘I

Tekla Structures automatically created a grid and a 3D view according to the saved standard view properties. The default 3D view and grid are shown below.

•Viewl

-

3d

D

1.

C B

3 -.

A

4

Lines show the projections of the grids that are visible on the view plane. Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using a green, dashed line cube. For more information, see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Basics.

To save the model: Save the model

‘-4

Select File> Save from the pull-down menu or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar. ‘I,

Remember to save your model often, and always save when opening a new model or exiting Tekla Structures model.

4% 1-4


Copytghl @2007 Tea Ccrpcraton

Tekla Structures also includes an auto save feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals. These intervals are set in the Autosave properties dialog box obtained from the Tools> Options.., pull-down menu.

IR Options

[jj

standard

[Save osJ standard Hidden lines No dotted

Cleats check

zceLzng >cu5e settir4a

Ntithexing Crientsticn zarks Omits and decl,r.aia

C Olli pals ddled CAt pails dcjted So5ds

s’

Autosave Autosave inteival Autosave after evely

20

modeling or editing commands

Autosave after creating every

10

drawings

LOK

[Aavanced.. I

ir

Apply

I

flcanc&

For more information on saving and auto saving, see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Basics> Saving a model and exiting Tekla Structures

Most commands for Tekla Structures are found both in menus (main or pop-up) and in toolbars (icons). In this training manual we will mainly use the pop-up menu to activate commands. ‘I,

V

There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures: Icons Commands in main pull-down menu Commands in pop-up menu By default all the commands are found in pull-down menu, and most of them in the icons. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button (right-click). If you have an object selected, the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.

For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars, see: Help: Modeling> Introduction> Screen layout

Help: Modeling> Introduction

Copyrtghl © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

>

Toolbars

TEKLt SThUCTURES 13.D BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-5

1.3 Create Grids Properties dialog box

In order to create or modi& the grid you need a basic understanding of how to use a property dialog box. All entities in Tekia Structures such as grids, views, beams, connections, even points and welds have properties. You can see and modi& the properties of an object by double clicking on the object in the model. Double click on the grid and the grid properties dialog box will open. Note the buttons along the bottom of the box. These are typical for most property dialog boxes in lekia Structures.

Ii

Deate

Mody

/rII

Get

Cbse

In this case you will have the option to Create a new grid, Modify an existing grid, or Get the properties of an existing grid by highlighting the grid and clicking the Get button. You can also Close the dialog box. Note the buttons along the top of the dialog box. These are typical for most property dialog boxes in Tekla Structures.

Save j standaid

You have the option to Save the settings as they stand, select different saved settings from the pull down menu and Load them, or save changed settings with a new Save As name typed in to the field now named Standard. To create the appropriate grid for Ba.sicModel as shown below, you can delete the existing grid and create a new one from the Points > Grid.., pull-down menu, Or you can modiz the existing grid.

an

1-6

.


CopyTtght

2001 TekIa Corporalion

#5

Elevation

•

.

.

To modi’ the existing grid: Modify the existing grid

1.

Double-click on a gridline. This opens the Grid properties dialog box.

2.

Complete the Grid dialog box as shown below by fillmg In the X, V and Z coordinates and the labels for the gridlines.

Copyñght © 2007 Tek]a Corporation

.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC I RAINING Basic Modeling I

1—7

r v [Save as standard Cooidinates

U’ 61 9-8’

RN

0” 43-2’

Ez

012-79/2240 44-0”

Labels 1234567

AB

Eiz

012-71/2 24’0’ 44W

Line extersions Leit/Below

LJY

Origi flight/Above

6’•O’

6-0”

8-0’

6,-a”

EXO

0”

Eva

0”

—]

a-’

P1 agnetisrn

E Magnetic grid plane

D

EExensbIneticeree

U’

C the, sett,’gs

E

H

Create

‘I,

Hoddy

jj

Get

Close

There are a number of ways you can type fractions in Tekia Structures including fractional inches (75/8), Decimal inches (7.5 for 7’/z’), Feet and inches (755/8 or 75.625) or even decimal feet (7.5’ for 7-6) The program will convert whatever you type into a format that it can use. You don’t have to type the inch symbol when you mean inches. It will always assume this by default.

3.

Click Modify to apply the new grid values.

4.

In the Save as field, enter the grid file name, GRID-BASICMODEL1, and click the Save as button to save the grid values for later use.

I R1 5.

1-B

p

‘Jser-de1ed attiRes..

GHID•BASICMQDEL1

GRID-BASICPiIODEL1

I

I

Click Close to close the dialoQ box.

WCA STR,CPJRES 13.0 SAS C TRAINiNG 1

Basic Modeling I

Iseveasi

0 GopyTigni

( 2007 Tekia Corporal’on

V

You can make grids and grid lines act magnetically so that the objects on the grid lines follow if you move the grid line. To bind objects to grid lines, select the magnetic grid plane checkbox. In the Extension for magnetic area field, enter a distance from the grid line to extend the area within which the objects are bound to the end lines.

For more information on grids and dialog box buttons, see: Help: Modeling> Introduction / —

>

Inputting information

>

Common buttons

The numeric units used in the Grid dialog box (as well as in other modeling dialog boxes) can be controlled from the Units and decimals.., dialog box obtained from the Tools>Options pull-down menu, Units and decimals topic.

When the grid was modified, the work area of the view, shown with the dashed line cube, was not updated.

To fit the work area according to the modified grid: Fit work area

qeerrun.

I.

Click in the view to activate it. The border will turn red when the view is active.

2.

Right-click and select Fit work area from the pop-up menu.

-‘rIQerves

Ivlo,e Fit work area Redrau window

The view should now look as shown below:

Bl

A

6

AZ

Copyrighl © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-9

To hide the work area cube, Select the view then hold down the CTRL+SHIFT keys and right click then select Redraw Window

r

1.4 Create Plane Views along Gridlines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines created in the previous section. A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the main Tekla Structures window. Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible. For more information, see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Views. Create Plan view

To create a plan view 1.

Open the view properties dialog box by double clicking anywhere in the 3d view. These are the properties of the 3d view.

1i::J E!i:i

standard

[Save a] standard

View Name: 3O

An*:

Orthogon

Projection:

Rotation aroundZ:

-30.0000

Rotation around K

20. 0000

Pepierentatior, View type:

Rendered

Color ad transpaency in all views:

staiard

Visibility View depth:

E Up:

50-0” 3-0’

Down: Visibility of object types:

Display...

r

E Visible object group:

[ 2.

OK

jj

Apply

H

.-

1 Object group..

Modify

Get

j[w/rlflCancel

1

Note the Name 3d, the Angle of view is 3d and the view will be looking lip 50’-O and Down 3’-O into virtual reality from the location where the view was cut at the 0-0” level

4 1-10

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC T,INING Basic Modeling I

Copyñght © 2007 TelcIe Corporation

U

3.

From the pull down menu at the top of the view properties dialog box, select Plan View and click Load.

IHa-i

!Plan View

I

View 2 Name:

Plan View

PLAN AT EL OO

2

0 Plane L

2 Projection:

Orthogonal

Rotation around 2:

-30.0000

2 Rotation aroundX:

20. 0000

-J 1

Representation

[ View type:

fR erdeie.2

‘I

2 Color and lransparency in all views:

standard

V


Up:

[epresentation]

—1

[ Down: Visibility ot oect types:

Lpjspi...

Visible object group:

OK

Create Basic Views

IL

Apply

v object group,..

jflModwy

IL

Get

Cancel

4.

In the name field after the text PLAN AT EL. type the elevation of the view you wish to create, in this case 0-0. Note the setting for the angle of view is now Plane instead of 3d, and the view is going to look Up and Down into virtual reality 3’-O” from the location of the cut in the model so you don’t see the steel in the floor above or below.

5.

Click Apply so these settings, or attributes, will be used for the next view created. It is important to click the apply button or you will create a view with the “old” applied settings which in this case were 3d. The name, angle and up and down depth of the view would still be set as 3d, and the new view created would be considered a copy view.

6.

Click on the Create basic view icon

7.

The following dialog box Will open. The default elevation is 0”. Once a different elevation as been input, that elevation becomes the default. This is typical of most property dialog boxes in Tekia Structures.

8.

Enter the elevation to cut the view you applied setting, in this case 0,-n,,

9.

Click Create.

Copy,ight @} 2007 Tekia Corporation

Plane:

v

Coordinate: 0” Create

j

Cancel

TEKL4 STRUCTURES 1O BASIC TRAiNING Basic Modeling I

1-11

You should now have a p]an view cut at elevation O’O”. You can double click in the view and modi’ the name of the view, the type of cut, (Plan or 3d) and the distance the view will display up and down, but you can never modi& or change where the view was cut. Create elevation view

S

To create an elevation view, 2.

Open the view properties dia]og box if it isn’t already open.

3.

Select Elevation View from the pull down menu at the top of the dialog box and click Load.

4.

In the Name field, after the text ELEVATION ON GRID type the name of the grid line for which you wish to cut an elevation view.

Save asj ElevationView

Elevation View

View Name:

ELEVATION ON GRID A

C

E Angle:

Orthogonal

Projection:

Roion agoi.ndZ:

•30. 0000

E Rotation around X:

20. 0000

Plane

Repiesentation View type:

fLei!dered

Color and transparency in all views:

standard


V

[Representation]

Up: JDown

Visibility ol object types:

Display...

Visible thject group:

OK

5.

][

Apply

standard

][

Modily

[object group...]

]

Get

]IP’/r]F

Cancel

J

Click Apply so these settings, or attributes, will be used for the next view created.

(a 1-12

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASFC TRAiNING

Basic Modeling I

Coprnght ©

2007 TekIa Corporalion

Create view Dy two points

I

Click on the Create view by

2.

In the plan view you created at elevation 0, click on the intersection of grid lines A and I. As you move the cursor you win see arrows pointing the direction the cut will face.

in

1

2

two

points icon

3

4

5

6

7

B

A

A

3.

Click on the intersection of grid lines A and 7.

4.

You have now created on elevation view for grid liie A. Click OK to close the Views dialog box.

Tekla Snctures offers a tool to quickly create views for each elevation and grid line as specified in the grid properties, and name these views with the markers you specified. Note that these views will always be cut looking north and west. To automatically create views along gridlines and elevations,

Create grid views

CopyTight©

1.

Select a gridline to highlight the grid.

2.

Right-click and select Create view> Grid views from the pop-up menu.

2007 Teka Corporaton

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAJNING Basic Modeling I

1-13

n

“tetuot

C

Propeies

Inquire Copy rAoe Delete Exact lines —I Ce

FC€

Create flew

Eas.c Grid ews

Bind to dane Zoom Update w1ndow Next window

3.

This opens the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box shown here. Creation at views along grid lines V

j

View plane Number oF views View name preFix XY

YZ OK

standaid

View properkies

All

v PLANATEL

PlanView

All

v

ELEVATION ON GRID

ElevatnView

ELEVATION CN GRID

Elevati,View

All Create

I v] Showj

1

“I

Show V

Sh

[Canoe

4.

Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box and the views will automatically be created.

5.

Note the view properties. These are the same settings you selected from the pull down menu at the top of the dialog box when you created each view. To view these setting you can click on the Show button and the view properties dialog box will open.

6.

Click OK to close the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box. Note that if the grid properties were incorrect in some way, for example a label was missing, the views you create using this method could be named wrong or cut at the wrong elevations.

The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. All invisible (closed) named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right (see below).

‘4 1-14

TEK STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I

pght © 27Tekla rratn

L

Seled and move ews between the hsls to co.td .4sit4y To seled mt1jle views. h± dow,n oW -key v * secIing 1

LVste vws

Named vws ELEVATION :LE7aIDtc ILEVATEOR ELEATIOE :Ir;ATIOt: 1:172J1010 A1:Oc 5 101

ON GRID 1 OtT 2t0 2 ON OAID 3 @2104 ON

3d

cc

t.J

ON ON 2210 ELr5:OI OR 2C0 :Lt;c:or Ott SAID 3 502-i’: AT 1L 5L-N AT IL. 24—0

4. Delete

For more information on view properties. see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Views> View properties To display or hide views: Display or hide

1.

Clicking the Open named view list icon will open the Views dialog box (which is already open).

2.

Select the view(s) you want to display or hide.

3.

Use the arrows to move view(s) from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).

views

-n 4 Select and move views between the lists to contiol visibility. To select multiple views, hold down ctil key while selecting.

2

Named ews.

1; 0•

I B.

ELEVATIOR ELZ’JMICU ELEVAIIDN ELEVATICI-I ELEVATION

C-N 041 ON ON ON ELEVATION ON ILrYATIC•N 3fl ELEVATION ON

Visible views: GAIl GAID SAID SAID @210 c-aiD

c-AID

i 2 3 4 S 3 7

GRID B

1

-

-

-

IL-i3JlO-NOU SAID- A PLAN AT EL. 0

[• Celele

PLAN A! EL. 12—7112 PLAN Ii EL. 24—C’ PLAN AT EL, 44—0

OK

copyflght © 2007 Tetra Corpcralion

J

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC T4INING Basic Modeling I

1-15

/ —

Q Rotate the model

Do not keep too many views open at the me time. Nine is the mimum number of open views. You can open or close named views by clicking the Open named view list icon. Delete unnecessary views from the view list. To switch between views, press “Ctrl+Tab” on your keyboard.

You can rotate the model in a 3D view using the default center of rotation, or you can set a new center of rotation. The center of rotation is displayed with the symbol below.

/

J.

Change between 3D I Plane

I.

To rotate the model, hold down the “Ctrl” key, then click and hold down the middle mouse button while moving the mouse to rotate the model.

2.

To reset the center of rotation, press the V key on your keyboard.

3.

In the view, click where you want the center of rotation to be.

You can switch a view from plane (2D) to 3D by using the keyboard. The keyboard shortcut CtrItP” is how you dothis, which can bevery usefUl when working on your model.

5

3 2 ..:‘.ç•,.)<

_.:‘•ç

4

6 ,K:

7 B S..

N.

A

H..,

.4..

1 B

2

AL

3

4

3)

41

56

i

L 1-16

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAlJlNG Basic Modeting I


4

___________ ___________ _ ______ _______ ____

1.5 Create Foundations ‘We ‘will now create foundations in the model.

.

To create footings for columns: Create Pad Footing

1.

Close all open views but the 3d view and plan view at elevation 0, then click OK to close the Views dialog box.

S

2.

From the Window pull down menu s&ect Tile vertically to make the views fill the work area. You can also double click on the view border to make it fill the work area.

3.

Double-click on the Create pad footing icon. This opens the Pad footing properties dialog box.

4.

The dialog box for Pad footing properties should appear as shown (Change any attributes that may appear differently).

5.

Click Apply.

6.

In the plan view, pick the id intersection A-I to create the footing.

CDpyrrght © 2007 Tekla Corration

____________________

_______

footing properties

Pad

v

standard Attributes

Position

PAO_FQCThNZ

j1 Prolthe

77W

2

X00

E

2 Class

6

2

L

LOK

standard

Cast unit

2 Name

2 Finish

[saveasi

[eiect.

erde,’ned a2rrtes

j[

APPbJj

MceJty

J[ s

J[w/rI[

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING

Basic Modeling I

Caicel

1-17

C

4

— -

-r--4-—

>/‘.A

I_____________

7.

/

Create the rest of the 70*70 footings at the other intersections of gridline A by picking each position.

Help: Modeling> Parts> Part location> Position on work plane Help: Modeling> Pans> Part location> Position depth Help: Modeling> Parts> Part properties> Profile

You can undo (and redo) previous commands one by one since the last save, by clicking the icons or typing “Ctrl + Z” (Undo) and ‘•Ctrt + Y” (Redo).

(p Footings along grid line B

While Still in the Create pad footing command, 1.

2.

Completethe Pad footing properties dialog box for a 106106 footing as shown

Click OK.

€ Pad footing properties Save as Attr,butes

Position

s1idard

Cast unit

PAD_FOG TINS

Name

0 ProFile

105906”

Material

3000

iF_Select.

El Finish Class

El

8

LY! attr&*es.. I 7ppJ LModiIy ii

A

[F/zn

Cancel

if you dont click the OK button, the dialog box will remain open. You can also close a dialog box by clicking the Cancel button or Kin the top right corner of that dialog box. Clicking Apply will apply the settings but keep the dialog box open. Only use Apply if you want to keep the box open. You don’t have to click Apply and OK every time.

0 1-18


Copyright® 2007 Tekia Corporaton

Help: Modeling> Introduction> Inputting information 3.

Create the footings at intersections along gridline B by picking each position.

4.

Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. nterrupt Poirt or grid intersection End Center Mid

Commands will stay active until you interrupt them. To end commands, right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up press the “Esc’ key.

menu,

or

To restart the last command used, press “Enter’. Foundations for silos parametric profiles —

We will create two identical circular foundations for the silos. At first, one foundation will be created at the coordinate (14’-9”. 14-9”) and the other foundation will be created as a copy of the first one. Tekla Structures contains standard (library), parametric, astd user- defined profiles. For the foundation, we will use parametric profiles. Kelp: Modeling> Parts> Part properties> Profile Help: Modeling> Advanced modeling> Parametric Profiles

Create silo footing

1.

Double-click on the Create pad footing icon.

2.

Tn the Profile click the button th three dots as shown. This takes you to the section profile catalog

3.

Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown below.

copyiDht© 2007 Tekia Corporaton

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAINiNG Basic Modeling I

1-19

Pad footing properties standard Attributes

Save as] standard

PDsitionCast unit

Name

PAD_FU UT INS

Profile

106’ ‘l O6•’

Material

000

I[.1

-

E

Select...

r

Finish

A

Class

tJser-deined ath&jtes...

[ThJ[

Apply

][

ModJfJrs&

JIW/rJçpcd

Then find the Round Shapes profile category and then the Di parametric shape

4. t’

Seloe:t profile General Analysis User atotbier

ProBe name. D275”112

Prolietirpe Psslile typo:

Filter:

+

* -

I L ] [ 0 U S -

H

I proNe, L proNe, T protiles Cproilcs Circular hollow sections lm,ta tdk.,

—

a

• Citoilat sections

Prclile subtype: Ptctute

Dkcudae

0 •Ross. Qid

@RB ROD

rUD S

‘8 r1&r Plies r Zoe res 8 Inn

°roets

S

D-atrsm

d

Val 27J2

i •Jri

Plate ptctfes

0 Plate 8 Peril plate • •

0 Floor plate Flat, and Bars

t

‘8 Gratng

23 Show al proliles

5.

23

deteiI,

ClickOK

A

You can select the profile for a part from the Select profile dialog box that opens next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box. You can also enter a profile name in the Profile field in the part properties dialog box.

1-20


Copyrght © 200T Telcia Corporation

L

I? Pad looting properties

IIEJ LL2J Attñbutes

standard

Position

5<

J Save as)

standaid

Cast unit

jName

PAD_FOOTING

ProIiIe

D2751)2

jMakend

XOO

1 3

j Finish B

Class

E

I_tiser-deiiiedaItiAe,

OK

6.

IL

JEIL sJIP/rjI

Cancel

You should still be in the Create pad footing command. (You will see the prompt “Pick Position’ in the status bar located in the lower left corner of the main Tekia Structures window.)

Pick position Locate the Silo Footing

J

7.

If you do not see the prompt “Pick Position’ in the status bar, click once on the Create pad footing icon. This stalls the command with the last applied settings.

8.

Hit the “A” key on the keyboard. The Enter a numeric location dialog box will automatically open with aS in the field. Enter 14.9, 14-9 after the S to define the position for the footing.

Enter a numeric location Location: $1 4-91 4-S

LF1I

The “R” key will open up the Enter a numeric location dialog box with an’@ ‘symbol in the field. This is known as a Relative Snap. (The coordinates you enter will be relative to the last point you clicked. The “A” key is known as an Absolute Snap. (Absolute Snaps are relative to the origin of the model) Help: System> Appendix IL: Reserved Shortcuts

9.

Click OK or hit the “Enter’ key, and the silo footing is created.

Copyright © 2007 tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC ThRINING Basic Modeling I

1-21

10. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. You can also exit any command by using the escape key.

Interrupt Pcint ci qrid r:ersecticr End Snap and Select Icons

In order to work in the model it is important to understand the functionality of the snap and select icons. To open toolbars you can click on the Window pull down menu and select Toolbars. Below are the select icons. These icons allow you to select all parts, or specific parts of the model by dragging a box around the entire model. 4

00

/

a,

/ ifi

sai

V

1’ ‘F

From left to right the select icons are as follows: all, connections, objects, surfaces, points, grid, grid lines, welds, cuts, views, bolt groups, single bolts, reinforcing bar, loads, and distances. The next 4 icons allow you to select connections and assemblies as a whole or as individual entities. Pull down options are offered by Tekla Structures to allow you to select types of members such as beams or columns. The last icon allows you further narrow your selection by specWying more detailed information about an object. For more information on using the select filter see Help: Modeling> Settings and tools >FiIter

1-22

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRrINING Basic Modeling I

4 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

The snap icons function similarly to other computer aided drawing applications. These snap icons are hierarchal from left to right. The two end icons designate if you want to snap only to work points (used mostly for modeling) or all points on corners and edges of objects.

i

(JO

— aV”S

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Tools> Snapping Copy the footing

1.

Click the footing once to select it.

A

2.

If you are working in semi transparent mode (CTRL+2) instead of filly rendered mode (CTRL-I-4) then you will have to select the edges of items rather than the surfaces.

Right-click and select Copy Special

>

Translate.., from the pop-up menu.

Copy Copy secal

notate,,, Mirror.., With three ponts

Move

Move special Delete

—

3.

This opens the Copy translate dialog box shown here.

Copyright 0 2007 TekIa Corporation

-


1-23

0 I

2J
Eth’

Number ol copies

0”

Pick... OK

4.

1[

Copy

j

[

Clear

j [P/F

[Cancel

I

Complete the dialog box as shown and click Copy then OK.

For more information on copy go to Help: Modeling >Settings and tools> Copying and Moving objects 5.

Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. Interrupt Point or grid intersection End

3 Now the footings should look as shown:

e4 s

C

1.6 Create Columns We will first create two of the colunms and then use the Copy command to create the other columns. Create Column Tool

I

1-24

To create the first two co]umns: I.

Double-click on the Create column icon.

2.

Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown on the following (for both the Attributes and Position tabs)

TEKLA STR,XThRES 13.0 SPSi0 TPJH;HG Basic Modeling I

Copyiignt

© 2007 IskIa

corporalon

0 4

J

C.olunin projwitios

Column properlieN v

Sled reieaoeo koJes

Se o!idd

End releaos

Des9i

NLJrmtherirt series Pretre: Part

OeIo’mino

E Assembly

C

21 21 P&e El Malarial: El Finish.

CDt.UMN

Des.

D&Or1O

hrarsin

Stat Seres

Pos tics Start number.

.w

Narre

End re ea,es 1 Attbtes Fsr

Pcrokizr.

211

I\fl.:5cI

I sdea.J

A99

Select.._1

ElVedsal.

Middle

V

U

El Relation:

Front

V

0 fl0

9isce4el

Middle

V

Levers ElT

44

ES&iom

U

Class:

El

lJserdetrnod attributes

LJH1EP

ca;;1

3.

Click OK.

4.

Pick the intersection of gridlines A-I (p1) to create one column, and then pick grid B-I (p2)to create the second column. Look in 3d view from time to time to check for correct placement.

5. Copy columns

w/r

Mcdy

IwW7r_Ii_J

A

Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. Select the columns that you just created by dragging a window across them in a right to left direction. (The crossing command thnctions similar to other computer drawing applications.)

II

.0 CopynDht © 2007 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING BasIc Modeling I

1-25

2.


>

Translate... from the pop-up menu.

C

Copy Copy specal Rotate. Mirror, With three points

Move Moe special

Delete

3.

This opens the Copy translate dialog box shown here. -

jjdrf1S8’ th’

I

Ntsiber

ci coiesI

S

U”

Pick...

]

OK j{ Copy jj CIearj

[w/r H

Cancel

4.

Complete the dialog box and click Copy then OK. Columns should

5.

Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command.

copy. C

Interrupt

Point or grid intersection End

6.

Now all the columns appear in the model.

A 1-26

You can select multiple parts in the model by holding down the “Ctfl” key when selecting objects in the model individually.

TE,(LA STRUCTURES 13.0 ESC Ttl4lNG Basic Modeling I

CopyTight

203? TekIa Corporation

Help: Modeling> Introduction> Selecting model objects> How to select objects

1.7 Silos We will now model the silos. Create silos

I

I.


2.

Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below (for both the Attributes and Position tabs).

Twcaunnn

V coiuinn properties

t:

atandrd

Start releases Attributes

w

stdaic

End releases Pardon

Design

‘

j_

Nsxitardg series Pret:

El Part

w

EAssw4

C

I)rOlwt

De{ornrno Analysis

Start number

El El

A!ttxIes

-zz1

Start peteases End releases Position Attt&tss __j Position Middle w 0 El Vertical

r

. 00000

Wc&

C

Design

Delorming Analysis

—-

ElHizo’a&

-ii 1

Levels 4I

El Prie

El Bottoe

2) Material: SOSlT&ALUMINUM El Finish El Class: El [userdetined attnbules

Li]

LDL/r_H

3.

To select the profile the catalog.

Copyright @ 2007 Tekta Corporation

—

Cancei

Click the Select... button on the right and go to TUBE profiles in


1-27

C P’ollenane

ruE25D”1)8

Uece,d

Anefitsis

User aUrtes

Profile type

EslIe,. 4. +.

I L T C

-

Fter I profiles

Profile type: Prolile subtype:

L profiles profiles C oroliles

Circuler hollow sections d’t

V

Picture

Qrculan hollow sections FIFE tattles hUll Q Ff55 profdes ICDIJ Uthet C1o4n LHS 0 EPO OPD

• Q flectar4a oiov sections Ciokssetha,s 4 5 Timbei Riches 4 5 Double Tees [PCI Plateprofiles Welded boir profiles Parametric proBes L RCDL profiles BCDX protiles +

•

Property Diameter Plalelhickn...

Syrb d

Vtn 250 1/B

-

Ur K,

in

_

E Show all plotiler

[

OK

E Show details

Apc4

rC

0

4.

Click OK

5.

To select aluminum as the grade required, click the Select.... button next to the Material option

6.

Click OK

ISeIect material S elected grade: 6061-TE ALUMINUM

I

Steel Concrete 4 Reinforcing bar 4 Timber Miscellaneous +

4

A.

I

c’jrncEiig

RflR1-TR1 Al IIMINIIM

7.

Hovering your cross hairs over the top edge of the circular base will automatically highlight the snap point at the center because the ‘Points and Grid Intersections Snap is activated.

C 1-28

TEt(LA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRMNING Basic Modeling I

Copyright

2007 Tekla Corporation

LiJiHHIX

z Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command.

8.

Interrupt Ponit

Now the silos appear in the model.

or grid intersection

End

A

A

The visibility of objects in views depends on the work area, view depth, view setup, and view filter. You can also temporarily hide parts in a view by using the Hide tool (on the pop-up menu). In the pictures hereafter all the model objects created may not always be visible. Help: Modeling> Getting started> Settings and Tools> Displaying and hiding objects in views

Copyright © 2007 TeRla Corporalion

TEKIA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I

1-29

1.8 Create Beams We will first create the beams at the 12-7” 1/2 level and then copy them (using the select filter) to the two upper levels. 1.

Open the PLAN AT EL. 12-7”112 view.

2.

Hit the “CtrI+4” hotkey to change the object representation to Rendered.

‘I,

Create steel beams

Double-click on the Create beam icon.

3. 4.

In rendered views, use the shortcuts Clrl+1 .5 and Shift-I-I .5 to set the desired representation for parts h the model or components which we will create later.

Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below.

IIE

standard

Start releases Attribtes

[Save asj standard

End releases j Position Anab’sis

Numbering series Prehx:

Design Loaig

D elcwning Comsae

C

Start nurrber:

Part

E

-

1 1

JAssembly Attributes

2 Name: 2 Prolile: Matetial:

SEAM

]

W24X62 A2

[ileoi..

I

Fiiish: Class:

2

[DK

1-30

3

User-defined attributes...

fl

Apply

[

Modily

fl

Set

fl wir

]7ancei

5.

Click OK.

6.

Pick the intersection of gridlines A-4 and then 8-4 as shown below and notice how the beam automatically appears at the correct level in the 3D view simultaneously

TEK.A STRIJ0EJRES 13.0 BASiC TRJiNiNC Basic Modeling I

CopyTiglit ©

2007 leida Corraiion

U

4.

B

B

3 A 4

A 7.

5!

S

Note that it is very important to input beams from left to right and bottom to top. Tekla Structures will consider the first end input in the model as the lefi end.

Continue adding beams along gridlines 5, 6 and?. Input beam between columns on grid lines A and B.

3

4

5

6,

7

AL

A 6:

8.

Right-click and select interrupt to end the command. Interrupt Point or grid intersection End

Copyrighi © 2007 lekia Corporation

TEKL4 STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-31

Filter beams

1.

Choose the select filter option Beam_filter from the drop down list. Beam liter

A 2.

S.

C

n

A select filter provides you control over selecting different types of objects using both standard and user-defined filters. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Filter> Select filter

By dragging the mouse (right to left), se] ect an area in the model as shown below. Notice this only highlights the beams.

U Copy beams

1.

Open the ELEVATION AT GRID 7 view, right-click and select Copy from the pop-up menu. Interrupt Copy Soecal rylo;e

Specia

Deere

2.

1-32

Select a base point at the intersection of Grid A & 1271/2. This is where you want to ‘pick up the items you are copying.


CopygnI © 2007 Texle corporalion

U C

12’J’i /2

A

B

44-0”

44,-a”

24-0”

12’-7”1/2

0”

o’I

B 3.

Select a destination point at the intersection of GRID A & 24-0 as shown above.

4.

A message may appear stating objects are outside the work area. If so, click Expand as shown below.

ObjeL Is oijl side II.,. work a, en 0becls wce placed oxn,e the wck sea.Do

nJ wart to exn

he woel< aea

0

ockide the rtw o,ects7

Q Do nol rhow this menae agan

I 5.

i

Right-click and select Interrupt to end the Command.



Basic Modeling I

1-33

r

Interrupt Point r grid irtersec:Dn

End 6.

Change the select filter option back to standard (as shown below) and click in a view, so you will be able to select objects other than beams.

Seam lilter aridar d Angle_Filter B ea’n_uilter

V A

In the 3d view, this portion of the model should look like this.

0 U A

Beams around silos

Hide silos

Next we will create beams at elevation 44’-(). 1.

Open the PLAN AT EL 44’-O.

2.

Use the “Ctrl-’-P” hotkey to change this view to 3d.

3.

Hit the “Ctrl-’-4” hotkey to change the object representation to Rendered.

4.

Select both Silos (select one then hold the “Ctrl” key down while selecting the other) and right-click to open up the pop-up menu. While holding the “Shift” key down, select the Hide option as shown below.

A

You can also hide objects without holding down the ‘Shift” key. When you select the Hide option without the “Shift” key down, the object will not become completely hidden. They will change to Reference Lines.

U 1-34

TEKI.A STROCEJRES 13.0 BASiC 1iNiNG Basic Modeling I

Copyñghl © 2007 TeKia Corporailen

cJ. Interrupt Copy Copy special Move Move special Delete

II. I.

Center of avity Clash check Exact lines Rirle

/

npc

Hide

£

ShOw assembly Fit by parts Create view Compare Drawing

I :1

Zoom Update window Next windo.’ Add to Assembly Remove from assembly

Create grid beams a

1.

Click the Create beam icon.

2.

Create the missing beams at the gridline intersections shown in the figure below.

Copyfight @ 2007 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I

1-35

C)

1 A

Create the rest of the beams

Next we will create beams in locations where no gidlines intersect. The snapping tools help you pick points to create objects precisely where you need them, without having to know the coordinates or layout additional lines or points. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Tools> Snapping

c.

A 1-36

If you double-click on an existing beam in the model and click Apply in the Beam Properties dialog box, those settings become active. Then only a single click on the Create Beam icon is required to add beams with those settings to your model.

TEKLA STRUCtURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

Copynght © 2007 TelcIa

Corporation

Create beam A

I.

Make sure only the Snap to reference lines! paints icon of the two main snap switches on the right is pressed down. Auto

V

Outline planes

‘I

-

2.

Make sure the Snap to mid points icon is pressed down.

I 3.

Create beam B

Auto

V

Outline planes

I..

Pick a midpoint of the beam between A-2 and A-3 (pl) and then the midpoint of the beam between B-2 and B-3 (p2) as shown below.

We will pick the start position of beam B by using the gridline intersection A-i as a temporary reference point and tracking along gridline I in the direction of intersection B-i for 29’-6”. We will then pick the second position of beam B using the temporary snap switch Perpendicular. Make sure the Snap to points and grid intersections icon is also pressed down.

IL4I Pick the first position of beam B

Auto

V

Outline planes

I.

Hold down the “Ctrl” key first and then click gridline intersection A-I (p1). This will be a temporary reference point. A green cross will be placed there. (See below.)

2.

Then move the cursor (do not pick

CcpyTight © 2007 Tekla Corporation

) to the gridline intersection B-i (p2).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASrC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-37

r p2 Tracking moves p1 towards p2 (29’-69

L

p1

3.

While the cursor is resting at B-I (p2), push “A” on the keyboard and a numeric locator dialog box will open. Type 29-6” for the numeric location or in this case, the distance. (If youjust start typing after picking a reference point the Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically.)

U 4.

1-38

Click OK or “Enter” and the cursor snaps to the correct position (which is 29’-6” from A1 in the direction of B-i) as shown below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASJC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

Copydght© 2007 Tekia Corparalion

(I U

Pick second position of beam B

5.

Right click and select Perpendicular, or let the snap grab perpendicular to select a point for the other end of the beam. Interrupt

Point or grid intersection End Center Mid Interseci;on Perpendicular [‘lear 6.

Pick the second position on beam A (p ) as shown below. 2

2

7.

Right-click and select Interrupt. h9terrupt

Point or grid intersectIon End Create beam C

8.

Click once on the beam icon to get back in the beam command. Pick the intersection of beam B and gridline 2 (p1) and then the intersection of gridlines B-2 (p2) as shown here. Make sure the Intersection Snap is set.

X

Copyrighl @ 2007 TekIa Corporation

4

Auto

‘.

Oe planes


v

1-39

t

2

Create beam D

We will first create one of the beams that ifame around the silo and then by using the Copy Special > Rotate command create the other three. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Settings and tools reference> Edit>Copy >Rotate... I.

Hold down the “Ctrl” key and pick gridline intersection A-I (pi) to set a temporary reference point. A green cross will be placed there. See below.

2.

Then move the cursor (do not pickl I) to the gridline intersection B-I (p2).

0

Tracking moves p1 towards p2 (1 3’-09

3.

While the cursor is resting at B-i, type 13’-O for the numeric location or in this case distance. (The Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically.)

4.

Click OK or “Enter”, the cursor will snap to the correct position 13-0 away from (p1) as shown on the following page.

5.

Move the cursor to the intersection ofAl again.

6.

Hold the CTRL Key again and click this point

(0 140

TEKL.A STRuCTURES 13.0 aASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

Copynght © 2007 Tekla Corporation

A

1-

7.

Track the cursor once again to the right, but do not click

Enter a numeric location Location: 1

3!QI

8.

Once a snap point is highlighted, input the value as shown and click OK. The beam will now appear

9.

Right click and select Interrupt to end the command.

interrupt Point or grid ntersection End Copy rotate the beam

1.

Select the beam that you just created.

2.


Copylight © 2007 Tekla Corporation

>

Rotate... from the pop-up menu.


1-41

C’

Cop

Copy spedal Move

Rotate...

Move speo&

‘t’cc..

Deete

With three po’nLc -

V

—---------

-

3.

This opens the Copy special rotate dialog box.

4.

In the 3D view pick the center point of the silo as the point to define the rotation

5.

The origin for XC) and YD values will appear in the dialog box.

-

Origi XC

14-9

‘i’D

14-9

Arie

acw

Copy Number ol copies

OK

j[

LI C,,

otati Angle Tso.ouuo -

Around

L

a

Copy

JL

-

-J -j

I

z

Clear

6.

Complete the other fields in the dialog.

7.

Click Copy and then OK.

8.


S.

Cancel

Interrupt Point or grid intersection

Er C

U 1-42

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

Copyright © 2007 TeIia Corration

This portion of the model should look like this.

Copy translate the beam to the other silo

I.

2.

Select the beams shown highlighted in the picture below (press the “Ctrl” key to add parts to the selection).

Right-click asid select Copy from the pop-up menu. Interrupt Propertes... User-defined atUibutes,.

InqLnre

I.

Copy special Vove Move specie Delete

Copyght © 2007 Tekle Corporaton

TUQA STRUCTURES 3.0 BASIC T4INING Basic Modeling I

1-43

3.

r

Select a base point or “pick-up” point.

A

1—

4.

Select a new point or a “put-down’ point.

C

5.


6.

Now click in the 3D view to select the view. A red box will appear around the edge of the view. Right click in the view now and select Redraw WindoW. The model should now look as shown on the following page.

itelrupt

Zrooetes

Move Fit vork area

Redra’,

,\Find0,\!

(6 1-44

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNG Basic Modeling I

Copynght © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

‘S A

1.9 Create Bracing Next we will input the vertical bracing members using the Create beam tool. Open the Elevation on Grid A view if it is not already visible.

1•

2

3

4

12

Create braces

I. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

Ccpyright © 2007 Tekla Corration

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASC TR4INING Basic Modeling I

I -45

2. From the drop down menu at the top of the dialog box, select Vertical_has_brace and click Load

JIHe asJ

jJ IVerticaLhn_brace

3.

0

ci

VerticaLhss_brac

Start releasesf End releases Attributes Position] Analysis

Design Loading

Nunibering series Prefüc

Start nwnter:

iL

Delorrning Composite

Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below.

[save

VerticaL hss brace Start releases Attributes

End releases Position Anäysis

Numbering series PreFix:

VerticaLhss_brac

Design Jj Deforniing Loading _j_ Ccwrçosite

0

Start number:

1s h Assembly Attributes Name: Profile: Material:

U

D VERTICAL HSS BRACE HSS4X4X1/4 .A5OIJ-SR.8

2] flush: 4 2] Class: 2] User-defined attributes

Apply

4.

(

Modify

[

Set

wir

j[

Cancel

Click OK.

5. lii the Grid line A view create the first brace by first picking the gridline intersection A-2 and then the midpoint of column A-3 as shown on the next page.

14$

TEICA SThUCTRES 13.0 BASIC TiNING Basic Modeling I

Copyright

2007 Torts Corporation

U U

Make sure you pick the mid point of the column and not the midpoint between the 12-7%” level and the 24-0” level

24’ -0”

12’-7’ ‘112

0” 2

Create the second brace

Create the next brace by picking the top position of column A-2 and then midpoint of column 43 as shown below.

2

24’-0”

12 ‘-7” 112

2.


We will now adjust this bracing member so that the lower end of the brace is offset 6 inches from the grid level. To do this, we will use handles to move the part end.

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

TEKLA SWUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRArNINIG Basic ModGIing I

1-47

Help: Modeling> Parts> Part location Use handle to move brace end

1.

Select the first brace to display the handles.

2.

Pick the yellow handle (Tekla Structures highlights the handle).

‘I,

V

3.

1-48

Holding down the Alt key while dragging a box across the handle allows for easier selection of that handle or allows selection of multiple handles at that location

Right-click and select Move Special

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I

U

>

Translate... to move the handle 6 inches upwards.

Copytghl © 27 Tekla Corporation

U U

Interrupt Propertes Thqu’e Lop-i:

Copy special Move Move special Delete Exact lines Hide hnes

Translate.,. Rotate,,,

j

With three r

poIrJ

4.

This opens the Move translate dialog box shown here.

5.

Complete the dZ field and click Move. then OK.

6.


7.

Repeat the procedure to move the second brace’s top handle 24 inches downwards.

8.

Pick the handle (Tekia Structures then highlights the handle).

-

A CopyTight © 2007 TekIa Corporalion

Remember that this handle may be yellow or magenta in color depending upon whether it is the Start Point (yellow) or the End Point (magenta) of the item.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-49

r: ve

translate

0”

I

I.2D” Pick..,

L2_f L9v 9.

Clear

{ Li?_/ F J [Cancel I

Complete the dZ field and Click Move, then OK.

10. Right click and select Interrupt to

end the command. Copy mirror braces

1.

2.

Select both braces as shown here by clicking each one individually while holding down the CTRL key Right-click and select Copy Special Mirror...

>

Copy spedal

P

ransJat.

Move

Rotate..,

Move speca; Dele

Mirror... ‘c”.’ith tne point Move Move special Delete

4

Center oF gravity Clash check Exact lines Hi Ines Hide Show assembly Ft by pads Create view Compare Drawing Zoom

C I.

Translate.,, Rotate... Mirror,. With three points

a,

I.

P

Update window Next window Add to Assembly Remove From assembly

‘4 1-50

TEeK’.ASTRtDi1RES3.D8ASlCIfl+3 Basic Modeling I

CopyTiglil © 2007 Teda Corporaton

3.

This opens the Copy - mirror dialog box.

4.

In the view, pick two points on grid 3 to define the mirror Line. The XO, VO and Angle fields automatically change based on these 2 points. ‘,.

The points that you click to define the mirror represent the seline of the mirror or the ‘line of symmetry’ in plan. Try to imagine what the image would look like when reflected in a mirror that is placed on the line drawn between the two points you clicked in the model.

ll Copy

xo Yo

mirror 3’4” J”

Angle 9O.000Q

zr

5.

Click Copy and then OK.

6.


Copy

ir

Point or grid intersection End Help: Modeling> Settings and toots> Settings and tools reference> Edit>Cop >Mirror...

Copyiight @ 2007 Tekla Corporation

1EKL STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TINING Basic Modeling I

1-51

Ce

I)

1.10 Add Infill Beams Next we will input some infill beams using the Create beam tooL. Open the Plan on 12-7W view ifit is not already visible.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 B

B

/

(

/ .

/

AL 4 Create stair landing beam

1-52

1.


2.

Load the Beam properties

TEK STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modelin 9 I

5

Copght © 2007 Tekla rratior

7

U C)

Beam

Beam

V

Start releases End r&eases Design,_J Attitutes Position Analysis Loadir -

Numbering series Pref iii:

D elorming Composite

Start number;

EPart B

BAssentj AttriEjtes Name:

Ri Profile: Ri Material; Ri Finish: Class:

E

El

BEAM

I

I

A932

3

User-defined attributes...

j[

canc&J

Click the Select... button to launch the section catalog. ‘I,

4.

ii

[Select...

jw,ir 3.

[Seiect...

All available sections are listed here with parameters that are correct to the very latest editions of industry organization manuals Simply locate and select the section you would like to use.

Select W18X40 from the catalog

Copyright © 2007 Tekta Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-53

1€ Select profile

Prctk nfl W<4O

L- )

0&w Anak: Us arjre: Profe r,,

[

Filler: —

Edter

I

I Jprofrles

@ HP \‘NJF .* U . W T t5 W4 +. 5l W5 WG *

Profile type

:i:

Profile subtype:

Hot rolled

i proirles

+

picture

S9 W8 •

5W12 5 ii5Wl4 t ‘0 Property l-ieghr Width Web thickness Flenge thickness Rounding radius 1 Rounding radius 2 Flange slope ratio

J35

9 9 9 9

Wi <41 Wi <45 wi <46 5 WiRt<55

9w1’<00

fl Show all piofiles 111K

ii

Pø

S. h b t

ri r2 Is

Vakie in/a 6’’ 3/8 1/2 11/16 0” 0.00

Lrt n in in in in in

Show details

I

IcdI

....--

5.

Click OK

6.

Hold down the CURL key and click the mouse at the intersection of grid line A5

7.

Then highlight a snap point (shown using the near’ snap above) to determine the direction of the tracking. Remember — Do not click.

8.

Type 7-0” to make the new beam start at that distance from the CTRL point in the direction you tracked the mouse.

I

(,.

Enteranurneric location

I

(a$ 1-54

TEICASTRuC11jRES 13.0 BASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

CopynghIQ20O7TeeiaCorporaon

/ /

A

9.

Use the perpendicular snap to connect the beam to the beam on grid line 6

We will now add some horizontal bracing sections too.

1.11 Add Horizontal Bracing Divided Line Points

First, we will use the Divided Line Points tool to establish the midpoint between two points we select. Double click the icon shown below. ‘I,

Points Tools allow us to quickly and easily establish points in the model without having to measure and calculate distances.

6 2.

Check that the No. of Points in the points tool is set to 1. This will place one point halfway between the two points you click in the model. If this was set to 2 then it would add two points equally spaced between the points you click effectively dividing the length into 3 equal spaces. line

B

6

‘7’

2

o;ts

No. oF points

3.

Click OK

4.

Click the points as shown using the Endpoint snap. Notice that a tiny cross appears halfway between both points.

Copyiight © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

I

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TrNING Basic Modeling I

1-55

S.

Now add two W16X50 beams as shown below. Tip: Add the beams from left to right and use the perpendicular snap to ensure they are horizontal in the model.

4; B

5

6; J

B

A 7 6.

Finally add the horizontal bracing

7.

Use the Create Beam tool again and select and load the properties for a Horizontal Brace

.

—

C 1-56

TEK STRUCTURES 1 3.0 BASIC TlNlNG Basic Modeling I

Copydghi © 2007 Tekla Corralion

Hox&brace

[ave

asj

HorizonlaLbrace

It

Start releases

End releases Design Position AnalysisJ_Loadinj -

Attributes

0 &cirrriing Composite

Numbering series

PreFix: Part

Start number:

t

Assembly

0

Attribes

E Name: Profile:

E Material:

HORIZONTAL BRACE WTBX2O

j

Ii

A992 —__________

Seleci,.

[ Select...j

Firish: ElCiass:

4

[_User-deFined attributes...

OK

IrApply

jf

Modify

j[ Set j[ 7/F iLcancel

8.

Change the section profile to match the one shown above.

9.

Click OK and add the beams going from left to right as shown below.

Copyrighi © 2007 Tekla Cerporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TlNING Basic Modeling I

1-57

4; B

5,

4 Move Bracing

6

7

6:

7:

10. Now move these beams down to within the depth of the floor beams. 11. HighIiu both beams by holding down the CTRL key while clicking the members. 12. Release the CTRL key and right click the mouse.

4

5

C)

6

7

B:

NJ

Interrupt

I

Copy Copy seoa! Move MoespedaI

/

Delete Center of gravity

A

Clash check Exact lines Hide lines

5j 13. Select Move Special beams down)

1

-

Rotete.,, Mirror.,. With three points

Translate and enter -9” (the negative value moves the bracing

IL) 1-58

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 130 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

Copyñgl

2007 TelcIa Corporanon

E

I•’ Pick...

f Move

Clear

j

[ / r I Lcanc&

14. Finally check that the braces are in the correct position in the 3D view.

Move beam using offset

1.

Double Click on the highlighted beam to open the properties dialog


TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I

1-59

0

2.

Go to the Position tab

Beam properties

[E] cii

standard

t

JL

Stan releases End releases Position Attributes Anajysis

f

ave as Design j{ Loading

-I orizontaL bra Delorming Composite

Position Middle

V

E Rotation:

Top

v 0.0000

EN depth:

Behind

V.

On plane:

End oftset •

Start: 0

Dx

s’ 0 D2

End:

I

0”

E

0”

EU’

Curved beam Efladius:

>CYplane

V

0

Nurther ci segments: 1

[

1-60

OK][ AppJy


Get

H r/r fl

Cancel

Copynght © 2007 TeRla CorporaUon

C.

Adjust the dialog box as shown and click Modi’. Notice that the beam has now moved down 3 while the start and end points have remained in their original position.

3.

It really makes very little difference whether you locate beams using offsets or by simply moving them into position. Sometimes their may be speed advantages to be gained by modeling one way rather than another.. Now we have modeled all the steel members in BasicModell. The model should appear as in the picture below.

A

Id

V

Copynghl © 2007 Tekia Corporation

At this point we have added all the marbers into the model. In a real contract we could now run the Advanced Sill by going to File> Reports> Advanced Bill, then clicking Create from All. We will deal with Reports and Numbering in much more depth later in this manual.

TLKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I

1-51

C

C

1-62

TEK STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TIN[N0 Basic Modeling I

Copght@ 2007 Tek[a rraIion

TEKLA

System Components


c

2.ii

TEXLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TINING

Syslem Components

Cpyrght€2007Toldacorporaaoo

Contents

2

Creating System Components

.1

2.1

1 2 3 7 7 9 10 10 11 13 13 15 18 18 19 19 25

2.2 2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6 2.7 2.8

Copyright® 2007 Tekle Corporarirn

About System Components Check clashing of steel structures Column Base Plates Beam to Beam Web Shear plates Checking Connections Beam to Column Web Clip angle Two-sided Chp angles Vertical Bracing Connections Tube Gusset Modifying Connections Beam to Column Flange End plate Bracing Connections Wrap Plate Re-Check Entire Model Clashing

TEKLASTRUCTURFS 13,0 DASIC TRAJNrNG System Components

2-ui

C

U 2iv

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

CopeigNO2OO7TeIdaC&pocdn --

/

4/

!W; -

!,

:r

Creating System Components

In this lesson

This lesson introduces the basics of creating system connections in Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: Create connections Work with connection properties Save the properties for later use

2.1

About System Components You can model connections quickly with the Tekla Structures system components. The greatest benefits of using system components are:

44

•

The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be used later. These properties can then be used for all projects.

•

When you modi& an object’s profile in the model, all of the connections to the object are automatically modified at the same time.

•

If you highlight an object and select options suth as edit, copy, or mirror, all connections into the object are automatically included. The connections that are copied or mirrored are exactly the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts.

•

With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties. (Covered in the advanced course)

All available system components are located in the component catalog, which can be opened using Ctrl4-F or by clicking the binocular icon on the component toolbar. When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and create the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually creates. Help: Detailing

>

Getting started> Using components> Creating components

Help: Detailing

>

Getting started

>

Basics> Component concepts

Help: Detailing> Getting started> Basics> Picking order Help: Detailing> Getting started

Copyright © 2007 TekTa Corpoiation

>

Basics> Up direction

TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINING System Components

2-1

r

C

Check clashing of steel structures In Chapter 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model we will need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections all of the members in the model usually collide with other members. By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We will run a clash cheek now, and again after the connections have been applied. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Querying objects> Clash check Check clashing

1.

Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model.

2.

Right-click and select C’ash check.

Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in orange and displays the clash check log in the List dialog box. You can see that all of the parts in the model collide.

C Select any clashing parts from the list and Tekia Structures highlights them in the model. 1

LIst

In nIl

-

S..

2-2

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System camponents

Copyrighl 02007 Tekls corporation

1’ U

2.2

Column Base Plates The first system connections that we wil] add are the column base plates. First we will create a base plate using the default values. We will then modi& the properties of the base plate and finally create the rest of the base plates with the new properties.

Create base plate to one column ‘I’

1.

Open the component catalog by clicking on the binu1ar icon or by typing Ctrl+F.

2.

To see pictures of the connection, make sure the Thumbnails icon is active, see below.

3.

Type base into the upper field and click on the Search button. In the Component catalog, double-click on the U.S. Base plate (1047) icon. Component catalog

5... nlO* (1054]

l1 5(51 (53415

p.’dl@ , 5 34l

‘.

Lifhsi

5.,, 515(1110531

43. ,ü., 0334..

CIlis 03,, 05(t.

LP,& 0’. 41111

‘4

5434344

U5345.

st.-430.

SElL-CU’ 1140

¶

5(11

The following dialog on the next page appears:

Copyright @2007 TekJa corporation

TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIc TRAINING Systen Components

2-3

0

Tekla Structures U.S. Base plate (1047) Load

Pchja

Peal,

,nda

Parnslers

General Slillenaro

C’

,isndapd

Anchop pod,

Sepia pJ.iee M4oi,

Th

—C

RI RIEJ

4.

Click OK to accept the default values.

5.

Pick any column.

6.

When prompted, pick the bottom endpoint of the column as the position and the base plate will be created.

0 L.

7.

Use the shortcut CtrI+2 to make the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.

You can see that the anchor bolts were created as Anchor J-rods.

t 2-4

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRALNING

System Components

Copyright® 2001 ToNe Corporation

7-

.

-

77-

Edit Anchor Rods

We will change the Anchor J-rods in the base plate to Plate washer Anchors by modiing the connection properties.

I.

Double-click on the green connection symbol, and the Base plate dialog box will reopen.

2.

Select the Anchor rods tab page in the dialog box.

3.

Edit the values in the fields sho highlighted in the figure on the next page.

Copyright @2001 Tekla Corporatron

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System components

2-5

0

Tekla Structures U.S. Base plate (1047) iiJJ ØL1

n,udr[yeCiVreclontwe Pttuse

Pans

Pacacoelera

General b

Anch

rod proSe

Solsaneru Ardror rods h

too,, pI$os

Pos_No

---_.-----i

i Arralys,s Malarial

Nanre

Class

lE1 Q Q

RI RI

3/4_HEAW_MEILNUT

RI 3/4 RI 121

Wa*e p,ob Phee waslreo Cosipsale

WASHER

Corrasarrl

RI

R003/4

Nor posSe

m;-i

RI

lp :a

V

Psc And anon Yes

—2i — 121 No RIN0

ElNo

No

‘/

\N;

/

V

Nc

ENo

RI Default

—

v’

1 Delarjll .s

No

121 a LJLJ Ce

—

Ware, nde Gauss

El

ate a’aca:

shclqess

6,0,4

1)2

Po_No

121 Oea(e asseaas

loss al

rr

Create base plates to rest of the columns

aFos

9o

I_I

_

4.

Click Modify and the I-bolts become Plate washer anchors.

5.

Click Apply, OK to accept the properties for use later.

6.

Notice that we have put L

I.

Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again.

V 2.

/2’

of grout in the model, above the footing pad.

To repeat the last command, do one of the following: •

Click Edit-> Repeat last command

•

Press Enter

Create the rest of the base plates by picking each column and then the position for the base plate. At this point in a real contract you would be able to run the Anchor Bolt Drawing and send it out to for approval or over to the site so they can start pouring the bases. For taining purposes however, we will skip this step till later

2-6

TEKLA StRUcTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNG System Components

Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporallon

t

2.3 Beam to Beam Web Shear plates We will use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam to beam web connections. The shear plate will be welded to the primary beam web and bolted to the secondary beam web. We will use the connection when the secondary beam is perpendicular to the main member or at a skewed angle to the main member. Create one shear plate connection

1.

Open the component dialog (Ctrl+F or binocular icon), find the Shear plate simple (146) connection, and double-click on its icon.

ii’ Component calalog

L

146

[Search]

Search result

Store A

Shea,

I

plate simple

Copyright © 2007 Tekia Corporal’sr

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TAINING System Components

2-7

a The following dialog appears: Tekia Structures Shear plate simple (146) s-

fla

liens

ith

Bob

Dov,tim

— e.ncu

eeiobo

L EoSedo

oba

0a4.,

I

C LZ LD

-

I

a

2.

Pick the beam on gridline 1 as the main part of the connection.

3.

Pick the beam perpendicular to the main part to be the secondary part and the connection will be created.

0 2-8


System Components

Copytghtl 21307 T&da CelTraIion

Checking Connections To make it easier to check the connection you created, you can create views from different sides of a selected connection. In the view the work area is closely fitted around the connection.

Ornate connection basic views

Check bolt dimensions

To create component basic views: t.

Select the connection symbol.

2.

Right-click and select Create view> Component basic views, and four basic views (front, top end and perspective) appear.

3.

Keep the Component front view open and close the other component basic views.

We will now check the bolt location distances and bolt edge distances between bolts and the shear plate. ‘I,

Tekla will automatically change the color of the component cone from green to yellow if an edge distance issue is detected. Edge distance rules are set up under the Tools> Options> Components dialog box. (The default edge distance is 1.2 times the bolt diameter)

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools

>

Querying objects

>

Measure

I,

Click Tools> Measure> Boft measure.

2.

Pick the bolt group.

3.

Pick the shear plate and the temporary dimensions are sho in the view. I

Now we will accept the created connection with the default properties. Create the rest of the shear plates

With the connection’s applied properties, create shear plate connections to all the other beam to beam conditions. Notice how Tekla automatically detects the depth of the supported beam and applies the correct number of bolts to the connection automatically.

copyright @2001 Tokla Corporotion

TCKLA STRuCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

2-9

r

2.4 Beam to Column Web

I

We will use the Clip angle (141) connection to make the beam to column web connections. For the double sided beam to column web connections we will use the Two sided Clip angle (143) connection. That connection uses only one bolt group to go through all three parts. We will then make the wall brace 10 column connections with Tube gusset (20). This connection uses a gusset plate to connect the beani to the column. Connection plates welded to the end of the braces will be bolted to the gusset plate.

Clip angle We will now use the Clip angIe (141) connection to make all single beam to column web connections using the default connection properties. We will modi the properties later with Auto Defaults. Create clip angles

1.

In the component catalog, find the Clip angle (141) connection.

Liar*3Ie 1141]

2-10

TFKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

Cop,TighI © 2007 Tate CorpOlalion

2.

Make an end plate connection at every beam to column web condition where there is only one secondary beam coming to the column web, The column is the main part in the connection, so when prompted, pick the column as the main part. and the beam as the secondary part.

Two-sided Clip angles Create the two sided clip angle connection to all double sided beam to column web conditions to connect beams to both sides of the column web: Create two-sided clip angles

1.

Find the Two sided clip angle (143) connection.

To sided clip anq e(143l 2.

When prompted, pick the column as the main part.

3.

Pick a beam on one side, and then the beam on the other side as the secondary parts.

4.

Click the middle mouse button to complete the connection.

A

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporahon

When there are multiple secondaries you need to click the middle mouse button to complete the selection. Help: Detailing> Getting started

>

Basics

>

Picking order

TLKLA sThuCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

2-li

0

5. Double click on the connection cone to open the Two Sided Clip Angle properties dialog box. Then set the Safety Connections Property on the Parts tab as shown below Pats

Fs&nth

Gene,

Nolcn

b

2

P,ofiIeNS

-

Doe;

4,glebo.o

2F

FS

:zz_ ZiG

2LZIZ:::E:Z

ProfiIo2FS

Er!III ,jI

BeanJ

4’*so

I

Ri [Z

IQ 2

2

PtohIeZNS

Osstwe

l4atsA

--

JA PzoI’Ie

Bo:SDos

Bo8oI;

PoN;

I’

‘;

AH 0 F 2

Rl;A

30 2° A

l2L

-

9

I 1

2[

J

L5

.‘

RH

EEl!?

Sde2taon.cdtn4

--

2

Solely co’ylons \‘etlItaIcLl/c4Iset Hoizonlal cul

6. Click Modify when complete and notice that the angles on one side drop down to allow for safe erection practices.

7. Click Apply then save the connection settings for fi.nure use by typing a name in the Save As.. filed and click the Save As.. button. Save

2-12

Lcad j staad

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System components

v

IL

JII5a0r I CopNighI 10 2007 Tekla Corpotation

t

8. Apply the Two sided clip angIe (143) to all two sided beam to column webs framing conditions.

2.5 Vertical Bracing Connections Tube Gusset We will connect all the wall braces to columns using Tube gusset (20) connections and then modiv their properties all at once. Create tube gusset to intersection of braces

I.

Find the Tube gusset (20) connection.

Lt

Tube gusset

ç20)

2.

Pick the column on grid intersection A-3 as the main part

3.

Pick two adioining braces, one by one, as secondaries.

4.

Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

5.

While still in the active command, Repeat for the other side of the same column.

Now we can see that the connection created has two gusset plates each one with two braces. ‘I,

V

HJIa

Copyright © 2001 Tekla corporation

We could also have created a single gusset plate going through the column by creating one connection with the 4 braces.

1

TEKLA STRUCTURtS 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

2-1 3

Create the rest of the tube gussets

Whiie still in the command, create the the following:

connections to

1.

Pick the column.

2.

Pick the brace.

3.

Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

-

Check one tube gusset connection

the other ends

of the braces

-

I.

Create Component basic views of the tube gusset connection on the center brace.

2.

Open the Component front views plates to the column web. /

-

by doing

of the

you can make sure there is clearance from

X

the gusset

To see the column web in the connection front view you can change the view type in the view properties dialog to rerdered.

4

3.

Select the Snap to Geometry Lines (Points select switch. This allows you to snap to all edges of parts rather than just the work points on parts.

n

4.

Select the Create X measure icon and check the clearance to the corner of the plate.

. We will now increase the clearance.

2-14

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

Copylight © 2007 TelO Corporation

r

Modifying Connections We wilt modify the connection by adding a clearance between the gusset plates and the column. We will also change the number of bolt rows. Add clearance between the gusset plate and the column

1.

Double-click on the connection symbol.

2.

On the Picture tab, type the value in the field defining the clearance between the gusset plate and the column.

t 1okL Structures tutw,stssot (20) Soya

I rJ!_I

f5 0 ldOSd

LSaveao

I

Herp.

ignore olhep types

Rctn,o

C,05,fr9es 6us& Discs cmii

Oenec

Cu, non cowi

Brace Sots 2

Biatebok

Onoce bc 3

]

EJ

1)2)

ZJ Er

I

j

V

r&i Edit the number of bolt rows

3.

m

I [W/l

[can

On the Braceboitsi and Bracebolts2 tab pages, edit the number of horizontal and vertical bolt rows as shown in the figures below.

copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 DASIc TRAINiNG

System components

2-15

—

notate

frara!

bbIs

Ssv

“c 2)

Ei4

EN El

p.

Bracebolts 1 4.

Bracebolts 2

Click Modify and then Apply. The Braceboltsi tab affects the first picked brace, Hracebolts2 tab the second pick and Bracebolts3 picks 3-9.

Check the changes

Check that the number of bolt rows was changed and that the clearance is

correct.

0’

To check the clearance:

n

1.

Click the Create X measure icon. Pick the starting and end pothts as showor

2-16

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAsIC TRAINING System Components

CopThI © 2007 TeNs CapotaD

3.

Pick a point to locate the dimension.

4.

Repeat for the other dimensions you want to check.

Now we will also modify the other tube gusset connections with the new properties we applied. Modify all the tube gusset connections at once

We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog by selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box. -

I.

Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.

Help: Detailing>Getting Started>Using Components>Modifying components TekI Structures lube gusset (20)

J

Save

Load

J

standard

[ignore ether types

2.

I_________

Select all the connections in the model by using the Select component select switch shown below and dragging a window around the whole model.

Select switches

it 3.

r; i

ri ri

Click Modify.

We will now save the edited properties for later use. By saving the properties with a descriptive name you can easily use them later. You can also get AutoDefaults to automatically use the saved properties in desired cases by setting up AutoDefaults rules.

/ —

Save the properties

4.

Type Wall bracings in the Save as field in the dialog box.

5.

Click the Save as button.

P5<

Iiikli Sliocturos 1uIa gueset (20)

I

I

Save

I

Hoa4

ignore other types

copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation

I

roandad

zIS8VeaSl

Wall bracings

I_!!_J

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TrlNING System Components

2-17

1 2.6 Beam to Column Flange We will now create End plate (144) connections for all the beam to column flange conditions by using the default properties. Then we will edit one of the connection’s properties.

End plate Create end plates

1.

Find the End plate (144) connection.

E re

2.

2-18

144)

Create connections at all the beam to column flange framing conditions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TMINING System Components

Copyright® 2007 ToWs Corporation

4’ U

2.7

Bracing Connections

Wrap Plate Create wrap plate connection

Find the Wraparound Gusset Cross (60) connection.

1.

Wraparound gusset cross (SOT

2.

Double click the connection to open up the parameters. Notice how the numbers are added to help us select the members in the correct order. ickla sir

.,

i

Sec.

I

i.r

tint. Wroparounni

ij9ad

Gusnet

(60)

sienoere

I 23

ignore olhie’ iypee

Picture

tps..oI cr0

Brace corn

Gnnenaj

Save ari

niandard

[y...]

0 tinner conn 1

Oussstconn2flr.ce bolts 1

Brace bolts 2

4nIe bnIts

Ocrign

LZZJ 23 LEE]

‘if

-j

1

e

[lEE!

[TQK

Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporation

r

LEE!

j

L.i I lw/ri

rc&

I

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINrNG System Components

2-19

Click OK and add the connection to the bracing where it meets id B5 to see what it looks like.

3.

Adjust Wrap Plato size

4.

We can then find and select on]y the options we want to alter rather than searching through the entire component parameters.

5.

We can see that the wrap plate looks small so we will shorten our bracing member in order to give the wrap plate a better shape.

6.

Open the system component and go to the Gusset Conn I tab. Set the bolts as shown

n

Tekla Structures Wraparound gusset cr0 (60) —

—

9’

—

;:

5HHbHI

s,..ba.2

1Ndmd .H*

Ib-

,

as.

—

hi

.‘—a

JILj

A

E1 —9

5

eJ

El

ti

El

0

0.111..

0

-

7.

2-20

H-

Do the same on the Gusset Conn 2 tab

TEKUA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING system components

copTghs

2007 Tekla CorporatlDn

Tekia Structures Wraparound gusset crc (60)

.

-

I*—u

2r..

5—

:I;i_

•.

—

-a

1

17

j;

s”

— SI,”,

04

21°,

ter

21

Sn

-

8.

s.

II

5I

Finally shorten the brace to adequately clear the column corner by adjusting the setback on the Brace Bolts I tab. Tekla Structures Wraparound gusset cr0 (60) 5-

-

— — ,,.,

— 0...s.I

O..,,s...-

tz:ar 1.d.,..g

5

G...,I...I

G.

¾iflp.

O..tII2

8,.s,bd.I

O,..tII,Z

fl

IJ L Øsss.

fla.51I1,

:

:

I_______

00 LD Ei 00

9.

Click Modify

10. Now add the connection to the other ends of the WT bracings. Only three picks needed per connection, since the column is not present.

Copnight© 2007

Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13-0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

2—21

11. The end result should look like the image on the previous page. Check clashing

Now we will examine the connecti a little more close]y to check it is abso]utelv correct. 1.

Make sure the Select Objects In Components symbol is pressed down

2.

Select all the objects at the wrap plate connection by dragging a box around them

3.

Right click and select Clash Check

To quickly locate and view colliding parts in the model, select a line containing the ID numbers of colliding parts from the list. lekla Structures highlights the parts in the model. 4.

Notice that the bolts and beams are highlighted. The bolts from the wrap plate to the beam along grid line 6 are highlighting because they are flagging a potential clearance or access issue. Upon inspection you will

2-22

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Coiporation

F

notice that this is probably acceptable enough to allow access in the field so you can igiore this clash. The bolts from the wrap plate to the other beam are clashing because we added a system component to each side of the connection and each system component added its own set of bolts in that location. You will notice in the graphic below that the bolts in this location have 2 nuts. :.. .-*::

Explode connection

We will now explode and modii the system component to reso]ve this problem.

A

Exploding connections has some benefits and some drawbacks. When you explode a connection you remove the link from that connection to the system component that defined it. This effectively freezes the objects in that connection. They will not change when you modib the system component so it can prevent you from accidentally changing settings. This also means that if you have a number of exploded system components you would need to change each and every one individually rather than editing the system component and having it automatically modi& all the similar connections in the model.

Select the component symbol and right click the mouse. Jete 2th’iincatog..

Hide Compi[ content

-_-*.

-‘ .— --

* ._—__v__._E....

_l,.1

LIXtewfloDw iexwni,w

I

-

2.

Choose Explode Component

3.

You will need to do this twice to remove both component symbols.

4.

Select and delete one set of bolts

copyrght @2007 Tekla corporation

TEKLASTRUCTURtS 13.0 BASIC TAlNrNG System components

2•23

wwni.

ftcta nate

e

.

ci —

P

:jfl

Exats [dehnes He Rtb?pfl Create’,ew

rest

Edit bolt parts

5.

You will now notice that the bolts remaining dont go through all the members. To correct this we must use the Edit Bolt Parts Command.

5.

Select the bolts then right click

7.

Choose Bolt Paris

i 0

Iriierftot ftwetes... Copy copy a

F-

,

Ilde Ii hide Fit by pat

8.

Choose the beam first, then one angle, then the other as shown below

zrzzj

3—

9.

.

z-zzzt

- r•

Make sure you select the angles and not the wrap plate.

10. Click the middle mouse button to end the command and the bolts should now go all the way through each mcmi her.

C. 2-24

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASJC TRAINING System Components

Copyfight © 2007 Tekle Coirstion

2.8

Re-Check Entire Model Clashing 1. 2.

Select all of the parts by dragging an area select around the whole model. Right-click and select Clash check. ‘...

You can locate specific clashes in the model by selecting lines in the clash report. Tekla will highlight the items in the model that are causing that particular clash. Note that one member may cause and report several different clashes with other members and these will all show up on the report. You can also zone in on the clashing part by holding down the ‘F’ key when click a line on the report This will temporarily hide everything else other than the specific clash you clicked in the report. making the clash easier to find. To return to normal, simply redraw the window.

Different settings on the Select Filters toolbar will allow you to locate different types of clashes. For instance you can restrict the clash check to only look for clashes between members or main members and secondary parts or main members secondary parts and bolts too.

copyright © 2007 Tokla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System components

2-25

0

0

0 2-26

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAiNING

System Components

CopyTht@2OO7 TeldaCapona&o

eSe

TEKLA

Basic Modeling 2

Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training October 29, 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

0

9,

3-il

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Copqight@2OO7TeIda Cccaiion

Contents

3

Basic Modeling 2 3.1 3.2 3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7 3.6

Cbpysight© 2007 Tekla Corporation

I

Start a new model Open and Save an Existing Model Create new model Create grid Create plane views along gridhnes Create Concrete Members Pad footings Concrete columns Copy the members Pre-cast ledger beams Pre-cast Slabs Create Steel Framing Steel columns Steel rafter Work points for roof joists Copy the portal frame and the points Set Sloping Work Plane for Joists True plan view Create roofjoists Vertical Eaves Bracing Crane Beam Support Stubs Combine Models 1 and 2 Change the phase of BasicModel2 members in preparation Copy from model Check that all part properties are consistent Define Your Own Select Filters Recreate the Modell grid Setting Up Job Specific Information Project properties Check preferences

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

2 2 3 3 6 7 7 9 11 12 16 20 21 24 25 26 27 29 29 31 33 34 34 35 31 39 41 43 43 44

3-ui

9

3-iv

TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASLC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation

m

Basic Modeling 2

3

In this lesson

In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to do before starting to model in a real project. We will create a new model and recap the basic fUnctions introduced in lesson I. After that, you will learn some more about the basic fUnctions. We will revise how to •

Open and save or backup models

•

Input Grids

•

Create Beams and columns

•

Copy and move items

You will learn how to: •

Adjust atn-ibutes of members

•

Input construction points

•

Work in true planes (sloped, skewed)

•

Use phases

•

Combine separate models

copyrighI @2007 TekIa Corporation

1EXLA STRUcTuRLS 13.0 BASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

3-1

3.1

Start a new model

There are two options available for the beginning part of this lesson. Users attending a training class can open the BasicModel-Concrete provided or alternatively can opt to build the model shown below step by step by following the manual as normal. •

To open the model continue below to section 3.2

•

To build the model jump to section 3.3

r

3.2 Open and Save an Existing Model Start base model

I

0

1.

Click the Open icon,

2.

Navigate to the TeklaStructuresModels\Training\Steel folder,

14ã

0

&‘1sclaSl,nes4udnT,ergS4nI MC&I .e

3 I

Mojeb Becclcddl 8s*vcdd2-Cc,-c,e.

Bo.._I be, ,edeee ce/m/20371011sr

voice, ci 1,c, SIte

D.,ig,a FIROJ DESI3FR

Decocorn PRCJ DES[APTI

Mod,1 come: Boom Modd 2- [Oracle

[

I

O[

3.

Select the existing model, Basic Model 2

4.

From the File pull-down menu select Save as... Edit

View

J

Chl-.N

Opan

Cr1.0

Id

Save

Concrete, and click OK.

Save as. D_.,. A..,...:..

5.

I

Lo,

Parts

New...

I LW

3-2

Points

-

,cci

OLS

-

I) U

Enter “Basic Model 2 —flrstna,ne lasiname”

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINENG Basic Modeling 2

Copyright® 2007 Tolda corpocton

t Sov,os D’J eJ.St,oJure,Modeb1 rw,g\SteeI

See.

Moder

1 o p

3

Model, Ba,cldodel I

Di. ,,ed O5.’l2lO1laa,

pso. j

Ve,oaq el Telda Skoc..

D.:i,. PROJ D[SIGNSR

PROJ DES[RIPH

Ua,ic Model 2 OK

ii

6.

Click the OK button and the model will be created.

7.

Now jump forward to section 3.5- Create Steel Framing

3.3 Start a new model

-]

Create new model

I.

Pick the New icon.

2.

Name the model ‘Basic Model 2 —Jirstname lastname”.

3.

Click the OK button and the model will he created.

Create grid We will now create a grid for the model. In order to combine Basic Model 1 and Basic Model 2 later, we will take into account the positioning of Basic Model I and define the origin of Basic Model 2 grid to different in the global coordinates. The grid is created according to the work plane, the current local coordinate system, of the model. So before creating the grid we will temporarily position the work plane to new global coordinates.

A ‘I,

V Set Work plane to a new position

The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the current local coordinate system of the model. Most of the commands dependent on the coordinate system use work plane coordinates.

You can create a skew grid by first setting the work plane to the desired skew position.

4.

On the meno, select View> Work plane

5.

Type SO,45’-7, click Enter or OK.

>

With one point. Press the letter A.

Location: $045’?

Copy,ight @200? Telda

Corporalion


3-3

The work plane is positioned in global O45’-7.O

p

ft

/

Create the grid

3-4

—

You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single picked point.

1.

Delete the default grid (if one exists).

2.

Double-click on the Create grid line icon.

3.

Edit the grid, in the Grid properties dialog box, according to the figure below (coordinates and text).

TEKLAS1RUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

CopTighI © 2007 TeRLa Corporaton

L

(IE

standard

.

v [ve asj standard

Coordinates O!22•11!!236!I2zii 0 23-6 501 O 5sLabels Ex

1234567

Ei Ez

CDEF 0236

059-868-3

Lie extensions Left/Below Jx

G0

Ev Ez

6.0

Orin Right/Above .80”

—

6fP

•6O

60

EXO

0

‘‘c

IP

zo

QH

Z

Magnetism

El Magnetic id ane Depth oF magnetic plane

0’

Other settings [iier-defined attributes... Create

Fit work area

J

Moy

j

[

Set

11W/Fl

Dose

4.

Click Create.

5.

Enter BASIC MODEL 2 in the save as field and click the Save as button to save the grid values.

1.

Click anywhere in the view.

2.

Right-click

and

select Fit work area.

The view should now look like the one below.

Cop5Tigbt @200? lekla Corporaliss

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAFNING Basic Modeling 2

3.5

C

F: -3

Th

C

Create plane views along gridlines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines. Create grid views

3-6

1.

Select the grid.

2.

Right-click and select Create view> Grid views from the pop-up menu.

3.

Click the Show.., button on each view plane to open the View properties dialog box, set the view properties the way you want and click OK.

4.

Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dilalog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Rasic Modeling 2

Copyright @2007 Tetla corporation

3.4 Create Concrete Members First we will create pad footings and columns on gridline I and then copy them to the other gridlines. We will then create beams on w-idlines I and 3 and mirror them to the other side of the structure. With a slab generation mao. we will then create slabs on top of some beams

€:yFr:

i

[2.xi

Pad footings We will now create foundations on gridline 1. S’-1OW-1O tooting

I

Double-click on the Create pad tooting icon. 2.

Load the saved PadFooting properties.

3.

Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for an 8’10*8 10 footing as shown.

Gupyght @2001 1ea Corration

TEKLASTRLJCTURES 130 BASJC TRAINING Basic ModelIng 2

3J

Pad footing properties

Atbibutes

v

PadFDoang

Save

[save 1 PadFootk,g

Posnf Cast urit

Name

PAD_FOOTING

[EIProtie

1”9OS” 5301]

Material

Select.

E Finish S

Class

Lin attributes.. OK

6’-1O6’-1C tooting

Apply

J

[:1

Modify

ii

1.

Click Apply.

2.

Pick grid intersections C-I and F-I.

Get

j[E/r]I

CanJ

While still in the command: 3. Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for a 6lOv61 0 footing as shown in the drawing. 4.

Click Apply.

5.

Pick grid intersections D-l and F-I.

C

The footings should now look like those shown below:

E

D

3---.

‘5 3-8

TEKLASTRUC1URES 135 BASIC TINING

Basic Modeling 2

Copflitl

( 2X7 TeldaCspv,aqion

Concrete columns Now we will create the columns on gridline I. 36’x24” columns

(I

1.

Double-click on the Create Concrete column icon.

2.

Load the COLUMN properties from the drop down list.

3.

On the Position tab set the bottom atO and the top at 236

( Concrete column properties Column Start releases Allnibutes

Cokn Erreleasz_J_ Design I Position Cast unit

D*{m,g Analysis

Position

•

i

Vertical

Middle

Rotation

Fr,t

Ho,iont

Midde v W

Levels Top: Bottom

OK

4.

ii

V;

0” 0.0000

23-6 0”

App’

j[

ModifyJ[

setJjw/rl[

Cancel

Enter the information in the Concrete column properties dialog box for a 30*20 (36”X24”) column, and click Apply.

Cpyrrght © 2007 TokEn Corporation

TEKLA S1RUCTURCS 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic ModelIng 2

3-9

W

I5

Concrete column properties

LrJ EE

‘t

Start releases AttribUtes

End releases Position

‘4;

Cokznn Design Cast urut

.JL J

Delorming Anelysit

COLUMN

ØNarne

38e24

Profile

E Material

.J I

5000

-

•.

Select.

EFinish

13

Class

User-defined attributes..

HOK

24’x24’ columns

3-10

Apply

ft

Mody

ILet JIw/r1Lcanu

5.

Pick the intersections of grids C-I and then F-1.While stilt in the command:

6.

Complete the dialog for 2iO*20 (24”X24”) columns and create them on grid intersections D-1 and E-l.

7.

Adjust the top level of these columns to be set at 21-0

TCXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRlNlNG Bnlt Modeling 2

CopyTight

@ 2007 Ttkla Corporation

Vt

Cokarnn Start releases Attributes

-.

; Cc4nn 1 {ac

End releases Posilron

jj

Desi Cast un

Del orn*ig j__ Analysis

Position

Middle

Øverlical

0

Rotation

Front

Hoijzonlal

Middle v

Levels .(ETop

v

0.9000 0

21.0

Botlorn:

11

JL

]LIJEJ[

Modily

Cancel

Add these columns to grids Dl and El

D

2...

Copy the members We will now copy the footings and columns to other gridlines. Copy the members on gridlines C and F

I.

Select the footings and columns on gridlines C and F. Use the CTRL key to select multiple items.

2.

Right-click and select Copy special

Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporabon

>

Translate on the pop-up menu. TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINFNG Basic Modeling 2

3-11

3.

Pick two adjacent points along grid line C to define the translation vector (]Y-S’ in the x-direction).

4.

Type in the number of copies (6).

5.

Click Copy.

<

Numbe, of copies 6

•1 96”

dY”

Pick.

LE1 []

cc

tea’

1

D

C I

Copy the members on gridlines 0 and E

6.

Select the footings and columns on gridlines D and E.

7.

Right-click and select Copy on the pop-up menu.

S.

With only the Snap to points and grid intersections snap active, pick a grid intersection along grid line one to define the copy origin

9.

Then select the corresponding intersections along grid lines 3, 5, and 7.

The end result should look like the graphic shown below. (The colors may be different)

Pre-cast ledger beams We will now create the beams along gridlines I and 3 at level 23-6”. Create beams on gridlines I and 3

3-12

I.

Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAINING Besic Modeling 2

Copyright @ 2007 Teida Corporatirn

2.

Set the BEAM properties as shown. Clicking the button next to the profile will open the profile catalog in order to enter the values required

Concrete beam properties ItBearn Start releases Attributes

E Name

[save

End releases [_?osition

asj ItBeam

Loading Design Cast unit

Deforming Analysis

B EAM RCDL24’9D”-3J”8’

Shape

ri! i[Seect.. I

5W0

Makexid Finish

6

Class

UserdeId attri&jtes.

LOK jj

Apply

i[

ModiJL

j[w/r}I

Cancel

t Select profile Piojdenane

CL24’r’r’w

Filter

,..

Pife type Profile lype.

Filter

] i C + -O * El -•

T profiles C piotilex Circular hoflow seclions 9ec,aholowkaDimre Oscija, secbis

I

5 TirtetPro(es

Is

I..iG

Pioçe, Web Peckness

fl

Copyrighf @2001 Tekla Corporalien

Symbol h

PCL p RD< pieties + -( RDO< protiles A 15 Deck Sleb profiles 15 Others

OK

ri’ibt

PLCt’jxe

5 L-20

2Show elipofles

us altctqAe j RCL p’ol’leo

Profile wbtype

+ O D.Oe Tees iRCI Plate proliles *, • 31 Welded box proliles P 1 Pararnetiic pieties RCDLprotiles P.1 4.$ ACOX pieties J RCL protles S

G,e,al Ma.ths

FL,r!qo lii

Vaue 24” r’ 32” B

ii

ii

V

Sl•ii del

Apply

TEKLA STRtJCTURFS 13M BASIC TRAINING

Basic Modeling 2

3-13

Coordinate

3.

Enter the information in the Concrete beam properties dialog box for gridline 1 beams.

4.

Click Apply. If you wish to save these properties, type a name in the box next to the Save As button, and then click Save As

5.

In the 3D view pick the reference point of the column at C and 23’-6 (Snap to end points should be active).

6.

Still having the cursor snapping to the picked point at the top of the column on grid C, type z to lock the z coordinate and then pick the top point of the column at D and 23 ‘-6.

7.

End the command by clicking the left mouse button.

8.

Still having the z coordinate locked; create the other two beams on gridline I in the same way.

9.

Open the profile catalog once again and change the profile as shown

Ortho-Locks

r

10. Enter the information for the beams on gridline 3 in the Concrete beam properties dialog box. t Modity profile catalog Picnic name

Fer

t:

+ —

• j i

1. 4 +

:41

4

4 J

t:

* -

—

Fer

4

5

I piolilec t_ pIOIIIOS I profiles C profiles Circular hollow sections Rectangular hollow sections Circular sections Tnte °roRas P eta I ceslfl C) Plaepiofes Weldsi box prcR;es Pa&seuicrgcfa .9CD ofies

5 t2 :5r IT-lB

Generof

1

Use attib4es

PrcUe le Pro(etsce:

ii flOLprofes

Prolile stttype:

rhb1

Picture 4-2

p—it t,JIt2

Properly Web thickness Height Width flange thickness

55 1120 15 11-24

Sy., s h b S

velue 24’ ‘

34” B”

Ur in in in in

flCDX protrles RCL profiles 90< piotiles fl0-C
oj(

3-14

3/1 623”5/8 1911 /1657/8

-

t.

+

RCDL1 1


E&

I’

it CopwNC ZN? Tekla Corporation

11. ClickApply

U. Create the gridline 3 beams. 13. Twe z to unlock the z coordinate bottom of the screen ‘‘I

—

the Z should disappear from the status bar along the

Coordinates can be locked in the X. Y or Z direction. This is similar to the ‘Orthd snap in other CAD programs. Remember to highlight the snap first. then press the coordinate key to be locked before clicking the first point.

V

The model should now look as shown below.

C

Copy the beams to gridlines 5 and 7

14. Select the beamsjust citated on gridlines 1 and 3. 15. Copy special > Rotate the beams to the other end of the structure indicating the midpoint of gridline 4 as the center of rotation (Snap to midpoints should be active).

Origin X0 YD

Copy Nrher of conies 1

68

Angle 0.0000

—

—

J

otetion Angle 180.0000 Aicund

OK

J[

Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporabDa

cojJflëie

z

[

Catel

TEKLA STRuCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

3-15

The model should now ]ook as shown below.

r

F.

Pre-cast Slabs We will now create precast slabs on top of the framework by using the Modeling of Floor Bay macro (66). Create the precast slabs

1.

Open the PLAN at ELEV 236 View

Select and move views between the hsts to control stiy. To select mUiple views, hold down ctrl -key wFüle selecting. Narrtd views: :L!V&TICN oti

Visible vlews: &IO

ZLEVATION ON 0t10 flEVATION ON OID !L!VAI I ON C-N IO flEVATIDT-1 ON tIO ZLZVATION C-N 0t17 ILI’AIION ON 0L10 ELSVAIION ON 0.ID ELEVAT I ON ON Dam ZLZVAT ION 0+1 EIEVTID-N ON 0t10 ELAN AT EL Ci’

[

QK

1 2 3

4.

-l

3d

PWZ AT EL

4 S

23,-6”

4,

1,-i

7 C D £

[

Pelete

J

F V

I

2.

Find the Modeling of Floor Bay macro (66) in the Component catalog.

3.

Double-click on the component to open the component dialog box.

4.

Complete the dialog box as shown on the next page.

0 3-16


CopyTi9hl €‘ 2007 Tekla corporaton

lokia Structure. Modclin ol floor bay C”)

L!1 IZiJ Paiartrerr

-

P:olrlar

H It-

-til

I

I

Prcqeclni ype

5

I Z1 [.Z1 L._ 5.

!!‘-

Delatdt

LFZJ

P7Tfl

I

[Crct

Click the Profile tab and complete the box as shown. In the Pos_No upper box, type the word Concrete as this will affect how your items are numbered in the model.

€ Tokia

gir,€

Modeling of floor lv r’

Li.j Pa,acrere,,

5?

Ed,r.atflrw)

/1

Prdfec

r

b

h

SI

Slab

:

lyoe Thrcrnfee,IN,bo,

Por$ C 21C1_

Mer’al 55000

o Ia

Name

9cP1 clan d dab Irdem Lie’

Aduoirre,, Twa

ac&a S Er___ .zz EDdaut ELD&ath Ia

a

5De

5:

5Se,ae

a

6.

----CLJ

S

S

CE’ C

a

o

5De

S S S S

i

P,th&S,seWdF

S

IaDaur

21 S

2JDeIat ED&L*

21

-I

riwi

LQ’j

LEI.CJ I

Curcel

I

Click the button next to the Profile tab and navigate to the Parameuic TT slab profile then enter the information as shown on the next page.

Copyright @2007 Takla Corporalron

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TNLNG Basic Modeling 2

3-17

U

t Select profile P.cJ.e name:

5ene sr4.ss

JeallsAe5

Foldel,io.e

Pr&k type. A

L T C

• 0 I]

f

Prolile eublype

L proliles T profiles C profiles Circular hollow sections Pactarigidar hollow s,ctlons

t’

Usc-defred. psias&c Corrc T T ht-s-l-b21-oIrl-63l-rlplll

Pdtse

sections • Circular Timber Profiles

@ @ Double Tees IRCI *3 ODT r5 loDr ±

3

1293

‘DthaCTeernsNes & icr

Prepay

SyIthol

V,e

Uret

Tal radIi

N b

2r 977/16

in

b2

7. 40

TEK-T’

&TT

I

fl 1.. -a

I rnress m rim i DefF, c ate Jelance beweai t S,e fazro & e-e to \a/,dlh ot Ihe plale sI.. Stcpe lactor d the p-

Praleixcties WS&dswoJdes Paratrelnc profies RCDL profiles

.9

S..

b3 rIp

n

V

in

DOD

E Show details

Shoyq all profiles

]

L.OK

ejJ

7.

In the PLAN ±23 ‘-6 view, pick positions 1 and 2, click the Middle Mouse Button

8.

Pick positions 3 and 4 as shown, click the middle mouse button.

9.

Pick positions 5 and 6, click the middle mouse butt.

— View 2

-

PLAF4 Al a. 23-6

2’

3!

C

.NN_64\

C) 3-18

TENLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING

Bnic Modeling 2

CopyngIrl a 2007 TekIs Corporstisri

)

10. The slabs are created in view below.

II. Select the macro symbol and copy it to the span between rids F and F. 1

2

3

F •1 Fp’.sfl’,

Søt’=•I

F

D !t

C

12. Now repeat the process to fill in the slabs in the center bay. 13. Change the parametric profile as showr to account for the difference in bay width.

Copight C 20W Tekia Corporawn

TEXLASIRUC1URES 13.0 BASIC TINING

Basic Medeling 2

3-19

t

1<

Soled profile

PyoUer.e,e

rT4 117 a44’-r4ao’r8

•

Denote

&*s

Use, &t,&Jes

ReNt t,çe

LiJ 0

Ps&eesaype

•

PoIse

Cgciiaho(owsecta., ±. j Q Rectana hollow sections Cipsular sections Tiobe, Profles il ‘0 Double Tees RCI t: °0 Rectenqular IRCI Plate p,ct8es

:

•

1 I t4 -

Usadefr,&. paarrel’c Ccnc.Tt hb&+b2fsf,It2dpiE’

b

I

1.

‘

Relde ype:

hIJ1

Parameltic protles RCDL plofilee RCDX poSes RCLceNtes RO< oNes Pacedy Tesetel TOLdtMdh T:-ickrtso & tie lo Dezcte oeteaeeos its S:y,4a’.-b WdF&iherAeslor. Sicqeiacior,4thepe

‘eCow A6VJLCF.&T

• O CANAM , ,

‘5 t-otowcoeslths 95 Caos4e&abo @ ‘5 Da.neTe,,ocnje’RC1 ±

;

EJ Show alp poSes

S s b2 sIr b3 etc

Vn 24” 1173/4 4” 2’ 48 033 8’ 302

Lie 55

1

I C .5

Ehow depots

14. Finally copy the slabs to the other bays. /

—

V

The Modeling of Floor Bay (66) component can be used for steel decking or mesh flooring too. It iil restricted to concrete slabs. Simply change the section name to be used in the component to quickly and easily add flooring of any type to a model.

3.5 Create Steel Framing First, we will create two columns on gridline I and then a sloping beam or rafter between them. After that we will create the construction points needed to create roofjoists. We will copytranslate the completed portal frame and points.

3-20

TERLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAiNING Basic Modeling 2

Cepysight @2007 Tekla Corporation

Then to emulate a change in the contract, we will replace the concrete columns on gridlines 2, 4 and 6, combining them with the upper steel columns so that they are turned into filllength steel columns. Utilizing a sloping work plane and view planes, we will model roofjoists. Finally, we will create vertical eaves bracing on gridlines C and F.

Steel columns We first create two W3OXI 08 columns on gridline 1 at CI and Fl Create columns

I

1.


2.

Load the COLUMN pronerties.

3. Complete the Column properties (profile and levels) for the column at rid intersection C-i using prefix and start numbers previously saved. The columns on grid line C should have a bottom elevation of 23-6 and a top elevation of 66’-3and a 900 rotation C

I uri’n

yioperliiis

i4j tAs drth,e:

:4 Colunn juopeities

b..±i Cck Eie:gn

MF,bie

Po:hon

Co&si

Delc,rmg SlyI vi:r:

M*:I:

)l.iit&w rt’ 2flsv&i

‘N

E

C

RH

jtJvei1& fiicAdn

RI Har,d

A?Iit,,n,

ENaie

.,‘.

‘

II e,&

Dei,’.

Po:t,,”

Dtbnw

AJ’I*III

Slail e{eiel

ldde

V

Bact

V

—

Ii Ide v

ti

O(O3 —___________

0

Cli,1i1411

E” !

Endi&e,te AII(t,iAes £(tfl.

Ft4 ePa

v

492

r

2lToc PBo.

1ST

Lvi Fn 2CC.

7

2

m[Wj[iji i/r

LIIEJ[Jr jJ

4.

Click Apply

5.

Pick grid intersection C-I to create the column.

17LrJ[

Coce

j

6. Complete the Column properties for the column at grid F-I. The columns on grid line F should have a bottom elevation of 23-6 and a top elevation of 59-8 as shown on the next page.

€i

2007 Teja corcoalb

ThIG.A sTRUcTIREs 13.0 BASIC TRN1NS

Basic Modeling 2

3-21

Column properties

EEi Ii;iE

V

End releases Attributes

Save asJ standard

Deoign Analysis

Position

JL

Deforning Start releases

Posilior

El Vertical

Middle

V

C”

El Aotatà

Back

t

C.OO

El Horizontal:

Middle v

Levels

El Top: El Bottom:

10K

11

—

— —

3

-b’! 23’6

Moy

II

II

Cancel]

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Pick the nñd intersection F-I to create the second column.

Since the profile depth of the concrete and steel columns are different, middle positioning causes a gap in the outer face. Use the Measure tool to measure the distance from the edge of the column to the edge of the slab. Measure the gap

r 3-22

I.

Click on the Create y measure icon.

2.

In the GRJD I view pick the point in the slab corner, then the point in the column corner.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Copyright 0 2007 lekla Corporation

(7

3.

Pick a position to place the dimension.

C

ii The measure tools measure distances between two points in the view plane. Measures are visible in the rendered view window until you update or redraw the window.

A Adjust the vertical position

Adjust the column edge to the slab (and concrete column) by using the vertical position offset in the Column properties dialog. 1.

Open the Column properties dialog box.

2.

Modify the column on gridline C using a vertical offset of -31/16”

ii:i

standard

End releases Atthbutes

v. [save as] standard Design Analysis

Pcsitn

L

I

Delorming Start ieleases

Position Vertical:

f1rn iddle

v

-31 /16

Rotation.

Back

V

02000

Midde

V

Q’

E Ho,izoral: 3.

Modify the column on gridline F using a vertical offset too.

4.

Check that both column flanges line up with the outer faces of the concrete. The offset on the column at Ft may be a positive figure

Copyright © 2007 lekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TLINLNG Basic Modeling 2

3-23

a Offsets for all members follow the rules outlined in the graphic below.

—

-J1 I,

0

PLATE CHW*IEL 1•

aDg 0

RWATIIJ

——

na

.. ,“.

.,...4,

F’

Lfl

ax

pLmlTm IN ‘tME

2> PUSITTh lb DEPTH

Steel rafter Now we will create a W30X99 rafter between the two columns that we just created. Create rafter

3-24

1.


2.

Load the RAFTER properties.

3.

Enter W30X99 for the rafter profile and click Apply.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Copyright €5

2007 Tekla Corporalson

4.

Tn the GRID I view pick grid C and 66-3” and then F and 59’-8”.

C -

66’—3’’

e.

F

—

59IIe

5.

‘_

You may need to expand the 3D view at this point if your rafters are not visible. To do this double click in open space in the 3D view then change the dialog as shown below. View depth:

1000

Up:

a-a

jDown:

Work points for roof joists After inputting the two columns and the rafter. we will layout points for modeling the roof joists We can now use the grid intersections C and 66’-3” and F and 59’-8” to create the work points for the first and last roofjoists. First and last joist work points

1.

Double-click on the Create extension point icon.

2.

Type -2-0”, click OK. (We use a negative value to make the extension point work back towards the first point clicked)

Copyiight © 2001 Telda corporat’Dn

TEKLRSTRucTIJREs 13.0 BAlC TRAINrNG Basic Modeling 2

3—25

3.

Pick grid intersection C and 66’-3”, and then F and 59-8”.

4.

Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order.

2”1/lB 0)

V Divide the working points in 12 segments . a

Create extension point adds or subtracts a point along a line that you specie by clicking Iwo points in the model. The points that arc clicked by you in the model define the direction vector; the value you enter defines the distance from the first selected point. A positive or negative value defines the direction along the defined vector. A positive value means the extension point to be added will further away from the first point clicked, negative means back towards the first point clicked

Using the Create divided line points command, divide the space between the two work points that you just created into twelve equal spaces (11 points). 5. Double-click to open the Divided line points dialog box.

—

5<

(• Divided line IloinIs No. of points

[ OK

11 Apply

Cancel

6.

Type Ii and click OK

7.

Select the two work points created previously.

Copy the portal frame and the points We will now copy the columns, the rafter and the points to idlines 2-7. Copy the mem hers

I.

Select the columns, the rafter and the points.

I 3-26

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINLNG Basic Modeling 2

Copynhl © 2007 Tekla Corration

I.I

II 2.

Right-click and select Copy special> Translate.

3.

Pick two points to show the translation vector (19’-8” in x direction).

4.

Type the number of copies (6).

5,

Click Copy.

21 F.

Set Sloping Work Plane for Joists The next step is to model the joists on the sloped roof. To place the parts in the correct plane we will first change the work plane (wtich currently is the local coordinate system of the model) to the roof slope. Help: Modeling> Getting Started> Basics work plane Set work plane to the roof slope

14

>

Defining the work area and shift(ng the

To set the work plane to the roof slope: 6.

Pick the Set Work by 3 points icon.

7.

Pick the top of the Cl column as the origin.

8.

Pick the top of another grid C column to define the positive x direction.

Copytghl @ 2007 TekIa Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Madeling 2

3-27

9.

Pick the top of the Fl column to define the positive

y

direction.

The work plane is now positioned to the top plane of the rafter.

The Set work plane to part plane command sets the work plane parallel to the part plane (front, top, back, bottom) on the center line of the part.

A /

You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single picked point.

—

C;

a

66’-S”

Joist Orientation without adjusted UCS

c 66’-3 Joist orientation with adjusted Ucs

3-28

e

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13 0 BASLC TR4INNG Basic Modeling 2

Cupynghl @ 2007 Tekla Corporation

True plan view We will now make a true plan view of the roof by creating a view perpendicular to the work plane. We can also use the true plan view in drawings. /

Working in a true plan view makes it easier to model sloped objects since the grids are also shown in the true plan and points outside the view plane are presented as red crosses with circles.

—

The pan positioning, copying. etc, however, always comply with the work plane coordinate system no matter in which view you perform the commands. Create true VIGW

plan

I

Pick Properties

2.

Load the Plan View pre-defined settings and complete the properties as shown below, click OK.

>

View...

t View properties

ISavasl Vew EName:

tRUE PLAN ON ROOF

E Angle:

D

Plane

12] Projection:

§

Orthogonal

.

H Rotation around Z:

-300000

E Rotion oirdX:

20.0000

Repiesentation Eviewtype:

Rendered

121 Color and transparency in all vievn:

standard


v Fpresentation j

3Cr

Up: EDown:

EVisibility ci object types:

E Visible object group: OK

3.

J[

Appy

[

Display... standard

ir

-.

vi [object group...

Modify

set

.[W/FJflcanc

Select View> Create view> To workplane.

The new view is created. The grid is also shown in the true plan view plane. Notice that because you are now looking directly at the sloping roof, your columns may look a little odd because they are effectively skewed in this view.

Create roof joists We will now create the roofjoists by using the Create beam tool. Create purlins

I.


2.

Load the Joist properties.

3.

Select a 12K5 profile for the joists.

Copydght@200? Tokla corporation

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

3-29

4.

Change the Position I At depth to: Behind \‘9th

21

112 offset and Apply.

r

Position On plane:

Miadle

U”

2 Rotation:

lop

y:

0.0000

EAt depth:

Behind

V

-21/2

I ..

5.

Pick the joist work point near grid intersection F-I at the command Pick first position.

6.

At the command: Pick second point, pick the work point near grid intersection F-2.

&9s

59 -a E

7.

Check the elevation view on grid Ito ensure that the roofjoist is orientated and positioned correctly. F

8.

3-30

p

Create the rest of the joists by using the Copy special > Translate command. (12 copies along the slope and 5 copies of those along the building)

ICKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Beeic Modeling 2

Copynghi €12007 Telda CmpoIion

EI

-

-—

Set the work plane back to global origin

Now we must switch the work plane back to the global origin to carry on modeling outside of the roof plane, I.

Select View> Work plane> Work plane...

2.

Select Plane: XY and set the depth coordinate toO and click Change.

H

Plane: Depth coordinate: 0”

I

Changej

Caic&

The work plane is now set back to the global origin.

z

Vertica’ Eaves Bracing Working in along grid line C we will create vertical bracing using the Create beam tool. Create brace

I.

Open the PLAN AT ELEV 663 view

2.

Double-cHck on the Create beam icon.

3.

Load the.Vértieal_HSS_Brace properties.

4.

Enter HSSSX4X.250 (EDI Compliant) as the profile.

&zDnw

copight @2007 Tekta corporabon

TEKL4srnucTuRrs 13.0 BAsic TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

3-31

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Create one brace using the column top positions at C-I and C-2.

2’

C

± 7.

Open the Plan at 598 level and place a brace along the column top positions at F-I and F-2

1

2’

F

8.

F

Move each brace down and out towards the center of the column. Remember we offset the columns out to the face of the concrete.

1Move 1 4 transLate

.31/16

Pick...

love

Clear

[W/FIEel

4’ 3-32

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAINING Basic ModeRng 2


Copy the brace along grids C and F

1.

Select the brace and use Copy special> Translate... to copy the brace five times at 19’8” intervals along idline C.

Crane Beam Support Stubs Next we will add crane girders to the framing. Create Stubs

1. 2.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. Load the BEAM properties.

3.

Enler WI 8X40 for the profile size.

4.

In the GRID 1 view, pick the grid intersection C and 50’-W. 5. Move the cursor to map (do not pick!) in the y direction (activate the Snap to nearest option). 6.

With the keyboard type 3 ‘-0 for the numeric location and press Enter. ‘I,

V

Practice the use of Polar Tracking in order to hilly maximize your model ing speed. Remember relative and absolute snaps can also help you to locate items or points in your model.

Cl

Copy girders

I. 2. F.

Cowitt @ 2007 T€

Copy the girder that you created to the other columns on gridline C. Use the Copy special> mirror command to copy the girders from gridline C to gridline

cowaiI

IErtLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAiNING Basic Modeling 2

3.33

a

Take some time now to complete the connections on this model using whatever you deem appropriate. You will find many useful connections in the component catalog for connecting the raflers, crane beams and eaves braces to the columns and there are several joist to beam set ups too. Don’t forget to add the column base plates too. Perform a clash check on your model as you work and once again on the entire structure after you are complete.

Save the model with a new name

I.

Click File> Save as...

2.

In the field at the bottom of the dialog box and type BasicModelcombined.-firstname lastnaine

3.

Press the OK button. The model has now been saved with the new name.

3.6 Combine Models I and 2 Next we will combine BasicModell and BasicModelCombined by copying the objects in phase I from BasicModel 1. To copy the objects from another model we will use the command; Copy from model. This command copies objects from specified phase(s) from another model. To be able to manage the objects from the two models after we have combined them we will first transfer the model 2 parts to a different phase. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools

>

Settings

>

Phases

Change the phase of BasicModel2 members in preparation Check objects by phases

3.34

I.

Click Properties > Phase number... to open the Phase manager dialog box. By default only Phase I appears in the dialog box.

2.

Select Phase I.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRMNING

Basic Modeling 2

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporation

Lb U

3.

Click Objects by phases.

flier Number C.. Number

Name

Name Phase 1

Comment

flnter Plant

iF

I

Phase Set current

Add Delete Select

Objects by phase Objects

OK

Add a new phase ModeI2

All the parts in the model become highlighted, indicating that they belong to Phase I. 4. Click on the Add button to add a new phase.

-

Edit the name of the new phase to Model 2.

5.

Phase manager Filter Nirkec

C .

Number 1

Name Modell

Nai

Comr

6.

Also edit the name of the Phase Ito Model I.

7.

Make sure ‘Model 2’ is highlighted

8.

See that all of the parts are still highlighted in the Model 2 phase.

9.

Click Modify phase.

10. Now all of the parts in the model have changed to Phase number 2. In BasicModel 1 the column footings on gridline B were dimensioned both for steel columns on gridline B and concrete columns on gridline C. Afier combining the models the footings on gridline C will no longer be needed and you can delete them. Remove pad footings

11. Delete the pad footings on gridline C.

Copy from model Copy from model

Since we did not edit the phases in BasicModell they all belong to phase number 1. 1. Click Edit> Copy special> From model... 2.

Select BasioModell as the model to copy from in the Model directories list.

Cocvrigrt @ 2c0? Telda Oa.at’

EKLAS’RL’CTuqES 90 BASIC AINrNS Bsie Modeling 2

3.35

3.

Enter I as the phase number from which to copy the objects.

4.

Click Copy. Copy I roai model Filter

1

Cancel

1

Filter C:\TeklaSlructuresModels\T raining\Steel Directories

Model directories

C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Training\SteelS. C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Training\Steeft.

Easc Model]

Selection

Basic Model 2Basic Model 2-Concrete BasicModelcombined BasicModelconbined

C:\TekieStructuresModels\Training\Steel\Basic Model 1

IPhase numbeis I fP

1

Only click the copy button once Subsequent clicking will re-import Basic Model I on top of itself and in a real contract you may possibly create a potentially serious mat&al over purchasing problem.

The model 1 parts are now in the combined model.

3-36


&

Cpyrigbl

2007 Tekla Corporat’or

1

A

With the Copy special> From model command you are not able to import drawings with the model.

Check that all part properties are consistent The Model t parts were created without paying attention to part properties and they may not be consistent with the Model 2 parts (color, name, numbering series, and material). This is important because it will simpli’ how our automatic drawing output can be handled. For instance: When we created Basic Model I, we didn’t really pay attention to the Name field in the Part Properties dialog box. The pro-am uses this field to help produce better drawings. Items that are named as Columns for example will have drawings produced with more column oriented dimensioning rules. Items named as JOIST can be easily omitted from the fabrication drawing production system as these will not be necessary. Part properties can also control how numbering prefixes can be handled. So to avoid columns and beams all receiving the same prefix we must be disciplined about defining part properties. Use Select Filters

To check and modi& this we must leam the use of Select Filters. I. Select the Beam Filter on toolbar ear

hire’

2.

Now drag a box over the entire model

3.

Everything that should be defined as a BEAM in the Name field of the part properties dialog box should now be highlighted.

4.

Notice that only items that were named BEAM are highlighted. The sloping beams were named as RAFTER and the eaves braces were named as VERTICAL HSS BRACE

copyngbt © 2t07 Tekia corrahc9

TEKLA STRucTlJEs 13.3 OASMO TRtItG Ba5it Modelinu 2

3-37

‘I,

Using the predefined attributes that were set up by Tekia ensures that not only will the name field be consistent but the grades and numbering series fields will also be correct.

V Check other parts properties

By following the procedure above check and change the properties for: •

Beams

standard

iiij Stan

.&earnl

Att:tites

End rele-eses

Positn

[aj

v

Anys

standard

Desia] DSorm,g Load’ J Cmceite

Nsnbering series PreF&:

Start rjn’tjef:

w

B

EAssembl9 il,iiiEet

:

Name:

BEAM

Protile:

W24X82

Select..

:4992

Select..._1

I E Material: Finish

IE:cat

3

User-cef&,ed td&tes

[ppty

tviodJ[ fiet

C ][

,‘rj[

Cancel

Now complete the remainder in a similar manner •

Columns

•

Horizontal bracing

•

Vertical bracing

•

Silos

•

Concrete beams

•

Concrete columns

•

Slabs

•

Pad Footings

•

Joists

‘3 3-38


Copynght @ 2007 Tekta Corporation

3.7 Define Your Own Select Filters To make the selecting of parts easier in the future we will now define select filters for each part type. We will use the names of the part as Filtering criteria. For steel I concrete beams and columns we will use the materials as additional filtering criteria to be able to filter them separately. As we will be primarily involved in producing Steel drawings we may like to filter out all the concrete items in our model. To do this we can create a select filter that excludes us from selecting any item that has a concrete material grade assigned. Typical default concrete grades in Tekla Structures are 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000 artd 7000. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Filter> Select filter Define select filter for all concrete items

to open the Select filter dialog box.

I.

Click on the Display select filter dialog icon

2.

Select and delete each row In the dialog box except one.

j Object group

[i] [J

select (lIter

standard

v

standard

Objects with matching properties can be selected caiegi

Q Li C C C

OK

3.

Eo4s

Past Pat

Pier’ Kane ProNe Mateid

Part Part Part

Phase Lot Pret

Equals Equals Equal:

Pa,n

Ccnmn

I

Md/Oi

A:ow [Delelerow

Equals

Detereal

N

Ic&i

Change the one remaining row to read as showTI below

I Object group

select filter

standard

‘.j

[ave as

standard

objects with matchng properties can be selected

I

E

Calegoe

Raty

Coràai

Vakie

Pa,:

Materid

E..aIs

10)

)

Aa/Oi C Delete at

rceti

JLJ 4.

Then repeat by adding a new row for each grade.

copyright @2007 TeRra Corporation


3-39

Object group

seloct filter

Concrete

e

v[saveaal Concrete

0ects i.,t rri&cJig propertiec c&, t,a selecled

I ‘

.‘

v •

Category Part Part Part Part Part

Properly Material Material Malerial Material Material

Condilion Equals Equals Equals Equals Equals

Value 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000

I

And/C, Or Or Or 0, Or

flAdd row

j

E5elete all

I____ 5.

Enter the name Concrete in the Save as field and click Save as.

6.

You can now select the new filter on the drop-down list. Cc,icsete

Colunn_Filter ChanneLlilter Concrete IDoubleTee IPrama FilIr 7.

h.

1

Then drag a box over your entire model to select only the concrete members.

‘4

A

You can change the condition field to ‘Does not equal’ if you wanted to selecte everything except the concrete grades but bear in mind that this may not always mean ‘Steel Only’ In this model for example the silos are aluminum so would then be highlighted as a ‘non-concrete’ item.

Cl 3-40

IEKL.A STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING

Basic Modelirrg 2

Copyrrght © 2007 Tekla Corporation

/

—

Drop down lists in each column provide more grouping options. For more information see Help: What’s New> What’s New in Steel Detailing> Easier and faster modeling> General Modeling > New select and view filter

By using the Select from model.., option select filters can be defined for various items including: •

Slabs

•

Horizontal bracing

•

Vertical bracing

•

Silos

•

Rafters

•

Joists.

Define select filter for plates

/

9

—

Create your own select filters to use both for modeling and for automating drawing creation with the help of wizards.

Recreate the Modell grid Although all the parts in Model I have been imported, the grid system will not combine. This is because the grid system is not tied to the phase. We will now re-load the saved settings for the first grid. Refresh the model

1.

Save and re-open the model in order to force the model to load the new attributes that have been added from BasicModell

Add new grid properties

2.

Open the grid properties dialog box from the Points Select and Load the BASIC_MODELI properties

3.

Ccpcip © 20C7 Telda Cocp,ra3ow

—

Grid menu

TEIÜ.A 5TRUCThRES 13.0 BASIC TRAiNiNG Bacic Modeling 2

3-41

vI[ieasI

r

BASIC MODEL1

Cooc’Jjr:aes W 81 3’S’ [ax

lay

0” 43-2” Ofl27’9/224LO’ 44’.fl”

Labels 1234597

lax

O’12-7”1/224O’ 44’.Q” Line extensions Le1UBelos

Origin PP/Above

8,-C.,

[ax

lay 8.-u,.

9,-n”

jaxo

i:r’

RI Nt

0”

[azo

a,,

Magretñn

[a Magnetic grid plane E [a Depth of magnetic plane Other s&tings

[a

[.defined attributes... Create

Create Grid Views

Modif9

J[

S&

Close

4.

Click Create

5.

Recreate the arid views for Phase 1 by using the Create View previously.

5.

Add PHASE 1 before the View names in order to differentiate between these views and the existing views.

—

Grid Views learned

Creation of views along grid lines [J

standard

V.

Isaveasi

View plane Number of views View name prefix

Save the model

7.

slanderd

View properties

)

All

1?

Al

PHASE 1 ELEVATION

Elevation View

)C

Al

PHASE 1 ELEVATION

Elevalr, ‘JEw

ASE 1 PLAN AT EL. Plan View

OK

Create

Finally

save the model.

v V

Show...]

[how..i

.1 Jbanc&

] 9.

3-42


Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corps,atisn

3.8 Setting Up Job Specific Information Now that we are almost ready to commence making drawings, now would be a good time to set up many preferences and job specific properties that you may want to show on the output. Note that you can set up this information at any time but the most logical time to do this is right at the start of the contract. •

Project properties

•

Preferences

Tekla Structures contains a powerful tool to help productivity with regard to setting up information that may be repeated over several contracts. All this information can be entered once then stored in a “Firm or Project Folder” so that the next time you start a new model on a particular project or for a particular client, you already have the settings required. For more information on Firm and Project Folders, please consult the Help Files or the Tekia Extranet

“_

Project properties Project properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical information in the title blocks. Setup project properties

I. 2.

Open the Project properties dialog box by selecting Properties-> Project Properties Note below that default information has been added in the dialog box to show you what fields will apply when used on templates. Replace the defaults with project information.

Project properties Project nrxnber TRAINCB2 Name

BASIC TRAINING

Builder

Object

PRUJ:OBJECT

Address

q,our address>

Designer

PROJ:DESIGNER

Stat date End

date

—

Into 1

INFO_i

Into 2

INFO_2 User-deFined attributes .

Descriplion (Shown in Open dialog box) Basic Training Model 2

j( 3.

AppJ

iceI

Press OK.

Cccght®237 Toca C&oo,ator

TEICA STRUCTURES T3O GAS TRMd’G Basic Modeling 2

3-43

Check preferences Before starting the modeling we will check that preferences are set up correctly. Help: System

>

t:sing Tekia Structures effectively

>

General> Preferences

Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. If you change settings on the Preferences tab, Tekla Snctures only applies the new settings to connections you subsequenily create. Connections you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected. Check preferences

4.

Open Tools

5.

For Components, check the values are as below, and click OK.

>

Options...

stderd Clash check c:ampnenta eneral

Load x.odelin; Mcuae settings flwtherirLg

Orientation marks Units and decimals

V

PIQUe Plate:

[Save asj stsidard

names

Folded pi&e:

PL BR.

B ohs Factor oF bolt edge distance:

1.2

Compare edge distance to:

Bolt diameter

V

Bolt standard:

A325N

V

Bolt si:e:

3/4

V

Parts Part material:

A36

Pat stait rijrnbers

[Advanced...

3.44

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASl TRAINING Sasic Modeling 2

Welded to canary:

p\1

Welded to secondary

p\l

Loose pats:

p\l

AssemNy loose parts:

P\1

[uK

j[

Apply

]

Cancel

copyright © 2007 TekIa corpoabon

TEKLA

Interactive Steel Detailing

Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekia Corporation

4-N

TEKLASTRUCTURES 110 BASIC IRAINJNG Interactive Steel Detailing

CopyTight® 2007 Tekla Corparaffon

Contents 4

Interactive Steel Detailing 4.1

4.2

4.3

C,tø2OC? TeaC.,oaGn

.1

Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively Explode gusset plate connection Reshape the gusset plate Add stiffeners Create an Unusual or Unique Connection Create plate and fitting for the beam Create a plate for the column Adjust Contour Plate Create welds Create bolt group Create a Custom Component Define the Custom Component Apply the Custom Component

:EI&AsRlDThRES 13.0 BASO TRA!41K3 Interactive Steel Detailing

1 2 3 6 9 9 14 17 18 20 23 23 27

4-lB

¶1

9 4_jy

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

COpyT1ght2OO7TOIda Cotwa&ji

,v,Y_p...tJ

4


In this lesson

Tekia Stuctures system components cover a great variety of the components used in most projects. However, you may come across situations where its not possible to make the necessary connections in your model using the system components. In this chapter we will take advantage of the Tekla Structures tube gusset connection by using it as a base for a customized connection. We will explode the system component, modify the ungrouped objects and then add objects to the connection using a system component detail. We will also create a whole new connection (i.e. all connection objects: parts, welds, bolts and cuts) interactively from scratch without using any system components. We vil) learn how to Adapt a System Component to our specific needs •

4.1

•

Combine one System Component with another to create a complex connection Create a Custom Component interactively

•

Apply the created component around the model

Create Gusset P’ate with Stiffeners Interactively In Tekla Sftuctures there is no gusset plate system component available in which you can get the stiffeners included in the connection. You can, however, create the stiffeners separately by using a system component detail. We will explode an existing tube gusset connection, modi’ the gusset plate shape and then create stiffeners in the connection using a system component detail. Near the bottom end of the column at grid A-2 is a Tube Gusset (20) connection.

Copyright © 2fX7 Teka CGWa&n

TEK..ASTRJCLRES 3C BASIc TRAI’I,NS Iflttnctive &fiOI Detailing

4-1

p

In the figure on the left we see the connemion before the stiffeners have been added. In the figure on the right we see how the connection will look after the stiffeners have been added. Create component basic views

1.

Select the component symbol,

2.

Right-click and select Create view> Component basic view.

3.

Adjust size of window as needed.

Explode gusset plate connection Inside of the system connection we are not able to reshape the gusset plate the way it is shown in the figure above.

In situations where the connection parameters do not contain a particular option, we must edit the parts outside of the connection. In order to modii3’ connection objects outside the connection, we need to explode the connection to tmgroup the objects in the connection. Modifications when done outside of the connection dialog box without first exploding the connection will result in the changes being overtritten if the connection were to get updated. ‘I,

V Explode connection

Before exploding the connection you should take advantage of the connection to get as close to the desired result as possible since editing connection macros is faster and easier than editing objects outside the connection.

To explode the connection: I.

Select gusset plate’s connection symbol.

2.

Right-click and select Explode component

All connection objects (even if they are set to not visible” in the view properties) will become visible. Now all of these objects have lost intelligence and association to the connection dialog box.

4-2

TEKLASTRIJCTuRES 13.0 BASIc TftAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation

A

After exploding the connection, the objects that were in the connection are no longer connection objects. They will be presented in the model as objects (main parts) both in wire frame and in shaded wire frame. You can only select the objects by using the select objects select switch. U

&

standad

Reshape the gusset plate We will now reshape the gusset plate as shown in the figure below by editing the polygon plate using the Edit polygon shape command.

CopflhtC 2007 TaMe Caporaten

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC ‘RAINC Intecactivv Steel DetailiM

4-3

r

F-

&

v -‘I,

Create a construction line

The system component added the gusset plate using the ‘Contour Plate’ command that we have not actually learned yet. The contour plate features special editable corners that can be adjusted easily, This exercise highlights how to edit a component that has been added by the system. This is the quickest way to work when 3D modeling. Add the system component closest to your needs, then edit it as necessary.

We will first create a temporary construction line to help to locate the bottom right corner of the gusset plate.

r

We want to work in plane view, not 3d, while making cuts. 1.

F-lit Ctrl + P to place view into plane view mode.

2.

Ctrl + 2 to lighten up the pieces.

3.

Click the Create construction line icon.

4.

Pick the top right corner of the gusset plate as the starting point of the line.

I 44

TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Delailina

Cop>.gM

2007 Telda Corraton

5. Type the R key to invoke the relative coordinate snap. then type O,O,-24 to define the end point of the construction line (-2’-O’ in the z direction from the last picked point).

Enter

j

numeric location

Location:

@0.0:24

As you type, the Enter a numeric location dialog box is automatical]y displayed.

H. 6.

7>

Press Enter and the construction line is created

Jnstead of recreating the polygon plate we will now reshape the existing plate by using the Edit> Polygon shape command Help: Modeling> Detailing> Detailing commands> Edit> Polygon shape Edit polygon shape

v 0ut planes

1. 2.

Make sure the plate is highlighted. You will see 3 magenta boxes and one yellow. Select Edit> Polygon shape and follow the instructions on the command line.

copight © 2007 Telda Codporator

‘EKI.AS’RUCTUREs ‘It BASFC R4JN:Ns InteractWe Ste Detling

4.5

3.

Pick the gusset p]ale corner (1), see the figure below.

4.

Pick the intersection of the gusset plate edge and the construction line (2).

5.

Snap to the perpendicular point on the gusset plate edge and pick point (3). (Make sure you pick the plate edge and not the idline).

6.

Pick the gusset plate top left corner (4).

7.

Pick the bottom cornerright on the yellow box (5) as the corner to be removed. The plate is now reshaped.

r

.1

I

A

The construction line is no longer needed and you can delete it. /

—

The same result may be accomplished by using the cut command.

Add stiffeners We will now add stiffeners Eo our connection using the Multiple Stifferiers (1064) detail. When we open the detail’s dialog box we can see thich options are available to us for creating the stiffeners. In this case we are interested in setting the stiffener spacing and the edge distance from the edge of the stiffener to the edge of the column. We can then measure the column to get the parameters exactly as desired. Measure dimensions

I. Take the following measurements in the model: Click the Create X measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dintension as shown below:

n

C

2. Click the Create V measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below:

I 4-6

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TR4ININC Interactive Steel Detailing

Copy,ight @2007 Tekla Corporation

6

Create stiffeners using macro

1.

Open the component catalog (Ctrl+F) and find the Multiple stiffeners (1064) component. Double-click on the component icon.

Picture

Stilfeners

Parameters

GeneraljtAna!ysis

Miltiple Stiffeners (1 064)

2.

Edit the fields shown highlighted on each of the tab pages below and click Apply (study the assiation with the dimensions taken in the model and note the tolerances).

a li/is

Ptrjre Stitencis

Paacneie!s Generai Anysis b

h

PosNo

Left stiffener Right stiffener

Material

EF 3/8

Name -

I

ETh

rj

iEFI

l r;:1 L—J

—

E V

LZ

\_.....j•

EI1/4

I

3.

Pick the column.

4.

Pick the midpoint of the gusset plate, and the stifl’eners are created.

cop n 1 rght @2007 Tekia coroorator

TERLA 5TRIJcThRE5 3 0 BASC iiNN0

intrctive Seei Detiing

44

(

V

•-- -; ‘N i

y [1

You can see the final result in the figures below.

We could now explode the stiffener detail but since we have not edited the connection objects except for the detail we can also just leave it. /

—

If you need to remove a pan from a system component but cannot find an option in any of the drop down fields to do so. you can just enter a zero thickness for that parts ‘t’ value. This will effectively remove the item from the component and the connection in the model.

Now notice that the connections at the top of the vertical bracing are fouling the underside of the beam flange. Use the knowledge learned here to modi’ the connection to resolve the clash with the beam.

4-8

TEKLA STRUCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAiNING Interactive St.eI Detailing

Copynglil n 2007 Tekla Corporalion

4.2 Create an Unusual or Unique Connection Sometimes you may need to create all the objects for a connection interactively. As an example we will now create plates, a polygon cut, a fining, a bolt group and welds interactively in order to create the unusual ooking connection shown below.

Create plate and fitting for the beam At grid intersection Al at level 44-0 (the top of the roof beams on Basic Model 1), Create connection basic views and delete the connection

Create end plate for the beam

1.

Select the existing end plate connection, right-click and select Create view> Component basic views.

2.

Delete the existing connection.

We will now use the beam command to create the end plate for the beam.

Copyright® 2007 Tejia Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.D BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

4-9

‘1

1/lea

1/4”

3.

Start the beam command (double click beam icon) and Apply the properties for the aid plate shown in the dialog box below.

Isaveasi

PIate Start releases End releases Attributes Position Analysis

Dasi9n Loading

Numbering scres Prefix: Pat EAssembi

Plate Debnng Conçosite

Start ntsnbe,:

p

1

M

-

1

-J. I

Attri&tes

PLATE

2Narne:

PL1

ProFile:

E Material: ri j

436

ct...]

-_

Select...

—

Finish:

—-.

1

Class:

E

OK

4-10

[

ser-deFined attributes...

ApplyJ[ MAy

TEKLASIRUCTURSS 130 BASIC TRAINING interactive Steel Detailing

Set

j[ w/rJ[

Cancel

Copyiight @2007 Tekie coqratioe

‘I,

It is possible to create plates by using either the beam or the contour plate command.

V

In the Component front view:

4.

Right click in the view, select Properties, and set view depths to O’ This will keep distant items from showing in the view you are working in.

Load I standaid View Name:

V

Save an

standard

[Component Front view)

Angle:

Plane

Projection:

Orthogonal

3.

Rotation aroundZ:

-30.0000

Rotation arozidX:

23.0000

Fleprenentation View type:

Rendered

Color and transparency in all views:

standard

Visibility Vie’cdepth: Ejup: Down

I

Visible object group:

Apply

0”

r

E Visibility of objeot types:

JL

a

M

[Representation]

I

Display.

stardard

ilL

—

M’

group..

V

J[et

j[i/rj[

Catel

5.

Hold down the CtrI key and pick the intersection of the beam lower flange and the column flange (1) to set the “From” location coordinates.

6.

Then use the cursor to snap (do not pick!) at the top rit corner of the column (2) to set the correct direction.

Cop,ight€ 20C7 TetiaCotporaor

TEKIA STRuCtURES 13.0 BASIC tRAiNiNG Interactive Steel Detailing

4-11

r

2

N’il 7.

)J

Type 1/4 for the numeric location (the Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automaticaily) and press Enter.

The cursor picks to the desired start position (which equals ¼” from point I in the direction of point 2).

8.

To pick the end position. hold down the CtrI key and pick position (2). Then use the cursor to snap to position (I). Type 1/4 for the numeric location and press Enter (which equals 1/4” from point 2 in the direction of point I).

The plate then appears.

4-12

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

Copgight © 2007 Tekla CrporaIIon

j? Move the plate into position

Now move the plate into position by working in the Component Front View. I. Highlight the plate, right click, select the Move command Copy Copy special

Move Move special

Delete

2.

Fit the end of a beam

Select the left edge then the right edge of the plate. This will allow a gap for the co]umn plate across the flange toes

We will use the Fitting command to trim the end of the beam at the end plate. The Fitting tool will trim the end of the beam on a plane perpendicular to the view plane, which is defined by picking two points on a line. Help: Modeling> Detailing> Fine-tuning part shape> Fitting

Ii

I.

Go to your Component Top view.

2.

Click on the Create fitting icon.

3.

Select the beam as the part to be fitted.

4.

Pick the points on the end plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.

CorghtC 2’301 Telda Corpo,etTl

TEIG.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel DeiaiIing

4-13

“

—

C

1’

r

J

Tekia Structures displays the fitting in the model using a fining symbol.

r Create a plate for the column We will now use the Create contour pLate command to create a plate for the column. We wi]l use the Component end view for ease of picking points to place the plate. We will then move the plate to the correct depth. Help: Modeling >Parts

4-14

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAiN[NG Interactive Steel Detailing

>

Steel parts commands> Contour plate

Copyright @ 2007 Tekla Corporation

U

BEAM ‘N24X62SEAI,I

‘N 1! XED CD LrI.

Create column plate

1

I.

Start the Create contour plate command.

2.

Apply the properties for the plate as shown below:

:

Co”toui plain, IJroportio$

Airribules Ar*s,s

Sparnng

-

Loeóre

Desir

NtanbeA,g sent, Prelire

Snarl numbes

Pa4

1

Ecies*

JZ

M

ØNaa,

PtA’T

1 P Ie

P1211

Z%iasesi&

•35

or

r

1

.

I

-

-

S

Eci.

E

[

fn,edetlb,Ae.

Po,nen

-

-

ArdeolN

°

j -

Idle

ILeiI

Moay

j

Sen

Ii wfr I’

Cancel

In the Component end view: 3.

Move the cursor over the top left corner of the end plate and hold down the CTRL key before clicking.

4.

After you have clicked the left top corner of the end plate, release the CTRL key

5.

Then move the cursor to the outside of the column flange and using the perpendicular snap click the first point of the plate.

Copyright (0 2007 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRuCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

4-15

-

-

6.

Move the cursor to the opposite flange of the column and use the perpendicular snap to define the next point of the plate.

7.

Now move the mouse over the bottom right coma of the p]ate and hold down the CTRL key before clicking.

8.

After you have clicked the right bottom corner of the end plate, release the CTRL key

9.

Then use the perpendicular snap to the edge of the flange to define the third point on the plate

A

10. Finally use the perpendicular snap to the outside of the opposite flange to complete the plate.

4’ 11. Click the middle mouse button to end point selection. The plate is created in the view plane of the Component end view.

4-16

ICKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Interactive Steel Detailing

CQpynght © 2007 Tekla CorpoFation

vi

Move the plate

1.

In the Component top view, select the column connection plate, right-click and select Move

2.

Move the plate in the x direction (and only x) so that it is next to the d plate.

Adjust Contour Plate While the column connection plate is now in the correct position, there i’t enough room down the column flange toes to place a weld. We wilt now adjust the plate by moving the contour plate chamfer boxes in order to provide this. Move Contour Plate Chamfers

1.

Select the contour plate.

2.

Select one of the boxes.

3.

Setect Move special

CDpotihl @2007 Tea Crnporation

—

Translate and move the chamfer ¼” in the Y axis only

TEKUSIRuCTURES 110 BASIC TRALN[NG Interactive Steel Detailing

4-17

Mirr Wit, dTe rón

Oeate view Rir1 tn nlap

rkO

4.

The vertical edge will look sloped until the bottom chamfer is modified too.

5.

Repeat the process for each chamfer (-1/4’ for other end 2 boxes).

r Create welds Next we will weld the end plate to the beam and the column connoction plate to the column. This will also add the plates to the beam and column assemblies. Help: Modeling> Detailing> Detailing commands> Weld Weld column plate to the beam

1.

Double-click on the Create weld icon.

2.

Edit the Weld properties dialog as shown below and click OK.

4 4-1 6

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNG Interactive Steel Detailing

Copytighl ©2007 Tekia Corporation

:E Weld pt-opel ties V

Angle

0.0000

23 AngIe:

a

V

23

2 Fsh

V

a

2LecQt Pach:

E LenIt 23 Pitch

0”

0.0006 vi

Contour.

V

& 0

attituies flelosonce text:

COIWTIaS

ia

nt taco

a

42

2 Ettectree iFxo&. s.*nd 2 2 E4

No

2worksh/sie.

0 Connect part)assomEAs.:

As secondary part

V

23

jgr-deIiried attributes...

3.

Select the beam as the part to weld to (the primary part for workshop welds).

4.

Select the end plate as the part to be welded (the secondary part for workshop welds).

C Inquire assembly

V

V.

It is very important to enter the welding order correctly. Tekla Structures uses the welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of the assembly. This affects the position of the parts in the drawings.

You can check assemblies using the command Inquire Assembly. I.

Pick the beam (or any part of the assembly).

2.

Right-click and select Inquire

>

Assembly.

The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow. ‘I,

V

Copytight @2007 Te*a Cortu

To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking a part in the assembly.

TEKLA s-RuCT1JRES 13.0 EASbO TIING Interactive Steet Detailteg

4-19

P

A Weld connection plate to the column

If your weld was not automatically placed in the desired position, you can manually affect the location by setting the desired position for the weld in the Weld properties dialog box.

By using the applied weld properties, weld the connection plate to the column.

Create bolt group Next we will create a bolt group to connect the beam to the column. We will use the bolts to bolt the beam’s end plate to the column’s connection plate. For information on bolt group dimensions see: Help: Modeling> Detailing Create bolts

>

Bolts

>

Creating a boll group

I.

Double-click on the Create bolts icon.

2.

Define bolt group properties as shown in the picture below and select Apply.

fl 4-20

TEKLA STRUCtURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Interactive Steel Detailing

Copoiighto 2007 Tekla Coon

Save

Load

standard

[Save as

Attributes

Position

Sd:

El

EDnoJae

Sot size

4

El Eo ctandad

A32

El Dolt type:

Site

El

connect part/assembly:

As secondary part

Thread in material:

Yes

•

El Ro:aEn

Sack

V

ElAr depth

kiddie

V

3 /4

23 Shape: El Dolt dist)<: El Dolt dist Y

Os

Array

-U’

Zr.

El

C

0’

lndse ii bot assen&

1/16

DECDD

C

C

C

El

El

Listed

i1oIetto,

L

End point:

Parts with slotted holes:

V

H cie

1.23 Tolerance: 2 lotlcrd t,s,tc

0’’

Slotted hcIr

6’’

l:;r,rate. ‘ilot:

Parallel

[Useidethed atar5des OK

Start point:

-J

Sot group

El

—j

0’’

El Erara ngth

-

I

Ottsel from

Dy Ech

V

JL

J Mo&y

IF

Get

J(

cacd

3.

Pick the column connection plate as the part to bolt to.

4.

Pick the end plate as the part to be bolted.

5.

Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.

6.

Pick the end plate top point as the first point (this will be the bolt coup origin). Pick the end plate bottom point as the second point (this will indicate the bolt roup’s x direction).

7.

coporight © 2007 TaMe corporatrers

TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.0 BAsic TRAINING


4-21

P C 0 I-)

a)

P 0

a)

Second Point

—

The bolt group has now been created and the final connection looks like in the figures below.

r

.

0

. .

0

.

7,—’—-

¶, -

-A

b. 4-22

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

Copyright@ 2007 Tek[e CcepDralion

4.3

Create a Custom Component Now that we have made this one connection we may have to use it in simi]ar scenarios around the model. Obviously we want to avoid having to remake it each time so we can save it as a custom component then apply it to other locations. in this part of the exercise we wi]l: .

Define the Custom Component Replace an existing connection with our newly created custom component

Notice that the connection we made currentiy does not have a green cone (The Component Symbol)

Define the Custom Component Open the 3D View in order to show the view similar to the image above.

V Create the custom component

Copyrigrit

1.

@2007

A Custom Component can be a Connection, a Detail. a Seam. or a Part. For the purpose of Basic Training we will only deal with the Connection which is defined as two or more members coming together. The advanced training course deals with the other types of custom components in much more detail.

(3o to the Detailing Menu and select Define Custom Component

Tekia Corporation

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC 1INING Interactive Steel DetaIlIng

4•23

[ii Custom

component wizard

Ty,/Notes

Pos&nAthaneed

T,’pe:

Coinection

e

1/4

-

‘

Nane: T Rate ——

Descuption: Toe Plate

-

Beam to Column

Component identifier:

[ENeJ9

Fry)

Ca’c&

2.

Complete the details as sho’ above. If the Name field is already in use, the Next button will not highlight.

3.

Click Next

l Custom component wizard

-

T 0.. 214

COMPONENT OBJECTS In the model, select objects that will loin the custom component.

[

4-24

J

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

ii

Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporation

4.

5.

Hold dor the CTRL key and select each component that was added in turn. •

Beam End Plate

•

The Cut between the Beam End and the Beam End Plate

•

Column Toe Plate

•

Weld from Beam End Plate to Beam

•

Weld from Column Toe Plate to Column

•

Bolts

Click Next Custom component wizard

-

1/4

-

M...

MAIN PART In the model, chck to locate the rnn pait 101 Wit C,necht

6.

Now select the Column as it will be the main part olthe connection.

7.

Click Next

Copyhgnl @2001 Teat Corpøralion

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

4-25

Custorn component wizard- 4/4

-

f4

S... C

SECONDARY PTS In the model. select secondary

parts

in

picking aide,.

8.

I

CancelJ

I

Then select the Beam

€ Custom component wizard

-

4f 4

-

S...

SECONDARY PARTS

n the model, select secondary parts in picking order.

r ( Finish

9.

cancel_J

The Finish Button will now highlight. Click Finish

10. The green Component Symbol will now appear. We have now saved the parts of the connection in the Custom section of the Component Catalog and can use it to create simi ar connections elsewhere around the model.

4-26

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TJNFNG Interactive Steel Detailing

Copyright t’ 2007 Tekla Corpoiation

‘I,

V

We can even make this custom component intelligent’ so that it will detect variances in column or beam sizes, sloped or skewed scenarios and can add the facility to vary all of the parameters concerned (bolt size, plate size and thickness, distance to the first hole, bolt gage, weld sizes etc) All paramelers are user definable. This is taught in the Advanced Training Course

Apply the Custom Component Replace an existing connection

‘I

I.

Now go to the connection at grid A2 on the 44-0” level.

I

Highlight the component symbol, then delete it.

3.

Open the Component Catalog

4.

Select Custom from the drop down list catalog

,‘ \,l4J ‘i

:

•S

••

abe

60 Custom Ba&cs Fav&tes \ll

[searciil te j .

.

—

MIii

Sketches Search result R,am L—, bam rr,r.,p,—tirv,c

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporebon

TEKLASTRUCTIJRES 13.0 BASIC tINING Interactive Steel Detailing

4-27

5.

Find Toe Plate and highlight its icon by clicking once

1 Tce Plae 6.

You will now be asked to pick the main part then the secondary part. Thess will correspond exactly with what we just defined when we made the custom component. Main part column, secondary part = beam

7.

Now you should have exactly the same connection as the one you created at grid Al

A

We can copy this connection around the model or apply this connection in the same manner we would apply any system component but until we add parametric intelligence to the component it will only be correct for exactly similar scenarios. In this case it will only be correct where a W24X55 beam connects to the flange toes ofa Wl6X50 column. Adding intelligence to these custom component is covered on the extranet and during our Advanced Training Class

4-28

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Iiiterac*ive Steel Detailing

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporaton

O>S

1EKLA

Numbering and Reports

Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 9 November 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Numbering and Reports 5.1

5.2 5.3 5.4

5.5

Copyright

20137 Teida Corpoiatior

Numbering Basics Defining numbers to be used for parts Running the numbering How marks are assigned in numbering Numbering settings Numberthe Model Check the Numbering and Create Reports Numbering Settings Initial Numbering Before Creating Drawings After Creaking Drawings Change Numbering Series

TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbrling and Reports

2 2 2 4 7 8 9 10 11

5-lu

5-iv

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Numbering and Reports

COPynght@27 Te1Co(xra1Ion

*2!!


In this lesson

This lesson introduces the principles of numbering the model in Tekla Structures. You will learn:

5.1

•

The options available for numbering your model

•

How marks are assigned in numbering

•

How to check part marks

•

To use report templates.

Numbering Basics

Defining numbers to be used for parts Numbering series are used to divide part, assembly and cast unit numbers into woups. For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different part types (BEAM, nd COLUMN, BRACING. etc.) or according to which floor the part is located in (l’s floor, 2 floor, etc.). You can name the numbering series to which a part, an assembly. or a cast unit belongs using the part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number.

A

Part Position and Assembly Position numbers are material specific and apply only to steel by default. Concrete members have part prefix “Concrete, and the starting number is I and they have a Cast Unit Position number instead of an Assembly Position number. See more in Help: Modeling > Parts> Numbering parts> Defining numbers to be used for parts.

Running the numbering When you initiate the numbering process, Tekla Structures assigns marks to parts, assemblies and cast units.

Copyright @ 2D07 Tekia Corporabon

TEKLA 5rRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC rdNLNG Numbering and Reporis

5-1

The numbering function is run by selecting Tools> Numbering > Modified or Tools> Numbering> Full. The Full option will check all parts in the model even if they have not been modified. The Modified option only checks the new and modified parts and is much faster. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools Tools>Nnmbering>Modified

>

Settings and tools reference>

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools Tools>N umbering>Full

>

Settings and tools reference>

How marks are assigned in numbering In numbering, parts with the same Part prefix and Start number will be compared with each other. All identical parts within such a group will be given the same number. The prefix and start number together define what numbers the part will be given, e.g. if the prefix is PC and the starting number is I (steel columns in our model), the numbering result will be PC, PCi PC3. etc. Help: Modeling> Parts> Numbering parts

>

What nffec numbering

The Assembly Position is used when that particular part becomes the main part of the assembly. For instance; a beam may be made up of a shaft of steel, angle clips at each end and perhaps a shear tab somewhere along its length. Each individual part will have its own Part Position. Item Shaft of Steel Angle Clips Shear Tab

Part Position w28 a44 p9

Assembly Position A12 P16

When we make the assembly drawing. the entire assembly gets marked as One Beam Mkd 82’ because the shaft of steel was defined as the ‘Main Part of the Assembly’ If the assembly drawing came out marked as ‘One Plate Mkd P16’ yet it shows the entire assembly then we can tell that the main part of the assembly has been defined incorrectly.

Numbering settings Numbering is carried out according to the settings in the Numbering setup dialog box. In the Numbering setup dialog you can define how new or modified parts are handled in numbering. For example, you decide whether a profile name affects the part number, and define the degree of tolerance in comparing the parts in numbering. Help: Modeling

>

Settings and tools> Numbering> Numbering settings

5.2 Number the Model Until now, we have not looked at the how any items in the model are numbered. Try to create a drawing at this stage, would display a warning stating that the numbering is not up to date. If trying to create a report, there would be no numbers assigred to the items in the model for the report to display.

5-2

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINLNG Numbering and Report

CopyrightO 2007 Tekla Corporatror

I

Belore this operation. the position numbers oF modiFied objects need to be updated. To update them, click PerForm numbering.

fl Also check objects that have not been nthlied IFul ryjn*eiigJ

L Settingr.

[Perrosm ntznberin j 9

I

CariceJ

You would be prompted to click on perform numbering to number parts at that point. We wilt use Inquire object to see the current state of the numbering of parts and then we will number the model. Inquire a part

?re

1.

Select Inquire> Object... or click on the inquire icon.

2.

Select any steel column.

The Inquire object dialog box opens. The Part position and Assembly position marks are shown as CO and wO. This indicates that the part and assembly have not been numbered yet.

t Inquire object Id:

1316

F]I°i1 Type: 2

Assem* phase: 1

Part phase:

part

A

St-st point

1317)

[ft—in]

a

115—0” y

=

x

113—0’

=

a

112—i” y

=

0” End point i3ia [ft—in] 0” z = 44—0’ tenser sf gravity [ft—in1 0’ z = Top level [ft—in] Part positian IAszebly position tin length [ft—in] Gross length [ft—in] weigh.t Uhf) Weight:Met) Ubf] Wei;htrosa) Uhf]

44—0”

:

CO 44-0” 44’—O’ 220l.l 21€.21

2231.13

[OKJ

Tekia Structures uses numbers to identify parts. assemblies and cast units when producing drawings and reports. You must make sure Tekla Structures numbers the model parts before you create drawings or reports.

•

Run full numbering

Select Tools Now

>

Numbering> Full from the pull-down menu.

all the parts, assemblies and cast units in our model have up-to-date position numbers.

Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporatnn

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

5-3

5.3 Check the Numbering and Create Reports

C

(

We will now check the marks assigned to parts. assemb]ies and cast units. Inquire part

I.

Select Inquire >Object..

2.

Select any column..

The Inquire object dialog box opens. Now the steel columns have Part position and Assembly position numbers and the concrete columns have cast unit numbers (the position numbers may differ in your model).

Inquire object Id

1236

Type

Assembly phase:

2

I

Psi phase:

o

0’

1

ert

A

Start point (1237) ift—ini:,s End point (1238) I St—on) S

I

78’—8’)’ 78—8

•

Cnter of gravitv[ St—on]

a—

Top level I ft—on) Part PositIon Annhly no.i:ion Net 1ength ft—in) Groat length I ft—in) ((eight (Ib)5

44—5’ Ci Ci 44 140’ 2201-18

0f.aght]Wt) Oleighc(Croos) Vol,ia

105) [lbf]

a

•

44’D’

22’O’

0t

217621 2201.19 7Th1

(in’)

in’)

Area

-

0’

y —

78—E’y—

599642

2173847 V

I

EbK

The numbering is now up-to-date and we can create reports. We will next create an assembly part list of the whole model. Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing reports ‘I,

Producing reports on entire model

You can create reports already at an early stage of the project to check the model and gel pre-bill of material lists al quotation stage, cut lists, bolt lists, weld lists etc.

V Create assembly part list and cast unit list

>

I.

Click on the Create report icon to display the Report dialog box.

2.

Select AssemblyJist_BOM report template from the list.

‘A

-

Report

Hm,c,(

Opkiaon

‘Oaf Sop Wee Adv.a.d ecu

NIe,

k,aeti:y_cer.ter_as_cravety

hal

AtCflIV_Iacd_CO5€_i000

k.aOlyOa.&14_lin 8-0—17 flt A&.nOly_arPart_1djo.t ntoa_Th_lit Ealtjd..lit Be lrliaa

Tee

Tea

m,,a ‘a_By_li

CGapoaBeoCeóee Cpaee.aei.t

Name

Ana-%..aLEr-k.t

stwllP C,esefrne

5-4

TEKL4 STRuCTuREs 13.0 BASiC TRAINING Numbering end Repoita

I___ copynght 0 2007 Teds corporation

0

3.

On the Options tab, check the options as shown below.

(ii

Report

E ii;i

V

Save

asi

standard

Options

4.

Click Create from all to run a report of the entire model.

The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. Mso the text file is eated in the model folder.

nr

Repoii ASSEMBLT LIST WITH

SON)

XAY P6OJuCfllK JOB NUMBEr 25:15

Bark

Qty

98

Pro!±le

DC.: ?i.e:

Length

99

2

BSM1 014X90

19 —8

99

1 1

ELMS 321X44

I’

1

B nil

910

1

924X42

8 911

8

88134 Z4Xl2

2

99

812

811

912

2

Sm 9241<62

432.

SEa 7242(52

is

913

14

914

23

13

COLUMN

63

13

WISXSO

613

14

814

23

63

984

1969

936

8

P≥

L

flIIiSh

1136

9110

1827

3664

1874

3743k

12)8

28017

2101

266L5

18—4 5/8

39•

2

En.

NeLgnt

846

B 813! 924X62

912

3n15 lLgtt

O6IC4fZOOT 1O43:24

44

.

—c

[aK

Cupyright © 2007 TekIa Corporalor


5.5

5.

Check the numbering range of the assemblies and parts.

6.

Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model.

We will create this report again, and give the report with a specific name in order to keep the informañon on the stage of the project.

t

To keep the report files you have created, give them a specific name. If you try to create a report with the existing name. Tekla Structures asks before it ovensTites the existing report

•

Message

Do you want

j

Naming a report

7.

Yes

to

reace existing fe?

1 I

No

In the Report dialog box, edit report file name to read: Assembly_list_SOM_ABM,xsr

(Or you can type Assembly List

-

and change it next time you run the report)

G

[savna;J standard

Re Dnr Retort te,Iater TMes in

Advanced Diii As scab ly c ant as of Granty Asseablynd_Code_iist Asse.bly On Bold lint As se.bly_Phase_i ist Asceablv list

1’

Ass.ab ly_or_P art_Id_list • ASS ii_To_l ist

repoils

r1: -9

a (\

T tIeZ

T$ie3

Bolt Iri list molt_list Checked By list C os&ronent Co dcc

V

Coapon.nt_iist Report tie Nanf. .Assambly_list_BDMABM.xsr

I

I_, J

[__Show Create from all

[ Create from selected

8.

Click Create from all.

9.

The report is now displayed in a dialog box.

JO. Select Tools folder.

>

Cancel

Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the model

Tekla Structures also stores a flaIl numbering history in the file: numbering.history. The file contains the following model numbering details:

6-6

•

User who carried out the numbering and the date

•

Numbering Full / Modified

•

Numbering settings used



1’ Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation

,)

Study the numbering history log

•

A ]ist of defined numbering series

•

Information on the parts, assemblies and east units numbered

I.

Select Tools> Display log file> Numbering history log...

This displays the numbering history in a dialog box. For more information on the log file, see Help: System> Files and folders .t

Log files> Numbering history log

List

Part ad: ran ad: Part it Part ad: Part, d: ad: Part Part ±1: Part id ad: Part ad: Part ad: Part Part ad Part at d: Part ad: Pert Pact id: Part ad: Part Id: Part Id; Part ii; Part Id; ad: Part Part adPart ad Part ad. Part id Part ad Id: Past Part Id: Part Id’ Past Id: Pert 16:

I

>

°

036 oeries:Concrete/l Csnorete/C —> Ccncrete/4 061oares:Cencrete/1 Concrete/U—> Concrete/C 069 rerias:Concrete/1 toncrete/U —stontretej4 sertrs;Concrete/1 977 Concrete/U —> Concreta/4 series-. Concrete/i 995 Concrete/D > Concrete /4 oeries:Conrreta/1 Concrete/C —> Concrete/4 993 series Concrete/i 100 1 Concrete/C —> Concrete /4 aerieo:Concrete/1 1009 Concrete/C—> Concrete/s 101 Scarier Concrete/I. Concrete/U —> Concrete/I seraes:Concrete/1 1026 Concrete/U —> Concrete/I satire. Concrete/i 1034 Concrete/C —soncretejl oeri*s;Concrete/1 1042 oncrete/U —>cncrrtejl saoiss;tcncrete/1 Ccncrete/C—> Concrete/S 1050 lCS8sa,aes: Concrete/I Concrete/C—> Concrete/S 1067 senor: Concret/ Concrete/C —s Concrete/C loll stoics: Concret/1 Contret)0 -s Conroctel6 lop7serxo-./l v/C —re/It sroier:w/l v/O—>p/lO lab 5-o/lC 0 srrieo;v/lw/ 1110 saries;w/lw/O—>cr/lC 113 0 series :v/lv/U—>w/10 115 0 serles:v/1 c/U —se/lb 1176 oerias-u/le/C—s or/IC 1196 retOrt v/I v/C —r v/lU 1216 seoie.-v/1 v/C —s v/jO 1236 serIss;v/1 cc/C —re/jo 1250 1270 aeries:v/1 v/U rv/i3 .ZSOrer-_es:v/1 v/U —r v/lI 1310 seraro:v/l v/U—sos/lu 1336 seraer:o/l v/C —sw/la 1358 oerier:v/l v/C —I- v/li 1-367 series-. v/I. i9/0 —> v/li

I

V

When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of the parts or the assembly, Tekia Structures highlights them in the model

5.4 Numbering Settings From Version 13 onwards, Tekla has set up and provided a selection of common numbering setups. Initial Numbering •

Before Creating Drawings

•

After Creating Drawings Each of these has the numbering properties set up specifically for that part in a contract. To view these, go to Setup -> Numbering


TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRdJNING


5.7

Initial Numbering

r

initial Numbering is used Select 1_Initial Numbering and click Load This setting would be chosen right at the start of the modeling process and would allow the user to quickly check that members that are supposed to be similar are getting the same number. It consistently allows numbers to change every time a numbering of the model is performed in der :o fill any gaps that may appear due to items being deleted from the model.

:? Numbering setup 1niAlNumbe:ig

Nurnberthg

V

Save asJ i_lrbaLNuntering

—

FaNy numberiig Ccipsre

I ElRerunberal I

ElHos

H Re.ne o rximbers [ Check 1c staJad parts

Part nne

Conpare to old

v

Modified: Compare to old

V

New:

H Synchronize with master model Isavenumberirig-savel ElAutomatic cloning

H Sea,, sabcn El Column orientation El Reinforcing bars El Embedded objects El Surface treatment Tolerance: Steel

1/32

Concrete

1/4

Reinforcing bar 1/4 Other OK

J[

Apply

J

032

L

Cancelj

You can see that Renumber All is checked. This causes Tekla to ignore the current number on an item and possibly give it a new number based loosely on the order it was added to the model. During the modeling process Tekia consistently keeps tack of what items are similar to what other items and numbers the model accordingly. Consequently, when items change, the numbers must revise so that no different items have the same number and that the amount of different numbers is minimized by consolidating similar items wherever possible into the same number. Also during the modeling process, items that previously had a number assigned may have been deleted, leaving a gap in the numbering. There maybe a B!, a B2, a B3 then a B5 in your model meaning the B4 was deleted at some point. Initiai numbering will automatically fill those gaps so that the first time you issue your drawings or reports there will be no gaps in the numbering system.

f 5-8

TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING


CopyrihI © 2007 ToMe Corporation

Before Creating Drawings This setting differs from Initial Numbering by forbidding Tekia to renumber everything in the model. It thes to retain the current numbers on parts that already have numbers but it does try to fill any gaps in numbers by re-using deleted numbers that are no longer in use.

(5

l Numbering setup

JJ Nuisng

2fletoreCreating..Drawings

(save as) 2_BeFore_Creating_Drawings

Fa* numbeing

Options

Ccnpae Hos

flRerxIrtJetal

E fle•use old numbers]

Pait name

fl Ream orientation

[Qtik br standard parts Corwase to o Modgied: Compare [odd

Column orientation -

V

-

fl Synchronize with masler model (save-numberingsave) • Automahc cloning • I

2 Aedosci’g bss Ernbedd,dotçects

SurFace ticatment Tolerance:

—

Steel

1/32

Cccele

1a

1 -

Renforcrngbar 1/4 Other

OK

-

1/32

ApplyJ

Cancel

A typical scenario for this setting would be when modeling and checking is complete and we are ready to start creating drawings. (The exception to this would be the Anchor Plan which typcally doesnt show column marks anyway)

Note that if this setting is used, the particular number that was assigned to one particular member which has since been deleted or changed to be similar to another member could now be assigned to a completely different member.

Coyiht@2OO1 Telda Corporatori

TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

5-9

r

After Creating Drawings The third default setting is used when approval changes or revisions arrive after drawings have been created.

3A[ter Creating_Drawings Numbering

Family numbering

Oplions

Compare Holes

fl Renumber all

1

Save as 3..Altec.CreatintDrawinas

Re-use old numbers

I

2 Part name D Seam orientation 2 Cokirrir orE,1aicn

Check tar standard parts New

Cm,parelc±

Nodhed

Keep rNjmber posaNe

t

2 RernForcñg bs 2Ernbedded*cts

fl Sschonie wh master n-od& (save-ntrrering-saveJ EAutornatt ckring

Suf ace treatmant Toterance Steel

1/32

Concrete

1/4

Reinforcing bar 1/4 Other OK

IF

Apply

]

1/32

[

Cancel

The system is allowed to re-use old numbers in order to minimize the gaps in the numbers. This may be particularly impatant if you are using multi-sheets (Large sheets with a number of items detailed on one sheet) where you would like to avoid havhtg blank spaces on your sheets. /

—

If you would like your numbers to remain constant through the approval process. you may want to uncheck the Re-use old numbers setting. This would stop a particular mark that was assigned to something at the approval stage from changing to something completely different at the fabrication stage.

The keep number if possib]e setting allows unique members in the model to retain their numbers after a change, unless that change makes them similar to another member, in which case that unique member will assume the number of the already present, similar member. For multiple members in the model, if they are all changed at once, they may retain their number but if one is changed and a numbering is performed, it may take anew number, then when the others are changed, they may become similar to the first member that was changed and will assume it’s (new) number.

5•jQ

TEKLA5TRUC1uRES 110 BA5IC TRALNING


Copyright © 2007 Tekla co-rraton

V

Take New Number A further option available in the New and Modified section allows Tekla to take a new number regardless New:

Takenewnurnoer

Modified:

V

jnew number

This maybe useful for revisions after fabrication and erection has commenced as it will not interfere with any drawings or numbers that have been previously issued. This may make handling revisions slightly easier. Changing the numbering settings in the middle of the project can be dangerous. In a case where you absolutely need to change the settings in the middle of the project, make sure you understand how the changes will affect the part marks.

• •

Always carry out a full numbering on the model after you have changed the numbering settings.

5.5 Change Numbering Series By defining a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) we can group parts, assemblies and cast units the way we want. This way we can allocate parts in a certain area of a building to a particular numbering series. We will now change the numbering series of the items in phase ito start with 1000 and the items in phase 2 to start with 2000 I.

Set Initial Numbering vJ[save s) 1_InitiaLNumbering

2.

Number the Model

3.

Define a Select Filter to highlight oniy Phase I objects

[I Object group

-

—

Full Numbering

F

selecL filter

Phasel

v

ObWcl, with mSth’ç peopouties tan be s4cled

E

ceQof

Propey

Obtect

Phase

Con.,

V&e 1

I

AndAJr

[_Md

‘°_I ai

OK

4.

Apps

I

Switch on the select filter

copyright @200? Tekla corporalion

TEKL4 SCTORES 13.0 BAsic TRA[NING Numbering and Reports

5-11

Phasel 5.

Now drag a box over the entire model

4

6.

Open the Part Properties box (Properties

Steel Parts> Beam)

3

.:el K! [54.

I

FlEE! LE!

standard

[save asJ standard

Start ,eleases End releases Attributes Position Analysis

-

J[

D Part D Assembly

I

Design DeIorrning LoadingJ Composite

Numbering series Prefix:

Attributes D Name:

>

Stan number:

121 121

V.

B

1000

10001

—ii

BEAM

‘nqlB’<40 E ProUe: fl Mater A882 fl FirAsh: 3 Q Class: H [usei-defined attributes

UK

7.

Apply

H

Moday

H

Getil!

P/F

Ii

cancel

Uncheck all the modi’ switches and revise the numbering series.

fib 5-12

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININS


Copiight © 2007 Tekla Corpsradon

If you fail to uncheck all the modify switches you will change every single highlighted item to match the properties shown in the current dialog box. This can be undone but if it isn’t caught in time it can have potentially catastrophic consequences.

•

8.

Click Modify

9.

Repeat the process for the Phase 2 items

10. Perform Full Numbering

11. Check the Numbering Log (Tools> Display Log File> Numbering History Log) Assax.bly Asa€rtly Asser.bi; .ESer.bIy sseb1y Assetly Assextly Assexb1 Assartl7 Asserr.bly zser1y sse.t1y 3.ssehly

:d: s.d: :d: .d: ‘d:

3902

id:

Sr2

zd: zd: id: d: *d: id: 3d:

3033 2072 3004 5erIes:C?l000 792’series:O/lOOO 9011 saries:0.- 1000 SOdS rros:C/10OO 5263 series:0/10_

SC2.7 53 5261

seraes :3:20D0 5eries: C:00 renes:3.-2020 senes:3,2202 series:S:2200 20/ 1 ser.es:C sera.es:0 120:0 3321e5:C/1000

!-2 —> 2,1004 3:Q —, S. 2204 B’0 —> 3,2004 3-2 —> 3/20:4 S.C —> 3:124 0.2 > 0,1020 0/0 — 0:11-21 0/ 0—>0: 1112 0/0

—>

0/2

—>

0/1003 0/1004 tiC —> 0/1004 0/0 —>0/1003 0/2 —> 0/1126

The numbering log should show that items have changed to assume 1000 series or 2000 series numbers.

• •

Copyright @2001 TekIa Corporation

Be careflul to allow a good safety margin of available marks when using this type of phased numbering system. If you have more than 1000 different members in phase I then the I001° member must take the number 2000. This will overlap with the first member in phase 2 and cause confusion.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TIN[NG Numbering and Reporis

5-13

5-14


CopyTht 2CC? Telda Corporation

eSe

TEKLA


Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporation

C,

Contents

6

Principles of Drawings 6.1

6.2 6.3

6,4

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporaton

.1

Integration tween Drawings and the Model Tekia Structures model Drawings Changes in the model members Drawing Types Drawing List Opening and closing drawings Drawing list contents Drawing status flags Drawing Levels Modify drawing properties Modify view properties Modify object properties Drawing Objects

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

2 2 2 3 3 3 5 6 7 7 8 9 10

6-ui

P.

r

çb 6-lw

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINiNG Principles of Drawings

Copyiigbt@2007 Tea Corporation

!F


In this lesson

6.1

This chapter introduces the principles of working with drawings in Tekia Structures. We will first explain the integration between drawings and the model. Then we will: •

Introduce the drawing types available in Tekla Suctures

•

Introduce the drawing list

•

Introduce the various levels of editing the drawings

•

Study the drawing objects and layout

Integration between Drawings and the Model Tekla Structures stores all the important project information in one place, i.e. the model. Drawings and other printouts such as reports, nc data files etc. are output produced directly from the model.

F

cpy,ight @2007 Telda Cerporatron

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

6.1

Tekia Structures model The model contains all the important project information: •

Pans’ geometrical and structural information

•

Part marking

•

Pan properties

•

Bolts

•

Assembly information

•

User defined attributes

All the modifications must be done directly in the model. The model is always modified in the Tekia Structures Model Editor.

Drawings The drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with added definitions for: •

the sheet size to be used

•

the way titles and tables are placed on the sheets

•

what is dimensioned and how

•

which marks are displayed

•

how the item is oriented on the sheet

You can create drawings at any stage of a project. Some of the drawing commands are located in the Model Editor and some are in the Drawing Editor. You will find all the commands for creating and managing drawings in the Model Editor. To view and edit drawings, you will use the Drawing Editor. Help: Drawing> hotroduetion to Drawings

Changes in the model members Changes in the model members can result in the drawings no longer being up-to-date. The following are examples of changes that affect the drawings: •

A parts profile or geometry changes

•

Parts have been added or deleted

•

The number of identical parts has changed

Tekla Stsuctures indicates updates in the related drawings and the drawing list the next time you number the model. Numbering does not have to be up-to-date to create or open general arrangement drawings.

6—2

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Poinciples of Drawings

CoRyr’ghI@ 2007 Tokia Corporation

(

6.2

Drawing Types General Arrangement (GA) drawings, also known as Erection plans or E-sheets. can contain several views, which can include the whole mode) or any part of it. With the GA drawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans. as well as details from views in the model. Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of individual steel parts. Drawings can be produced for any steel part in the model. The single-part drawings can contain holes but welded parts cannot be included. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing modue. Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings where details of an assembly consisting of steel parts are presented for fabrication. In most cases, an assembly consists of single steel parts that are either bolted or welded to the main steel part. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module. Cast unit drawings are formwork or reinforcement drawings of reinforced concrete structures such as foundations. This drawing type is available in the Precast Concrete Detailing module. Multi-drawings are workshop drawings which gather together several single-part or assembly drawings on one sheet. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module.

6.3 Drawing List We will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list. You can use the drawing list to: Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Editor •

Update, clone and delete drawings

•

Update GA drawing marks Display and fiber drawings shown in the list

•

Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings)

•

Lock, freeze and issue drawings

•

Add revisions to drawings

•

Modify properties of several drawings at a time.

The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing size and type, etc.

Opening and closing drawings You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open and changes have been made. Tekla Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one. Open drawing list and a GA drawing

To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures: I.

Select Drawing> List.., from the menu or click the Open drawing list icon on the Standard toolbar.

copyright © 207 Tekia Corporation

TEKLA SIRUcTURES 13.0 BAsic TRAINING Principles of Drawings

6—3

2.

In the drawing list select a previously created drawing.

3.

Click Open. or double-click on the drawing to open it in the Drawing Editor.

See also Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings

>

r

Opening drawings.

When selecting drawings in the drawing list, the activated buttons at the bottom of the Drawings dialog box are Open, Update, Clone, Delete and Cancel. The table below describes their functionality.

I E n’

Close a drawing

Lc J L

Delele

[

4SD,,.ê’gs Icerd, 1 selected

CarIDel

Button

Description

Open

Opens the selected drawing in the Drawing Editor. You can only select one drawing from the list at a time. If the Open button is grayed, you have more than one drawing selected. You can also double-click a drawing on the list to open it. See also Opening drawings.

Update

Updates frozen drawings. and recreates unfrozen drawings. Locked drawings are not updated.

Clone...

Clones the selected drawing for a similar part.

Delete

Deletes selected drawings. You cannot delete locked drawings.

Cancel

Closes the dialog box.

To close the drawing in the Drawing Editor: I.

Select File> Close drawing from the menu or click the “x” in the upper right corner of the drawing window.

Tekia Structures asks: ‘IckLa Structures drdwing

is,

U Disthle atdorn&ic updatg (Freezel

L 2,

Yes

No

JLcncei J

Select Yes to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawing without by clicking No. Check the box to Freeze the drawing upon saving.

saving

-

)

Freezing When the model changes, Tekia Structures will update the parts and drawing objects in frozen drawings, but will not overwrite any elements added manually, such as extra marks or dimensions. See Help: Drawing> Ceding Started with Drawings drawings

6-4

TEXLA STRucTuRES 130 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawirlgs

>

Working with

Copyright @2007 Tekla Cerporater

Drawing list contents All of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. The example below shows a portion of the header line information that is available in the drawing list. Issue Lock

Freeze

Mo&red 03)29..

Uptodate Changes Created 03)29.. flflQ

P,evisbn Size 36”24

flflO

Tpoe Mark S lI

5’W’

[‘1

Name 3100

!*lel FOU...

Cmi

nOC

See also Help: Drawings> Getting started with drawings> Opening drawings> Drawing list.

You can sort the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header line button in the drawing list. You can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures will keep the changes.

The table below explains the header line items of the drawing list. Item Flags

Explanation ?‘ I

X Flags are characters ( etc.) at the beginning of each row. They, along with the Changes column, indicate the drawing status. ,

,

,

-

,

Dates

The creation and modification dates of the drawing.

Revision

The revision number or mark of the drawing.

Size

Paper size, which is shown automatically.

Type

The drawing types are identified by the following letters: W for single-part drawings. A for assembly drawings. C for cast-unit drawings. G for general arrangemeiit drawings. M for multi-drawings.

Mark

The drawing mark is the number of the part from which the drawing was created. You cannot change drawing marks.

Name

You can add a drawing title using the Name field in the drawing properties dialog box.

Title 1, Title 2, Title 3

Add extra drawing title fields to the drawing properties dialog box.

User-defined attributes

Include up to 20 user-defined attributes in drawing lists.

Copyright a 2001 Tekla corporation

TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.0 BASIC TRJNING


6-5

Drawing status flags The status of drawings is represented by flags, which are shown on the left hand side of the drawing list. For more information about drawing status flags, see Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings > Opening drawings> Drawing status flags. —

Flag

Changes Text

Description

Parts modified

The parts in the drawing have changed, e.g. parts have been added or deleted, or part properties have changed.

Quantity increased Quantity decreased

The actual drawing is up to date, but the number of identical parts has changed.

!

Original parts deleted

The part from which the drawing was originally created has been deleted.

x

All parts deleted

All the parts related to the drawing have been deleted. The drawing is locked.

3,

S

The drawing is frozen.

-* •

Linked drawing changed

A linked drawing has been moditied.

•

Copied view changed

A copied drawing has been modified.

Drawing updated

A frozen drawing has been updated.

Original parts deleted, others exist

A drawing flagged n has been updated, and there are still other parts relevant to the drawing in the model.

Cloned

The drawing is a cloned drawing.

e

The drawing has been issued. For example, you might re issue drawings that have been sent to site.

j

a

Issued drawing changed

The issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed.

Lock (LZ) and Issue ( _l) flags can be manually added to the selected drawings. The flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified.

—

—

Lock GA and other drawings from being accidentally deleted or changed.

Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing. Alternatively, select the drawing in the list, right-click to open the pop-up menu and change the drawing status.

6-6

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawin s 9

Copyñybl t’ 2007 Tekla Corporation

Iesta

Lock

Fieeze Upto —

Open

Ctaige;

Oeake —-1 03/28

CtrItO

Properties... Alt+Enter Leer-defined attributes,.. AIt+U Revision.,, CtrI+R ‘Jçdste ae mas Rerea:e Prr: &ayis, • Delete Selert all

Ct,’+’J

SFEL+0 ctrh-E Del Ctrl+A

Create Drawings Lc,cl’ Freeze

Issue a drawing

Or,

OF

Tekia Structures saves the issue date, which can then be used in reports and drawings. in the model database when the issue drawing thnction is used. To issue a drawing: Select the drawing in the drawing list. Click the Issue On button and the -

flag will appear.

Open the drawing to view the drawing title. Check that the issue date is shown correctly in the drawing title.

6.4 Drawing Levels You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: •

Drawing properties

•

View properties

•

Object properties

For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see the following help files: Help: Drawing> Introduction to drawings> Three levels of editing drawings Kelp: Drawing> Drawing properties

Modify drawing properties The highest level at which you can change the drawing properties affects all of the objects in the drawing. These properties can be accessed through the Drawing properties dialog box for each drawing type. Seject Properties> type drawing... on the menu bar or double-click on the drawing to open the drawing properties dialog box. The General arrangement drawing properties dialog box is shown below.

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Cerporaten

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAf4ING Principles of Drawings

6-7

[t Genera! arrangeruent ci nawing properties

[

Save

21 Name: E:ee

J

Load

sLdsd

r

Save at

Si

Viewr

r

21

LayorA.

_J

21

_J

21

I

View

21

I

2

[Neighbs. pat

Derail view,..

Onensloer

21

menslon.

El

[,

DimenrioT]

Marks

2

J Lsurface freolmenl mark J

El

Parr marl

2 [ Golf mark 2 Connection merk..

Pal

21

Craface rearmans

El

fl&er*cs

CDL

I

El

\Vml&

2l[

Odd

21

Firer

mark.

21 I flerrilorcement markr..

El

etap

21 I__flerrcenwj.

Othecs

[

Ei’ ocn El I user-defined arrribures J OK IL Ap

A

EtoarifJw

I

Cancel

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by changing the drawing properties. These modifications also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change.

Modify view properties The second level is to edit the view level, where you modi’ the selected drawing’s view. It is important to remember that changes at this level take precedence over the drawing level settings. In the drawing interface, double-click on the border surrounding the drawing view to open the View properties dialog box. The View properties dialog from an assembly drawing view is shown below,

0’ 8-8

TEKLASTRIJCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINFNG Principles of Drawh,gs

CopyTight 0 2007 Tekfa corporation

J

Save

J

Lead

Attributes 1

Attributes 2

ElScae:

.7

standard

V

Save as

J

Column with_GO

Label

12W

Rseabon aor,d evfll 4 fr’ 30 . No

2pe&ttad,4e4ir

0.0 00

V

QFilbypails

ElSize:

Detrie as distances

Xre*,

-51/128

X man: 431183/128

Vein:

115/32

Ywas

Deothdorwi

Devdn

115/22 i•’”2/32

4

yew erien’ t negitos pate. hlwka

2 El

Lees maik. I Connection maj

Surtace treatment rearkj

El El

2

Ssutace tieatnera]

El

Eli

H&eenee

Eli

Paitsnak

El El

Neighborpaitmaek [Reinforcement mark

0bects

ELOca 4

El El

r

Np&. _j Refrocceenet

Grid

Others

Eli

J4

OK

. 2 El LNeolibor part til

Fiyer...

_H

][iE

Moy

Iw/rJi

Cscel

Modify object properties The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level, where you change individual objects in the drawing. Tndividual object settings can be accessed by double-clicking on the obiect. The properties dialog for an assembly drawing bolt mwk is tho be[ow. * toll

m.d

S tsr “tx-’ ties ztarsdard

C,tee

GenerM

2 Avde n± Rse length

c< Gage oF o4aiendn

Bolt dameser

or Centes-lecenter diz

Hdediaeeter

Type:

DJ

Standard Shsrt nane Full name

red

Anew-ct. sçe Winder ci be’s 550 at

550 #

Ste hega Sick anal,

rieq*

3/32

Size

Card.

Aid

coureersurac Gase oF outstardw Center-Incense. 5’

±±!

2..

5-

ore

Copyright @2007 TekIa Corporation

TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

6-9

Drawing Objects In Tekla Structures. the term drawing object refers to lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, poly lines, polygons. clouds, symbols. text. DWG/DXF files, marks and dimensions. Always work downwards in the drawing hierarchy. Get your drawing as close as possible to what you want by first attempting this at the entire drawing level. Then modib’ anything else that needs adjusted at the view level and finally if any further cleanup is necessary (and this should be minimal) you can do this at the individual object level. Once you have edited something at one level, changing something else at the level above may negate the changes you have just made.

1_

If you find you are adjusting many items at the individual view level, please contact Tekla Technical Support. They will almost definitely be able to suggest a method to minimize any extensive drawing editing. Ideally, you shouldn’t have to edit your drawings at all!

r

6-10

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

Copytight© 2007 Tekla CorraIinn

TEKLA

Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 9 November 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

r

Contents

7

Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7.1 7.2

7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6


Assembly and Single-part drawings Create Drawings Create Assembly Drawings of selected parts Create Single Part Drawings Creating Drawings from Groups of Similar Members Creating AD Drawings Automatically Functionalfty of drawing wizards Edit Drawings Manually Alterations Change the model Update the Drawings

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAStC TRAtNtNG Aseembty and Single Part Drawings

I 2 2 2 4 6 9 9 12 16 17 18

7-hi

iv

TLKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TftAININS Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Copyrght@ 2007 Tekla Corporation

C


In this lesson

We will introduce the creation of assembly and single-part drawings in Tekia Structures. We will first create single-part and assembly drawings by using predefined drawing settings. Then, we will use wizards to automate the process. We will then edit the drawing properties. We will also demonstrate how updating effects the drawings. Revision control of all drawing types is presented in Principles of working with drawings. We will learn how to •

Create assembly drawings individually

•

Create drawings of groups with common attributes

•

Create drawings automatically

•

Handle drawings after thanges are made in the model.


TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TlNINS Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7-1

7.1

Assembly and Single-part drawings Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of each of the individual steel parts in the model. Assembly drawings are workshop drawings, in which details of an assembly consisting of the steel parts are presented for fabrication. All of the views in single-part or assembly drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model. When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the “host’ member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark. Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the infonnati in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You can, however, iIlter out parts and bolts in the drawings, or make them invisible. You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you perform numbering. For more information, see Help: Drawing> Introduction to drawings> Basics.

7.2 Create Drawings Once you have numbered the model, you can create assembly and single-part drawings from the model. We will begin by creating these drawings one by one, then we will create drawings in coups and then we will use the Drawing Wizard There are many different settings available within the program to control how the drawings created will look. For instance: You may want column drawings to be dimensioned differently from Beam drawings and brace drawings may be different again. You can create an unlimited number of these drawing creaüon “profiles’

Create Assembly Drawings of selected parts We will now use the Column with BOM (Bill of Materials) settings to create an assembly drawing of one of the columns. I.

Open the BasicModelCombined model.

2.

Select the Column at Grid A3

p 7—2

TEKI.A STRucTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Pan Drawings

CopyTight © 2007 TakIa Corporation

3.

Go to the Properties Menu and Select Assembly Drawing

4.

Select Column with BOM from the drop down list and click Load, This sets all the properties to commonly used settings for column assembly drawings.

[ Assembly drawing properties

[

Save

Load

E Nate: 2 Title:

CO LU FN

1

Cokjnnyth,,BOM

a_j

5.

Click OK

6.

Go to the Drawing Menu and Select “Assembly Drawing”

7.

Open the Drawing List and then open the column drawing to view it.

‘6-J

Copyright © 2007 Teds Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING


7-3

e -a

OSIE

I

-

CCLUISN

02

nL_DFVATERAI.

lç

F*-N. t EL:---i 8.

-

b

—

1ii..a

Select any other item in the model. A beam for example and run the drawing by following the same process.

Create Single Part Drawings We can also break out the individual parts of these assemblies and create individual drawings of these items.

I.

Set up properties for plates by going to the Properties Menu then selecting Single Part Drawings

2.

Select the Plate with BOM as shown below and click Load, then OK Single-part drawing properties Save

ENane:

IL Load ]

PIate_wth_DOM

Save a

Plate_with_ROM

PLATE

E TJe

7-4

3.

Make sure you have ‘Objects in Components” selected

4.

Highlight the column base plate in the model.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Copyright @ 2007 Tekla Corrstion

r

5.

Click the Drawing Menu then Single Part Drawing. When you open the drawing list, notice that the drawing type is now “W’ instead of “A’ denoting that this is a single part drawing.

• ha’.

Lad

r,..’.

Upeds

D.,,

c—

Maad

o4/S/O7 OO2LI27 4fl5/2X7

Pa,,,.,,

£. t’2r 1r1119r [P1/2W [‘9ir,r

a

‘.‘ [DI)

A

P lLn

,J,aLLsaacD ODAM

IPZ

DtATE

1, w C VS

a’—

E — —St. , — at

“I

Ed

L3J 6.

Double click on the item on the drawing list to open the drawing.

FA6 NAME

7.

I

8P2

Of course, it wouldn’t make any sense to select each individual item and mn each drawing one at a time. We can thither automate this process by selecting groups of

Copynght © 2007 TekEa corporaor

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIc TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7-5

items. For example. we set the Column Drawing properties then run all the column drawings at once. Then switch to Beam Properties and run all the Beams drawings at the same time.

7.3

Creating Drawings from Groups of Similar Members

Create all the beam drawings

Now we will use the selection filters to group similar items. This restricts selection of items in the model by any property. For example, if we select the Beam Filter front the drop down matu, only items that are named BEAM will be selected when we drag our mouse over the entire model.

I.

E eam_Fiter

Set the Properties

2.

>

Assembly Drawing to Beam with BOM’

Single-part drawing proper-ties

fl saJI Nase

Load

j

Geam_wititSOM

-

V

Ii

Save as

Beam_wh_60M

BEN-I

Til:

3.

Uncheck all the selection switches except Parts and Objects in Components. This avoids selecting any unnecessary objects when you drag your mouse over the entire model.

k 4.

.kE1U

ifl

*

p -

Now drag a box over the entire mode] and notice that only the beams will be highlighted.

( 7-6

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

CopyrigMD2007 TeIdaCorpora

5.

Now run the assembly drawings. I ekla Structures

File

Edit

View

-

C:\1 eklaStrucLv nMocIels\V1 3.O\BasicModelCornbined

Points

Parts

Analysis

Loads

Detailing

nrawing

Properees

Sebip

Tools

Inquire

i W Ufl@7 DE Wizard.. Si’*-p&

LJ 3 6.

[!1

1 L

Qd-W ThA

Assom* dmww’g ?,wrp.wr

Notice that all beam drawings will now be created. 1 211.11,11

I——

—

Ow

—

—

214fl110

Ut Ct)tAflt. O)

sA/2Aj1t2 si/flAIr 54/fl/22117 SOAr/all 2405)22107 24/10/267 24/20)21.7 04/257221/a? 04/500/7 54/26/20/7 04/26/20/? 04/26/2022 /0260027

/fl /fl /a05 i0,tO 210101//MA 20/01///al 00/25/2105 0/05/010 5/00/05 n//10 0//03/ 510//n

BVIV2C 2141111)IC

—

SIB

no.10

Iflfl.1r., ri fl•l? 101,710—lri2.1auW1ThUU 10-14296.. 101OWU.

01•U 10-14290/.. 0-4210/.. in//lOU. In/SIt In/2It Iro.WU IclAIlt_

tIll A A A A A A A A A A A A A A & A A

Il

ea V IBO

0.0 Ill/a Bill 101/ 11.1/ 20.14? 10.19

0-?9 0 II 6SI jill •2SJ RI

—

iI -

Lt,2z±_l OZ rrrj

lOAM 61PJ4 aLMA IEAM 11AM BEAM 6/AM 6/004 SEw.

--

rjiirj 6 S 1,1.1.

IEEi r111

SCAM

06

MI

SCAM B/AM 01404 —

FoA

I

JE --.

Create all the column drawings

Now do the same for all the columns. 1.

Set the Column with BOM properties

Copyrht @2007 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 SASEC TRI{NING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7.7

ilL

Save

Load

j

r

m_titBCM -

:.:.

CCLU.IN

Name:

E_ E

ETIe

1

42.

Click Load then OK

3.

Select the Column Filter in the model.

E:c]umnl her

4.

Drag a box over the entire model

.:1i

0 5.

Notice that only the columns are highlighted.

6.

Run the assembly drawings for those Tekla Structures

Fh

Edt

ye;:

-

1:1 pklncIu

‘ct,ts

Parts

cliii

Loads

esMoitelsWl 3_DBasicMoulelCc,inIsinei1

n&ysS

Jw

U?’

Ør c)

Lli11v

‘I

P

Detafriq

Setup

Took

€tu/ard

Sec*pad

inqire

Qd-L

Th:Thu

44 -

Proper

Drathig

&avS,Q

Ctcl+W

- &Thç Cwsl r7dvwtmer dr,i.rn

I

I 9’

7-8

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRINJN$ Assembly and Single Part Drawings


‘1

-LFiEJ Lø

F__Up4A —•

Cb.A.,

C’.d 11019JYD’ W2V217 ei,o]i c4!Afl:

H.a4 W fl uwm s1a’

o4?1s?JO? oulwaAi 04/1/157 14/20,1117 1/101110 CA10J 04)00/AS? 04/117217

aJIWAOD) AIm 00,11/1101 I0/Th1/XIZ 5111/n fl/t00O O4t) 011W/fl fl

1/207307 04710/000 04/1011327 IAI%/1[i)7

ll/0 00,113000, 00/51/lOX IS/n/loll

04151111?

H.4,.A4

Ag.

At 513. 024;

rATIO F nn,O F ,fln1Iu 5 ‘rirIt. A t 21’?? A.?? 71r21r w 101.11 inn”. A 10.11 rn-Ar A £010 £127 A 7UJ A C4 fl/fl, F ‘11 n’?ltA11 9 Ifl)TTO A 07] irTI?? 0)1 A 0 rAil 1111191. A 10111 If??’?) A [0130 01/211. A 0)14) R1’)9• A 11141

,n,rir.

z

AI 1094 0044 0034 &1A4

rrj

‘IA’

[iI CID

RAIO WMA 11L0404 WLOAA 0.090 0101.30’ 0.1144 OIL/MN

(ZiLD

tL)/4h 0110444 COLUMN COLuMN 334/lI F RAW?

jj

‘Th

“

‘

Users can repeat the process for other items such as braces, channels, angles etc.

7.4 Creating All Drawings Automatically You wilt notice that it takes some time to either select each item individually or in groups and set up each item’s drawing properties and there is also the chance that you may miss something important. For this reason, Tekla has included a wizard to do all this work for you. The wizard simply automates the process we have just covered in a step-by-step fashion. It sets the Beam drawing properties and the Beam Select filter. Then it finds all the beams in the model and runs the drawings. Then it sets the Column properties and the Column filter, finds all the columns in the model, and runs those drawings. The process is repeate d again and again for braces, channels, rafters, purl ins, hips, and etc. If it doesn’t find selling a for something in the model it will still run the drawing with the ‘standard’ settings and will warn you with a message in the title column of the drawing list. For more information on drawing wizards, see: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings wizards

>

Creating drawings> Using drawing

Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Drawing reference

>

FiIt>Wizard...

Drawing wizards cannot be used to create General Arrangement (GA) drawings or cast unit (CU) drawings of concrete structures.

I

—

Remember that drawings are never recreated by the program. if the drawing already exists and there have been no changes in the model. To tbrce recreation of drawings, users must delete the existing drawing.

Functionality of drawing wizards For each member type in the model, drawing wizards automatically perform the following steps: 1. 2.

Define the drawing type to be created (single, assembly) Select the predetined drawing properties to be used

3.

With the given select filter, select the parts from which to create drawings

4.

Create drawings.

Copyright @2007 TokIa Corporation

TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7-9

When you apply a wizard, you can choose whether the wizard creates drawings from all parts of the model, or just from the selected parts. By creating wizards that match the select filters and drawing properties in the project you can automatically create all single and assembly drawings of the parts using suitable predefined properties.

/

V A

Preconditions of using a drawing wizard: • • • • •

Numbering of the model must be up to date The appropriate wizard file must exist The saved drawing properties listed in the wizard file must exist The saved select filters listed in the wizard file must exist Model members which will be selected by the select filter must exist

For this part of the exercise we will use the wizard to create the remaining drawings in the model that have not been created already.

@7

1.

Select Drawing> Wizard.., from the menu or click on the Wizard icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Wizard dialog box.

2.

Select Assembly Drawings with BOM on the Wizard Wads

Wizards

tab.

e

t,

Adva,ced •

[0l our, S,_Fart_DravAigs_with_B0M-A I hf [‘tti,nr

rOOR

g5prN)

th

USWizadHK usW&AS USWizard_Single_Pa,Is USWizard_S ingle_Parle-All

b

Show

Edit

[Cieate horn a4 2eale horn selected

-

Cancel -

3.

Sv€- &S

Click the Create from MI bunon.

It may take a few moments to complete depending on how’ many drawings we created already.

4.

7-10

Sort the drawing list by name and search for any items that have the title ‘NO ASSOCJATED DRAWING SETTING USED BY WIZARD’

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINlNG


CcpyThl

@2007 ToOls Corporation

___

———U--

—

I--

in I.,2,

mnA

OL’ASnOy

flUnAOX

Anexo,

nAn

A

IFII?)t

A

2

A

Iii

l2 II

IEAII

A IAA ILIOT lA,r,r,lA’IL&AA A IAAI EI2 A CAl •I

tan

A

A

I____

#41

LJ

5.

Highlight these items in the list and click the ‘Select Parts’ button to show them in the model. You can then analyze and recreate these drawings manually with the drawing settings of your choice or the wizard can be modified so that these items are included in the future.

6.

You can also open a few drawings and inspect or check them. You can view the next drawing on the list by clicking Next or using the shortcut Clii + Page Down

1’ / r

U IAA’A4 w33

Using the procedure outlined above, you could create single-part drawings from any other selected steel parts in the model (columns, braces, angles, etc.).

çr ‘I,

It is advisable to create all the single and assembly drawings with the wizard. Tekla Structures displays a Cancel dialog boK during the creation of drawings. Click OK in the dialog box to stop creating the drawings.

cop1ighI © 2007 TeNs Corporaliin

TEKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASl TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7-11

7.5 Edit Drawings Manually

r

It is easy to manually add, delete and edit drawing objects (i.e. dimensions, lines, text, symbols, graphics and marks) in Tekla Structures drawings. Most drawing objects (both automatically and manually created) are associative and automatically update if the model changes. However, some manually created drawing objects such as lines, polygons, and circles are not yet associative.

A

We will now edit one HSS BRACE drawing manually to include the same editing that we defined for the vertical brace_V drawing properties (the bolt distance dimensions, the rectangular part mark frame, and single part views). Include Single Part Views

I.

Open the first HSS BRACE drawing in the drawing list

2.

Double-click in open space on the drawing to open the Drawing Properties dialog box.

(Entire Drawing Level)

Assembly drawing properties Save

J

rsave as

BraceHSS wE’ 8DM

Load

8raceHSSjà8OM

1

HSSBRd,CE

2Name.

j.

Views

n

El I

Layout.

El

View.

L__Section_view

Eli

3.

Click the Layout button

4.

Now select the Other’ tab and change the include Single parts’ option to Yes. Single Part Details can assume the attributes of the current thawing or can be set with their own attributes in order to improve how the drawing looks automatically. In this example we will set the single part views to have the USPlate attributes.

r*. Assembly Save

I,iycnit properties

-

Load

Dra*;ng size scaiel

I Third angie

l2J PIOlectiori type

El Align section views with main v,ew El Align end views wE, main view:

Yes

V

El Ertpand shortened parts to lii:

Yes

V

El lró4e s!e.p&lv

Yes

El Sirpaet at’tijtes: OK

7-12

ii

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TFNING


LSPWe

F

V

Get

I[wfrl[

c

copyright ts2TtI Tekia Corporation

5.

Click Modify

6.

Once the drawing refreshes it may look something like shown below. Notice that the single plates are detailed out separately like a more traditional hand drawn drawing.

* 1 EEEE

EEEhti

cC F 2 VERI1CAL 1-155 SPACES D4 -

-

BILL OF MATERIAL

F I: Change the Sc.ae of the Section Views

7.

-

-

;.-.

-

-J ‘I

I

I

‘;-

Select the Section A-A view border. Double Click it 0

(View Level)

p19 0-

S

S

I

p19

AA 0

8.

In the view properties dialog box, change the scale as shown below

copfpgbt © 2007 Tekia Corporatiri

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TIlJrNG Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7-13

Save Attributes 1

Attributes 2

v

stenda

Load

(

racehSSy4b_B

Save

Label

View

Sce

Rotation a,ound (in

0 Reflected view: 2 Size Q Fit pasts 0 Dehne as distances

No

3D

•0.0

views]

v

00

x run

-231128

Xmas.r

23,128

V ml”:

-33/128

N’ max:

33/128

Depth down:

43/128

Depth up: 43/128

2 View extension for neighbor parts:

0”

Marks

,L

EL O

Pastna&.

[5iaceeatn rnak...

J

0

I_Conneden mark..._J

0

L

2 2

0 0

I

E 0

Bod mask..

1 Neltc: past mask. [ Rek,fo,cermnt masks...]

Objects

Part.. EL_______

4

Surtace treatment.

Reference objects... El_______ El

Boll...

1

Weld,,

j

Neighbo, past...

[

Reinfo,cement..

Grid,..

Others

2

Fdler.

OK 9. Add bolt distance dimensions (Individual object level)

4rk’

IL

Mo&y

[bc pal hiteti

ilL

setj[W/rJ[

Carrel

Click Modify

10. Repeat for Section B-B II. Click on the Create Y dimension icon 12. Pick the corners of the plate to be dimensioned 13. Move the cursor to where you want the dimension to appear and click the middle mouse button.

E

7-14



Ccpyiight 2007 Tolda Cowora6,n

r

•1

N

-

-

.

-

-

2

‘

A

Click SHIFT+A in the keyboard to display/hide the associative symbo ls

‘I,

To move a dimension: select it and drag it to the desired position

V Change the frame of part marks (Individual object level)

The associative symbols indicate which drawing objects are associated to the model and will be updated if the model is changed

Add the dimension to the other end in the same way. I. Double-click one of the part marks to open the Part mark properties dialog box. 2. On the General tab, change the Frame around mark to rectang ular and tick only this check box. 3.

Select all the part marks in the drawing.

(You can use the Select part mark select switch.)

ktaEIC’ Emn3 4.

Click Modi,

D

15

B-B Copyright @2007 Tekla Caj,oiWo

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7-15

Now all the part marks in the drawing have rectangular frames. Remember you can modifi all the settings in a drawing at the drawing properties or view properties level.

/ —

5.

Close the drawing, click the check box to Freeze the drawing and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

Do you want to keep he changes to he drawing? Disable automalic updating lFieezel

Yes_iii

A

No

Cancel

When you close a drawing that has been changed, Tekla Structures prompts you to save the drawing. Whenever you have manually edited the drawing it is recommended to select Disable automatic updating (Freeze). This way you ‘will systematically freeze edited drawings and only them.

A snowflake icon

‘‘

appears in the drawing list to show that this drawing is frozen.

Now, this one brace drawing has roughly the same editing as all the other brace drawings. The difference is that part of this brace drawing editing was done manually. If we wanted the rest of the brace drawings to have the same editing, we could repeat the manual editing to them one by one. However, changing the drawing properties is a better solution because this method is more automatic and much quicker.

a • •

In order to automate the creation of drawings as much as possible, you should try finding adequate predefined drawing properties to create (he drawings with instead of editing them manually. Whenever there is a need to edit the drawings, you should first check if the result can be achieved by changing the drawing properties. As long as you can manage to create complete drawings by using predefined drawing properties the creation and updating off the drawings will he more automatic.

7.6 Alterations We will now modi& our model by changing the size of the plate in all gusset plate connections. Changes in the model will result in some of the drawings no longer being up-todate. To be able to open the drawings, you will need to run numbering and update them. We will study how updating affects the edited drawings. Updating will: •

Switch the flag on a frozen drawing to This indicates that the drawing has been updated (also manual editing, such as exfta marks or dimensions).

0 7-16

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Copyrighl © 2007 Teds Corration

•

Regenerate any drawings with an flag that are unfrozen. with the originally used drawing properties. The updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, texts etc.).

•

Update the quantities on a drawing with an

!

flag.

Change the model Change gusset plate bolt spacing

1.

2. 3.

Select the connection where the braces cross the column in the model

—

Shown below

Double-click on the connection cone to open the connection properties for editing. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box. Sa’

Load

e,dad

Lore olhei types -

4.

copyTigli

On the Picture tab page, edit the extra width of the knife plate as shown below.

@2001 TeI
TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIc TRAINiNG Aesembly and Single Part Drawings

7-17

5.

Click Modify.

Now the model has changed and some of the drawings are no longer up to date. To be able to open the drawings you need to run numbering and update them.

It is not possible to open earlier revisions of the drawings. Due to the integration between drawings and the model a drawing that is not up-to-date cannot be opened.

Run numbering

I.

Select Tools> Numbering> Modified.

Update the Drawings Once the numbering is carried out, the flags in the Drawing list show all those affected drawings that need to be updated. Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Drawing status flags tsto,c Psrrdcd

/ —

Q Update unedited brace drawings

94,2S/27 34,25)20]?

o4//2637 r(txfl(E

1E/29Y... ir)2io

A A

4

IDE

HSS BR4 HSS BRACE

You can filter up-to-date drawings with Filter> Up to date button, To get non up to date drawings listed press Display> Invert button after Filler> Up to date.

The unedited brace drawings were created with only the predefined drawing attributes. They will be complete right after updating, since they are simply recreated using their own attributes.

I

To update drawings:

Update edited brace drawing

I.

Select all the HSS BRACE drawings from the list.

2.

Click Update.

3.

Open the unedited drawing to see that it is ok

We will next update the manually edited brace thawing. 1.

Select the edited HSS BRACE drawing from the list.

2.

Click Update.

3.

Open the drawing and notice that the dimensions that we added were automatically updated because the associative symbols were located on the comers of the knife plate.

I 7-18

TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation

qt5

=

(N/S

=-=

4.

There will also be magenta clouds shown around all the changes that were made. These are for your information only will not print on the drawings. You can add clouds manually using the Draw cloud tool.

5.

You can also remove all the magenta clouds by running the remove clouds macro from the Tools> Macros merni. Remember to add a revision to drawings that have been updated or changed after you have released drawings for the contract.

‘I,

V

Copyright © 2007 TakIa Corporntian

Another way to avoid repetitive editing is to use cloning for similar items. This allows user to copy the dimension and editing from one item onto a similar item. Further information on this is available in the help flies or on the Tekla Extranet

TEKLAS1RUCTURES 130 BAsrc T[NlNG Assembly and Single Pad Drawings

7-19

“I 7-20

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Past Drawings

CopyTigI2O7TedaCajioron

e*e

TEKLA

General Arrangement Drawings


P

n

Contents

8

General Arrangement Drawings 8.1

8.2

8,3

Copyright@2001 Tekla Corporation

.1

Creating General Arrangement Drawings Create an Anchor Bolt Plan Create General Arrangement Drawing Modifying GA Drawings Modify drawing properties Modify view properties Modify object properties Drawing Objects Create Drawing Objects

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING General Anangement Drawings

2 3 S 12 12 14 16 17 17

8—Ui

r If,

p 8-iv

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.DBASICTR4NjNG


CopyrIgI4ø2OO7TddaCaraIjcn

U.:

i:wøir r


In this lesson

We will introduce the creation of general arrangement drawings in Tekla Structures. We will first create an example drawing from the BasicModelCombined model (see the picture below presenting the steel frame). We will also introduce the various levels of editing the drawings and study the drawing objects and layout We will learn how to: •

Make 3D Views, Plans, Elevations and Sections

•

Use Filters

•

Add drawing objects

CopSitl 2007 Tdda Corporaan

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING


8-1

8.1

Creating General Arrangement Drawings

r

We will now innduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing BasicModelCombined model.

of the

Tekla Structures can be used to create general arrangement (GA) drawings which are also known as Erection plans or E-Sheets. GA drawings can contain several views, which can include the whole model or any part of it. With the GA drawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans, as well as details from views in the model. You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) with the following options: •

Create one drawing for each selected view

•

Add all selected views to one drawing

•

Create an empty thawing

You can create an empty drawing and add named model views to the thawing in the Drawing Editor. The views must exist but they do not necessarily have to be open. / —

You cannot modii the appearance. such as the viewing angle, of model views in the Drawing Editor. Therefore, check and modi& the appearance of model views in the Model Editor before creating GA drawings. For example, check that the plan views are really 2D views, and rotate the rendered 3D views the way you want them to be shown in the drawing.

In the example below, we will create a general arrangement drawing from BasicModelcombined by including several named model views in the drawing. / —

You do not need to number the model, or update numbering to create or open general arrangement drawings.

I 8—2

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

Copyright @2007 Tekla corporation

Create an Anchor Bolt Plan The anchor bolt plan would typically bbe created as soon as the bases were modelled in order to speed the construction process along but as we are just starting to learn about creating drawings in Tekla Structures, we will handle this now. To create an Anchor Plan: Open the Pian View at the base level

I.

Select and move views between the lists to control visibility To select multiple views. hold down ctrl -key while selecting Named views: EMVMIDtT ZL!WJIDtT ZL!tYAIIZN LZVATION

Vistle views: CM DN ON ON

PIZ C 3flD D ID C-RID

—1 In.

flT

PLAN AT EL tLAN AT PLAN AT

3d

it

0”

—

[

Delete

PL.N AT

4

IOKJ

You don’t need to have the view open in order to make the General Arrangement Drawing but it does let you check that the result will be close to what you are expecting. 2.

Go to Drawing> General Arrangement Drawing

Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporaton

TEKLASTRucTIJRES 130 BASIc TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

8-3

i Create general arrangement drawing ELIVAI Icti ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION

ow n:• ON ON ON ON ON ON

3 Sf1?

OID UD flED oai: flID fiT)

r

7—i

a S C E F

1 ‘VtT7ON

Ax 1L LAN PLAN PLAN LMT

0,’—i EL 12—7”i/2 EL. 23—C’ EL. 24’-T’ EL. 44-0’

Al Al AT Al

0 ptioris All selected views to one drawkg % jrorawrng procertieJ Open drawin3

7

Create

Cancel

Choose Anchor Plan wloetaüs and click Load

3.

l

General arrangement drawing properties Save

]

FiNarne: Title:

AnchorPlan_w-Details

Load

-.

t

IL

AnchorPlarr_w-Details

A&I

F

ANCHUR BOLT PLAN You can select the scale of the drawing before creation.

-

Click an the View... button and load the desired scale.

4.

Click OK

5.

Now check the Open Drawing box and click Create

z

:

/

TEKLASTRuCTIJRES 130 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangerncnt Drawings

-,

-—

—

1

1

F

/

8-4

J

Save as

:

-,

j

-=.

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporalion

________

Your output may differ from what is shown above depending on how the view looked on the model when you created the drawing. Remember you can alter the drawing output automatically by adjusting the scale or other parameters to get exactly what you want to see.

Create a Single View GA Drawing Open the Plan at 24U Level View

1.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

E

D

g :4’

2.

3.

Go to the Drawing menu and select General Arrangement Drawing

Highlight the Plan at El. 24 -0’

1

Create general arrangement drawing Views

EL!VAIIQN ZN 2A12 2 EIZVAIIDU ON ID Z ELEVAIION ON ID F PHASE t STAn ET5VAITDN LAN AT EL 0’ L?JI Al !L. o—i PLAN Al 1 12—71/2 rZLrN LL.—a.,.4-3-n.Jk.-_,

I

a; ci :a. ii’ PLAN PLAN PLAN ThUS

--

I

Oions All sected views to or drawing

U

Open drawing

L Create J

Copyright © 2007 Tokra Corporation

I

Al EL 60-10” A EL. 65-8” Al EL. E€’-S” tLAN ON OOF BRACIU

HI

Drawig pro

Ij

[__Cancel

TEKIA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TkINrNG General Arrangement Drawings

8-5

c ni

Cn

-g

C-,

-4

‘a

C,

z

C,

C -

-

Co OD

C,

0 -l ‘-3

CD

C)

0

CD

B

CD

Sm

a

n

a

St a a

—

‘I

a

n

I

H I—il

1*il

a

C,

‘C

a

0

I

> •a ‘C

-CI

0

C

0

Ha Ea

(—I

U

is

I. I’9

I

V

a-

0

r

a’

-u

1

1 Z

I-I IS-I

i is-I

i

Ia.

NN

ii

a

3

(p

a

g

0,

NN

13

131

zJLJH

III

3I-o I RI

-Iis-i

DIIzI StIl

II

m

Il

a

0

NN

0

3

(P

Ln

NNN

N

:3

0

a C,

0

-o

—

ci irn

(0

a

3-

0 -

a

-

(0 3

0

½

2 3 a 3 r—.

Ia 1
1(0

N

a’

r

a

II(0 —

a

a a a

o

a z o a, a

aSt a

a

r a

—

co•

a

3

0

a

(P

-

-

3

C

0

0

C

•

(p

3

Dc

F’,

r

0

z

-v

•(

=

-l

I’,

a 3 a

1

3

0,

0; 3

-D

0.

r 0 a

-C C,

a

U,

a

I

a

CD

a cm

n

0

cap,

0. (0

10

to —ø

7.

Click OK then OK again at the General Arrangement Dialog Box

8.

Check the Open Drawing Box and click Create

Open&ag

k

cxeate

Create a Multiple View GA Drawing We will now repeat almost exactly the same process in order to make more erection plans and details. To create a GA drawing that contains selected views, e.g. 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A, from BasicModelCombined:

C

I.

Run numbering Tools> Numbering

Copyright © 2007 Tokla Corporation

>

Full to make sw-e your part marks are up to date. TEKLASWUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement DrawIngs

8-7

2. 3.

SeLect Drawing

>

General arrangement drawing... from the menu.

Select the 3d, GRID 4 and

GRID

A

views

in

the Create general arrangement drawing diaiog box. Then select the option All selected views to one drawing.

Create general arrangement drawing Views a ELfl’ATICN ON ;aID EIEVTIOt OH Zfl ELE’’ATTOtI ON ID flEVATION ON GRID

I 2 3 4 !L!VATIOtTDNIO 3 ELEVATION ON QID ELEVATION ON saio 7 £LEl/ATION UN GRID A fl!VarIDNONtID ZLZVATID)T ON 2L1D C ZLZVATIDN ON LID 0

!LZVAJ lot ctt;ato EL!]A1ION Ct GaID F

Opliors AU selected ews to or thawing v

I[Dra operties...

Open drawing

[

Create

‘I,

V

Cancel

You can select multiple views (or toggle the selection) in the dialog box above by holding down the Ctrl key and picking each view separately. GA drawing views are automatically labeled with the current view name. With the One drawing per view option you can select all the plan views in the dialog box, and create separate drawings with predefined drawing properties all at once.

Define drawing properties

8•8

To define the properties of the GA drawing: Click the Drawing properties... button to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

2.

Select standard settings from the option mlu and click Load.

3.

Give the drawing a distinctive name in the Name field, e.g. STEEL FRAME ELEVATIONS

TEKLA STRUCTURES 1300ASIC TRAINING General Anangementi Drawings

Copyright® 2007 Tekla corprnatior

General arrangement drawing pFoperties ISae

J

9 Name: 9TiUe:

standard

l_d

Save as

V

standard

IsTEFME 1

Views Layout..

,j oil

ii

View.

E

I

Detail view

Dimensions

Dimension

9

DnensiotJj

Marks

9 9

j Surface treatment mark,,, j Part mark...

0 9

Soil mark...

Connection mark.

9 0

Neighbor part mark.,, [Jorcement

marks...

Dbects

0

0 I 9[

Pa’t. Surtace treatnrt..

0

erence

Rot..

We

obiectsj

0 9

eighr part. R&docanert..

Grid...

Others

9 9 K

4. 5.

oil

Pro4ecbcqi... [ser-deIioedtribtes...

F1iet,.

0 lNe4Ptt1...

I i..i!I.irIy

j

Get

J UirJ [

Cancel

ClicIc the View... button to open the General -view properties dialog box. On the Attributes tab, change the drawing scale to something suitable and click OK to apply the scale and close the dialog box.

CopflMC 2007 T&a Cerporaan

TEKLA S1RUCI1JRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

8-9

_

General

-

view properties

Save

Scei

Load

Attributes

Shortening

Label

[

V

[i

1 20.OOQO 0”

View extension for neighbor parts:

No

v

Show openirshecess symbol

No

V

Datum poirl foi elevations:

Specthed

EReflected view

Datum level:

OK

[

e

I

1 Anchor boll plan

Scale:

6.

it

Saveas

V

0’

Apply

IIJr,

lW/rh

i

Cancel

3

Now click the Filter button and go to the Parts tab and complete the dialog as shown below. General -filter properties Save

H

v

Load

[

saveasi’

Dbjects (other than component obiectsl Coruiect’n oects

Nutnbets

Parts

Ccwnporients Raci-j bats

Filter by

Not

Filter

Usec attributes.

string

Pact

E LI LI LI LI

lEName UClass

LI Profile LIMatesis

LI Finish

8-10

jJ

Apply

II

—

Seccndaty

Secondaty / Mai’ pads

OK

NUTWASHEHANCH0RJ0ISTSLABU

]

I

SeL]

lw/ri

Cancel

7.

Click OK

8.

In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box save the selected drawing properties with a unique file manse, e.g. steelframe, by typing the file name and then clicking the Save as button.

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

CopyrigFct 2007 Tekla corporation

1I

General drrangement drawing properties Save

J

A

‘IHs

Load__1 SteeL Frame

J

SteeL Frame

Drawing property tiles steeltrame gd and steelframe.gd.more are created .ABasicModelCombinedattñbutes folder.

in

the

Name Steel_Frame.gd SteeF_Frane.;d more

9.

Click OK to apply the selected GA drawing settings and to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

For more information on drawing properties, see Help: Drawing> Drawing properties. Create and open the GA drawing

To create and open the GA drawing: I.

Select the Open drawing checkbox in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to have Tekia Structures automatically open the drawing. Options All selected vievs to one drawing v j[brawinc properties.

If?ippen drawing LDee h..

LE

2,

Click Create.

3.

Check that the created GA drawing is as shown below.

Copyright © 2007 Tokln Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

8-11

All of the views in the GA drawing will be created according to the same GA drawing properties you applied. If some views need different properties, you have to modify the view properties afterwards in the Drawing Editor.

/ —

You can first define the GA drawing properties by selecting Properties > General arrangement drawing... from the menu, and then load and apply the desired properties. After that open the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to create the GA drawing with the selected views.

8.2 Modifying GA Drawings You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: •

Drawing properties

•

View properties

•

Object properties

For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see the following help files: Help: Drawing> Entroduction to drawings> Three levels of editing drawings Help: Drawing> Drawing properties

Modify drawing properties At the highest level, you can change the drawing properties which affect all of the objects in the drawing. Modify parts color on drawing level

To change the GA drawing properties, e.g. the color of parts, in the Drawing Editor: -

I.

Open the drawing and press the ‘B’ key to toggle the drawing between all black lines and colored lines

2.

Select Properties> Drawing... on the menu or double-click on the drawing to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

3.

Click the Part., button to open the General part properties dialog box.

4.

Select the Appearance tab.

5.

Change the Color of Visible lines, e.g., to green. Check and see that the checkbox is marked with a tick.

-

0 8-12

TEKtA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

Copyright © 2007 Teicia Corporaton

Gr,oe,,aI

-

Save

part properties Load

J

>

elandard

Savea,

B

.1:!

.

1 L_L

Vise tnt,

IRcolc Type.

•1

Hidden line,. Center line

E Color

V

i

Reference h’ies

El Color El Type

JLMfl 1ETr1L

InK 6. Change grid visibility of many GA drawings

v,

LZZZ

c

1

Click Modify and OK.

If you had made more than one drawing you can simu]taneously change the drawing properties, e.g. grid visibility, of more than one GA drawing: I.

Open the drawing list in the Model Editor.

2.

Select two GA drawings in the drawing list by holding down the CM key.

3.

Right-click to open the pop-up menu.

4,

Select Properties.., or press Alt+Enter as shortcut tn open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

T9pe Mark

Name

Title 1

———

0

Title

_QIIa.iwI

[2]

El

Open

C’4O

Properbes...

Alt’+€nter

Ljser’defined atb’ibr,jtes... Alt+LI

Revrsion.,. 5.

Click the Odd... buttoc to open the General grid properties dialog box. -

Oed,

E ‘

E E

I I [

Pan. SurFace trealment. flelerence oble_?j

El El

E E

BoiL Weld.

Srid

Neighbor parr

Lf&nborcenlent.._.,,J

II

6.

Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes.

7.

Change the grid visibility to Not visible.

Copyright © 20W Tekla Corporation

[

TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TJNING General Arrangement Drawings

8-13

Lii! General

-

(5i1

grid properties PCsIaed v

Save as v

NcRble Text pacing • •,,,

• • • •

-1)2

Grid line

Text

Hetcjhl.

3/16

Anal

[LJ[ j[JfrjrI[

c

8.

Click Modify and OK

9.

Click OK to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

10. Open the modified drawings one at a time to check that the changes were can’ied out correctly.

Whenever possible, you should modi’ drawings by changing the drawing properties. These modifications also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change.

Modify view properties The second level is to edit the view level, where you modil3’ the selected drawing’s view. Modify properties of selected view

To hide the dashed hidden lines of parts in the 3D view of the G [I] drawing:

1.

Double-cltck on the border around the 3D VIEW drawing view to open the View properties dialog box.

Show hidden lines of parts

2.

Click the Part., button to open the View part properties dialog box.

3.

Select the Content tab.

4.

Click the On/Off button to clear the checkhoxes.

5.

Turn the Hidden lines option back on. Check that the checkbox is marked with a tick.

8-14

TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.0 BASIC TR[NING General Arrangement Drawings

Copyright 02007 Tekla corporation

,

Vkw part properties

..9I

‘ENG,,conc -

Content

Appearance

P& lwese

Saveas

Fill rltil°n .r,ee

Eel

El El

-

22?LI

V

El Inner contoups:

orJoIl

Center me Beam Main part

El

Sec pal

E o&oft

floienhddenb,es.

251S4

Sjgrto: &fset

Plate

Relerence Hp,: Beam

El

Polygon

El C

El El

Main part Sec pa:

El El

Plate

Polygon

LIE CE

AddthonM maiks

Li Orserpialion ,nsks: Q Ca,necimg side mapics

]I

{OK

Change part mark content

Apply

El o-c/cit

El on/oil

,j

Modify

Jj

Get

—’ 11 ][fjL

Cancel

6.

Click Modify and OK.

7.

Click the Part mark.., button to open the View part mark properties dialog box.

Patmar

El

8.

I Sustace treatment

ii

El{ Boltmark E [onnection mark...

El

L Neighbor pail mark..

El

lorcemanl marks,

On the Content tab, remove the <> and the frame around it from the Elements in mark list for the main pafls, and add Profile to the list.

—

M’ car vSthIe elem.,t Pal pmit’a Protile Maiwial Name Class Finish Sire Length Camber

•aKasdelenenls

ENrneiism resaik ((s’ls”e)>

Owe EI2E

V

Color:

V

r, Ps,V5

Face dieci a’ Gsce ol nstatk’o C Cere’<:-cfle &‘a, Test

He9sr Fat

3i32

[s

User-detired atlribete

9.

Click Modify and OK

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporatror

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangemerrt Drawings

8-15

The 3D View will now Jock much cleaner.

Modify how Items are represented

To change how items are represented in a view, adjust the Part Representation Properties 1.

Double-click on the Elevation on Grid A view border.

2.

Select the Part... button

3.

On the Content tab, change Part Representation to Outline hhjj

4.

Click Apply then Modify

The result should lock like this.

Modify object properties The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level, where you change individual objects in the drawing. Modify frame and leader line of a single part mark

8-16

To change the properties of a single part mark: 1.

In the GRID A view, double-click on the part mark of one of the I-JSS profile diagonal braces to open the Part mark properties dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TINrNG General Arrangement Drawings


2.

On the General tab, change the frame and leader line types as shon below.

EEl []

standard

standard

V

Caiera 6r& F,a,no around mark -

Tve

;DCoIoc

—

V

Loader line Typt

V

LI knn

V

3.

Click Modify and OK The part mark should now look like the following.

N

8.3 Drawing Objects In Tekia Structures, the term drawing object refers to lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, poly lines, polygons, clouds, symbols, text, DWG/DXF files, marks and dimejsions. There are three ways to add dimensions to GA drawings: manually, semi-automatically, and automatically (parts and gridlines). In addition. you may want to include additional drawing objects for temporary and/or revision-related information, e.g. clouds and text. For more information, see Help: Drawing

>

Editing drawings.

Create Drawing Objects In the G [11 drawing, we will manually dimension the location of the diagonal bracing connection and add a cloud and a note text to the connection. Create manual dimensions

To add manual Y-dimensions to the diagonal bracing connection (on gridline 3) in the GRID A view: I.

Set the snap settings on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar as shown below.

1 2.

Copight

S.:

Auto

vj

To enable the tentative snap, which helps with the selecting of points, check that the Xsnap is set on in the Setup menu.

a 2007 Tekla Corporatror

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

8-17

E

Xsnap Smeri5eec

S

Drac and drop

D

Middle button

U

pen

Shift—M

3.

Click the Create y dimension icon on the Drawings: Dimension toolbar.

4.

Snap. first, to the mid point of the connection created between the four diagonal braces. and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID 40. Move the corsor to the left side of GRID 3 to select the location of the dimension line. End the command with the middle mouse button.

S.

Snap again to the center point of the connection and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID 44-0. select the dimension line location and click the middle mouse button.

6.

Select both dimensions (by holding down the CtrI key). right-click and select Combine dimension lines on the pop-up menu. The separate dimension lines are now combined to one dimension line. Select the dimension line and move it to the correct location by dragging with the mouse.

C

Add / remove dimension point combine dimeniiion lines Remove dimension point Set dimension zero point

You should now have the vertical location of the diagonal brace connection shown in the GRID A view (see the figure below).

I 8-18

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAINING General Arrangement Orawings

cop i 0 uation 1 gbt © 2007 reNa Cor

Semi-automatic dimensions

A special dimensioning type is available in Tekla Structures for semi-automatic general arrangement dimensioning. It contains several dimensioning oplions: • • • The

Which points and parts Tekla Smoctures dimensions How the dimensions are combined Whether the reference line or center line of the part is used as a dimension point primary steps are as follows: Open a general arrangement drawing.

Automatic dimensions

2.

Click Setup> GA dimensioning....

3.

Set the properties.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Select the objects you want to dimension.

6.

Create dimensions using the commands in the Create menu: Create> Dimension> Parts X, Parts Y, or Parts XY.

You can automatical]y add dimensions to grids or parts, or both, using the General dimensioning properties dialog box.

—

To open the General dimensioning properties dialog box, navigate to General arrangement drawing... in the Properties menu and click the Dimensioning.., button. —

Copyright 0) 200T TakIa Corporaton

TEKLASTRucTURrS 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Anangement Drawings

8-19

t Ge.e.al

dl

alien.

i,ujil

Loan

J

W OIl)F ojwelie.

ØO.&ne

£1

lr&

sraL;nE

H L

J

ltaida.d

Layoul

13)

View

IH I

Dienanniieg.

I H

fl

,lata.d

Detail view

-

Dinem,onr

1

HI

D.enn&

The grid tab, allows you to turn on rn-id ]ine and/or overall dimensions as well as how they are placed, i.e. left, right, above, below, and etc. ‘

General

dine., oloning ‘lollerlirs

Lve J God

LI

PCsierdaId

PatIo

Orrenoet, cle&l

S Gad hr.. dir.,oo,r:

Oil

0 On..aI d.a,r,rjon:

Oil

Di,rtroin

V

00000.nr

9 Na,zo.vai

Left

lEvelcal

Annie

The pans tab allows you to define the maximum leader line length, maximum number of outside dimensions and the object groups to be dimensioned.

I Gad

I

Load

_pc_,4a,d

Ls’ as

Parl’

M,.n,ait hadeeft,. lfldi

5 Ouloda dma,ooa, 0 rode &r,,nse.,,

Or’ ‘

Sled.de pails eel ‘nIcely ci

5M.aeanro.th.ieloul,ided.ne’,n’s Ot,Cl

-

I

&raran,c de.

Ur,ecJ

ftelc*rç

i4cazaaS yenta,

Beat

Ere

tzedlo

OK

J[

cer

I[M.av

postal

I__________

n..eeni Celhbineioo,th

Gd

II

Ea’,rei

I

For a more in depth discussion, see Help: What’s New > What’s New in Steel Detailing> Faster drawing production > General arrangement drawings > Automatic Dimensioning of general arrangement drawings Create a cloud

To add a cloud and a note text to the GRID A view: I.

Click the Snap to any position icon on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar,

4 4 8-20

1’EKtA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Anangement Drawings

Auto

v

Copyright 02007 Tekla Corporation

fl

Create a text note for the cloud

2.

Click the Draw cloud icon on the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

3.

Pick points for the cloud position around the diagonal bracing cor.nection on gridline 3. End the selection with the middle mouse button.

I.

Select Properties> Text... to open the Text properties dialog box.

2.

Select the standard settings from the option menu and click Load.

3.

Change the text properties and frame as shown below and click Apply and OK.

• standaid

standard

Appeai&te Text ElTe*

HOLD

Ecoloi:

i

EHe4t

3)32

121

Aria!

Font:

E4rgl

El

Alignmenl:

O•cxE

Lelt

it

Fiame

Arrow

El Type: Leader bie:

(

23

it

-

‘I.

ECdm

H

Type:

El El

it

5/64 3)128

P!acng

EJ [OK

1I


LFLEM

canceij

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC 1RtINING


6-21

4.

Click the Create text with leader line icon in the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

r 5.

First, pick an edge of the cloud as the origin of the leader line and then another point to place the text.

The GRID A view should now look like the figure sho below:

V l24Af!

a V24X5

6.

-

Select File> Close drawing and click Save in the Question dialog box.

t\c

0 a J

p

-

yJ

-

ue N O

-

/

8-22

TERLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC 1R’JNING General Anangement Drawings


‘S

TEKLA

Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering


Contents

9

Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering 9.1

9.2

9.3

Copyright @2007 Tekta Corporatimi

Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering in General Multi-Drawing properties Options for creating multi-drawings Multi-numbering setup Creating Multi-drawings Create Multi-Drawings Manually Create Multi-Drawings Automatically Updating and Revisions Updating multi-drawings Revision control

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi.Drawings and Multi-Numbering

.1 2 4 4 5 6 6 11 13 13 14

9-ui

9-iv

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING MultiDrawings and MultiNumbering

Copyright@27 TeIdaC&pccahion

1

Ufr1


In this lesson

Ti

Multi-Drawings are defined as drawings that contain a number of individual items collected together onto one large sheet. Those items may all have something in common or may be completely random. Multi-Drawings emulate the more traditional output of the pencil and paper draftsman of long ago when it was more practical to draw many items on one sheet. Nowadays, with computers being as fast as they are and printers and copier paper being as inexpensive as they are it is actually quicker and easier to produce details on individual sheets rather than take the extra step and collect these details onto large and cumbersome multi sheets. Detailing time can be saved considerably if multi-sheets are no longer required. Multi-Numbering refers to the system of applying marks to items in such a way that the item can be tracked to the multi-sheet it appears upon. Tekla offers countless multi-numbering capabilities so there is sure to be one system that will suit your requirements We will learn about the creation and use of muti-drawings and explain the principles of multi-numbering. We will also handle the updating of multi-drawings and revision control. We will learn how to •

Create multi drawings manually, controlling which items go on which sheet

•

Create multi drawings automatically by allowing the system to decide placement

•

Customize numbering setups to create simple or complex multi-numbering

•

Handle revision on multi-drawings

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

9-1

9.1

Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering in General Multi-drawings are used to gather assembly and/or single part drawings onto a single sheet, be]ow are some examples: •

You want all the assemblies on same size drawing sheet. Some assemblies might need a larger (D or 24x36) sheet, but others might require less space (B or 17x1 I). When using multi-drawings you can link as many assemblies as will fit on one larger sheet.

.rJ

9-2

•

Assembly or single part drawings can also be linked to a multi-drawing with or without a layout. If they are inked with a layout, each assembly can have its own separate Bill of Material.

•

You want all of the single part drawings of plates with the same thicloiess gathered onto one sheet.

TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering


•

If you need to have the sheet number included as part of the assembly and/or part mark, you can use mu]ti-numbering. The only way to achieve this is to add the assembly and/or single part drawings to a multi-drawing.

L

F

U

Ciwied O9FI9?2t lt/I9/2a)5 119/2B o.i1StOJ CA/IS/ItS C5113/2CCA L/13,2C]I5

CSfl*ZDJS

Mod(sd 0]10O1 U&1iOX fl{]1LO[

COI0 tUfl 09,15/105 09,19,205

SLZ,

a3’42W ew42Iy S3/4’zu F3Jr?V fl/Cfl fl/C??

le A A A A

A A

£1/2

ri?

N

I.loik ]C]] IC.?] IC.?] IC ‘I CE] CS]

C

121

No.,. COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN COLLIflI OLLOYk io

I

DonOa A’

I EiirLJ

S.C,4__I

I

Sd.clr.t

I

or

102

II

los,.

l

Copysight © 2007 Tokla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi.Numbming

9-3

Multi-Drawing properties

[

Save__J

Load

standard

Layout

1

Protection

I

v [vi] standard

101

lJName Title:

Vews

Others

El

P

Apply

El

I

JflJpet

Liser-delined attribules

JIF/r]I

canceiJ

Name: can be used to define the content of the drawing. The name field will be shown on the drawing list. For multi-numbering the Name: field will correspond as the multi-drawing number and depending on the multi-number setup it will be added to assembly and or part 1 mark e.g. Name: 101 Assembly mark 10131. To get information on common drawing properties see: -

Help: Drawing> Drawing properties> Common drawing properties

Options for creating multi-drawings You can link or copy assembly/single part drawing views with or without layout to the multi drawing. The difference between link and copy is that with copy the connection to original drawing is broken, where as with link the connection to update information from the original is kept. 1.

You can create empty mu]ti-drawings and then link or copy assembly or single part drawings interactively. This option is a little bit laborious but you can optimize the use of paper.

2.

You can create multi-drawings automatically from selected assembly or single part drawings. Just select all the assembly drawings you want to link to multi sheets in the drawings list, and Tekla Structures will link as many assembblsingle part drawings to one sheet as will fit and then create another multi-drawing and continue the linking procedure. This is an easy way of creating gather sheets.

3.

It is also possible with one command to create assembly or single part drawings and then multi-drawings from these drawings. This option isnt recommended because you cant use specific settings for different types of drawings.

For more information, see: Help: Drawing drawing.

9-4

>

Getting Started With Drawings

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAINING

MuIti.Dmwings and Multi-Numbering

>

Drawing Reference> Multi-

copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation

Multi-numbering setup Setting up any type of multi-numbering involves making changes to the batch files. The batch files contain most of the default settings in Tekia Structures and users can potentially cause considerable problems by editing these files. Always make a copy of any batch file before changing any setting.

•

Tekla recommends using the Tools Advanced Options menu function to change these settings so that the default settings remain consistent. —

Further information is available in the help files, on the extranet and by attending an advanced training course. In a case where your fabricator wants multi-numbers for assemblies and/or parts those drawings need to be linked to multi-drawings. Multi-numbers are assigned according to the following batch file settings. The following lines in the batch file affect numbering: rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem

set set set set set set set set set set set set set set

MS MODEL PREFIX INFLUENCES MULTI NUMBERING F0R= XSUSEMULTINOThIBERNGFOR= MS USE NUMERIC MULTI NUMBERS FCR= MS USE MODEL PREFIX 11* MULTI NUERS FOR= XS USE ASSEMBLY NUMBER 303= XSSWITCF{MULTINtJMEERSFOR= XS VALID CHARS OR ASSEMBLY MULTI NUMBERS XS VALID CHARS FOR PART MULTI NUO4BERS= XS MIN NUMBER OF ASSEMBLY MULTI CHARACTERS= MS MEN NUMBER OF PART MULTI CHARACTERSXS ALLOW CR.AWNG TO MANY MULTI DRAWINGSXSSWITCEPOSJcUMBERSJOR= XS PART MULTI NUMBER FORMAT STRINGXSASSEYMULTTNUMBERPORY,ATSTRING—

Using these variables we can get following types of multi-numbers: E.g. assemblies; AlOl,

P101,

0101,

LOLA,

biB,

10W,

-.

IO1BI,

10132,

10183,

bid,

01C2,

1B1C1,

23101,

38101,

10101,

21101,

1O1BA,

10183,

IO1EC,

101A,

101CR,

ABIO1,

BB101,

15101,

ACId,

5C101,

, 2 lOlp

OCIO1,

E.g. parts; alOl,

blOl,

clOl,

lOla,

bib,

lOlc,

lOlal,

101a2,

101a3,

lOlpl,

lelOl,

2e0,

3ab0,,

idol,

2,101,

IOlaa,

boleb,

101st,

iCipa,

bO:pb,

aalOl,

ablOl,

aclOl,

palOl,

pblO.,

/ ,

If you work for many fabricators and you need to define different numbering setups for each one you can create multiple batch files. See the help files for further information. Help: System

Copyiight @2007 Tekls Corporalion

ccl CI,_.

>

Files and Folders> Startup batch file

TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING MuIti.Drawingc and MisItI.NumbeHng

9-5

Don’t change the numbering setup after linking assembly or single part drawings to multi-drawings. This v.111 cause the loss of all drawings which have a multi-number assigned.

A 9.2

Creating Multi-drawings All the necessary editing should be done in the assembly or single part drawings. The multidrawing isjust intended for use as a gathering sheet. We will create multi-drawings using methods I and 2 described under Options for creating multi-drawings. We will use assembly and single part drawings created previously. If you need multi-numbers you need to edit the batch file and restart Tekla Structures. Also if you want multi-numbers applied to secondary parts, you need to remember to include the single part views in the assembly drawings.

Create Multi-Drawings Manually Create empty multi drawing

I.

Set multi-drawing properties (Properties

2.

Load Multi-Drawings setting from the top of the dialog.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create an empty multi-drawing (Drawing

IIir-ain

Properlies

Setup

T3o

j Ust..

>

>

Multi-drawing..,).

Multi-drawing > Multi-drawing).

tnque

r

Qii-L

ttj V’hzard...

Ctil-’W

Sngle-pait drawing l Assembly drawing General arrangement drawing...

!:

1I

Muki-dm*i

FkbâaMng

Cknedrawg...

Selected dingo

Ctd—D

S4,rtd cnMrr wfth Iavro U

You shou]d be able to see that there is new drawing on the list M, [Jj, Title I.

1iE 0

0 p4.,...h 0

—

S..ch

o—.u.

j

—

C..Md

W4d

6 T

Mu.

Ha

O4//2 D4’2W1 4//Z C4’2/Z 04/2W. 04/20/2.. 04/26/2..

40u--

e91r15.

A

0O’t.-

1/1U

A

JJHN CLtL%

Sifl,t 500& IO 204422 //0

fl r4/2D I€1’D Ir,/29&. I/2l&

A

‘I 2i W

A

PZ1

A A A

0.61 IOu

.Re

.

-

On

.

45

LS ZaIh*4

01UMN

ø.

J!J L!r_ Sded.d

-

40104.M

lUPj 6fl -

L444

COLUMN

m I

DEl

9-6

Lfi- ._2!!i!J

TEKLASTRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING


—

J(N,we .‘

Cop r 5 ight 0 2007 Tekla Corporation

If you know you are going to be creating multi drawings for any cotfiract riaht from the outset, you are advised to use one of the ‘US Wizard’ settings to make the original drawings then linking these views with the layout onto the multi sheets. This ensures that all similarly scaled items are maintained at a similar scale on the multi-sheet.

/ —

Q Link assembly drawings to multidrawings

1.

Open the multi-drawing.

2.

Highlight the first 4 beam assembly drawings.

t

ooiiiII%I

444, —

.—. .—

—

LEJ Q H,&od

C,ed.d

Re,,,,

I_0c!

co.oc4

— A_.o,

Flu,

—

Type M H I’

So. 3w2

‘°‘_.

5—..——, ho

I sb—i tHod,I

T4I25/2 04120/2 04/20/2 20)2012

1/115

n4126/L ocIsoIu. wJ/u0Iu.

-.

e4ns/Z

A

101/710’

A

‘)25B’ O’lfl’O’. 25’fl I 01/21 2 ri.r’

w

04)24/2

04)20)2 00/24/2

34/IWO

‘ri’-’Du

01/210 16/210

iro-ir

20)20)2 C4,2$IZ C”26)2 04)23.2 04/26/2

A A A A A A A A A A 4 A

-

,4,nns161/215 IWiIDTO W 120W

m,t

is-SI

06*4

[B.SI

00*4

[0.?] ]0 0] 3: R.1 r.1: EIZ B.OZ [0.04] 2:5o =6I

0EPJ4 66*1 00*4 BENd OLw4 001’4 01*4 00344 00kM 00A4/

r’ZI 09 lB/Il

ocAW

Lef[!’!J

By B.’,

P

Lock

FiTfl I_JLJ F...

I

,,

L................

Fri

-

00*’ BUMA

50 O,ooeoc 4/md. 4

3. Hold the cursor over the highlighted drawings right-click and select Link drawing views. Ct —D

Ore P’-ope’tes... .secened

At—E,t€r

et,o..tes.

-

C,: Copy drawIng views [ink draadlng views Copy drawing viens with layout Link drawing views with !eyout AFi

In the multi-drawing, you will see the 4 draxngs being linked to the multi-drawing, one on top of the other. If you are using multi-numbering you can see the assembly marks changing on the drawing list, according to your numbering setup e.g. 10131, 10132 etc. otherwise, the numbers will remain the same.

Copyrighl © 2007 Tekla Corratioc

TEKLR STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi.Drawings and MultINumbening

9-7

-

Ir

Place views on multi-drawing

—r

To arrange assemblies on the multi-drawing, right click and select Place views.

1.

ER :

:!t_ 2.

To arrange the assemblies interactively:

•

Select outer blue border around an assembly

•

Left pick the border

•

Drag the assembly to the desired location

Your multi-drawing may look something like the one shown below

9-8

TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BAsIC TRAINING Mulu-Drawing, and Multi.Numbering

copyright 0)2007 TekIa Corpora%n

I—

4!

.

r

::!*z±z’tL_1 — — in

Add more assemblies to multi-drawing

3.

Highlight the next four assemblies or. the drawing list and repeat the linking procedure.

4.

After linking, re-arrange the assemblies on the sheet.

H

i

•! J 1 : •

—

-

4

!1

:ni Remove the extra assemblies from the multi-drawing

It seems that we cant fit all the drawings on one sheet. The Bill of Material (top right hand corner) will be expanded and interfere with the beam view when drawing is re-opened. We need to remove some assemblies from the sheet. As long as the drawing has been open all the time you can unlink the assemblies by using undo. If you have already closed and re opened the drawing you can still delete the assembly from the multi-drawing but there may be implications if you have used multi-numbering. See below for thrther information on this. I.

Click the undo button until the automatic and interactive arranging has been undone.

Copyright @ 2D07 Tekla Corporaton

TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINiNG Multi-Drawings and MultiNumbering

9-9

>

C

I,.

I, C)

C)

z z 6)

— 0 a

-

Z

Is> Gt

0

6f

C

ft

Cfl

c.

—

C

0

S

00

p’

-.

o.

0

C.

ft 6

000

z 00 _t,

z0

C 0 ft(

-I

a

! 2.

0

cn C-.. CD Cfl

ft

a:s’

‘

zp

Cl,

2.

0

_a

ft

0

1,

CD C.

—.

Zr

CD

o

2. 5•

4

-

ft

00

0

CD

0-

a

CO

0 0

cI.

C

0

PD.

Cl)

a a

a

C

ft cn 0

ft

PD

0

6)

5-

0

Oft

Co

0.

V CD

00 a

C.,

ft

g

-I)

0

00

S.

PD

a

PD-

0

0-

C

ft

0

0 ft

ZC

Co

‘.

Q

The assembly view title e.g. I BEAM —Marked lOIN can be changed in the Tools Advanced Options: —

set XS ASSEMBLY DRA WING VIEW TJTLE= Take a look at the Tekla Structures help file for more information.

Create Multi-Drawings Automatically Create multidrawing for the column drawings

Until now, we have just accepted the numbers assigned to the assemblies and have not updated them with regard to multi-drawings. Now we will setup some multi-numbering to affect how the columns which are to appear on multi drawings will be numbered. I.

Go to the Tools Menu and select Advanced Options

2.

Select Numbering form the list on the left

3.

Complete the values as shown below. Use all capitals and no spaces. When typing MAIN_PART, remember the underscore between the words.

La rn.Ifl

Senznvar.tS DSi.*a bci,

Na >nAINLJMBEROP*RTMULIICJSMSCTERS

3,rç

O.n-cq

.y,

k.ErrpEstLrs:&yoa9A—r:uE &r.wArsrRt3 X$ZMLT >
Diar5 r,c.i -

Fit ott H.to}otg imoi W,ii

tout Mu,bn ietotrd Wirkat bob Mk..q. E.,it

XSLSSEM9’i€SR.C

>cLULyDcrI_O9FFEOJSyAOLNStEHUJ;o X5J5E5Li’.LIBEtTR _JsEa1jbi IREFNOYa4CtC1OPhWWG_bWS XS_JSE_NuCyL;_SLitREPRJS xs-aIocnsroa_AosEy ‘Movno,TcNalNrrnr

uot,fro POt

S.ie put ,bo ro .areo,btt diawat Spo,dar,d aucirass To to ,d,yob,i, Wddt

•

TRUE CTekJthtrwiosesSiddN13’o’4OsO ASSEMBUE5

ASSEIER_ Es ASSEO. ES .SSE.tNES

boNd how,, a,. .,no% n.jhwb., Ed.,1i,,.,a,*dBEG flyd,tuietend

?ooauod

1

4.

Click OK

5.

Re-Open the model. This is necessary for the program to check and apply the new settings.

6.

Open the drawing list

7.

Select all the column drawings

8.

Right click on the highlighted drawings and link the assemblies to the multi-drawing.


TLKLA sTRucTuRes 13.0 BASIC IRRININO MultiDrawings and Multi-Numbering

9—11

• r—j 1

Sesdn ,n

E Sea-th s.Or C-s c,aieia4i rotle &awige

Al

CieMed

Moeind

Revici

Sirs

Open

CC-I.e

Propertes,

-.

user-detl’ied attibuies.

Tppe Maik II [I.

Wean. (iluIzI—

riod

ulJk’ir-frI lI_IJr.lI I_I

I’ 1 II I

Mt4€nter “It-to

.

/CSQ,

DWSQ

CO I-eli

Pent &awr,..

rsrft-w

E&t. Ddere

Calif

-.

[Ip[

I

si al

I

u_UI I

[CLIJu_Il -

tOLL’S,

Ce’ +A

0.35 ID.21

155 tRotS 155 BCE

ID

HSS SR4CZ

Rai0 IPP7 Geerifl2eneet

ssp;li1

Lick

11111’ I

I

-

34/1)2 34)25/2. 04,25/a. 04;ZkQ 04/25/2... 54/25/2

[ up to dale

Malci

C&14R updaie updaie “Sn R,aea

ii]

I’

..i

(r

o1

oJ( Firers

LI 04 I____ MIJtbóe,ng

1

8

Freeze

StANDARD

Issue CC-Ion

-

Lc- I

Disinter lorsud. 12 soledod

reel-u_v

9.

Notice that the assembly numbers on the columns will change as they are added to the multi-drawings.

10. You should be able to see that Tekla Structures creates a new multi-drawing and then starts linking the assembly drawings to it. Once the first sheet is full, it creates a new multi-drawing and starts the linking procedure again until all of the selected assemblies are linked to multi-drawings si,

Create multidrawings out of the bracing drawings

9-12

Tekla Structures will try to place as many drawings on a multidrawing as possible but often, particularly with complex column drawings this may only be one drawing. For this reason it is sometimes better to manually link the drawings, giving you more control over what assemblies are shown on multi-drawings.

Highlight all the Brace drawings in the drawing lisL 1.

Right-click at the top of se]ected drawings and select: Create Drawings> Multi-drawing > Selected drawings.

TEKLA stRucTuREs 13,0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi.Nunbering

Copyright © 2007 Tekla CorporatIon

n

Create multidrawings out of the single part plate drawings

Highlight the Plate drawings in the drawing list. 2.

Right-click at the top of the selected drawings and select: Create Drawings drawing > Selected drawings. ‘I,

V

>

Multi-

The multi-number is assigned only once. so ifyou assigned the multi-number during the linking of assembly drawings then the number should not be changed again.

rri

9.3

Updating and Revisions For the most part updating and revision conirol is similar to that done in other drawings, so for more information take a look: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings

>

Defining drawing revisions

But because of the linking procedure and multi-numbers thae are a few issues that need a closer look.

Updating multi-drawings Changes to an assembly drawing are not automatically updated in the multi-drawing. Any saved modification to an assembly drawing requires the multi-drawing to be updated. This also means that if something changes in the model. which requires an assembly drawing to be updated, then it will also require the multi-drawing to be updated. In the case where an assembly or single part mark changes so that a new drawing is cloned or needs to be created, the new drawing also needs to be linked to a multi-drawing. If multi-numbering is used modifications that affect numbering might also require re-linking of the assembly drawing. For example, if clip angles change so that they get a completely new number the assembly drawing needs to be deleted from multi-drawing. The assembly drawing must then be re-linked to the multi-drawing for the new- cHp angles to get multinumber. copnight © 2007 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

9-13

Modifying an assembly drawing

Add a typical weld mark to an assembly drawing: /ieø 13 1OCOL 2½ 51,2 C/C

r

1 0 1 a 1 (B/S) 1O1B1

Close and save the drawing. Update multi drawing

You should see that there is flag and a change message in front of the multi-drawing. This means that assembly or single part drawings that have been linked to the multi-drawings have been changed. You now need to update the multi-drawing. Highlight the drawing and click Update. Open the multi-drawing and you should now see the weld mark in the multi-drawing.

Revision control Create revision

If you are sending multi-drawings to your clients then obviously you will need to add a revision mark to the multi-drawing. To add a revision mark: 3.

Highlight the drawing on the list.

4.

Click the Revision.., button.

5.

Add a re’ision mark, date and text to the dialog.

6.

Click Create.

You can see that drawing was marked on the list as having revision A.

9-14

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAINING MuItI’Drawings and Multi’Numbwing

Copyright @ 2007 Tekla CorraIion

flITU I’ll:

Ii [hI

Revision 1

V

[Save as]

Revrsion 1

v

El Date: V

2/15/2304 WeC

teal

52

chsed-Bei 13’Bl

L E

El El

[ Delete

IIeate

j

F

/r

[ Canc&

Open the drawing. You should see that the revision has also been added to you revision block. Weld size changed

-

Seam 10181

Sf1512007

]

DESCRIPTION

REV

DATE

FAB: NAME I

FAB:ADORESS FAB.CITY/STATE DESCR’ION 2ROJECT NAME

BEAM BASIC TRAINING

OAWN 0Y DATEDRAWN

nO ‘lv.

04/26/2007

CR0 No.

TRAINO2

—

10151

Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the same revision information to severai drawings simultaneously, select multip]e drawings from the drawing list.

/

()

Copflbt

@2007 Tekla Corporation

You can Choose whether Tekia Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default, revision numbers are shown. For more information, see the following links: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Working with drawings> Defining drawing revisions Help: System> Files and folders> Startup batch file,

TEKLA STRUCTURCS 13.0 BASIC TININO MuIii.Drawinge and MaIti.Nizmbering

9-15

n

9-16

1EKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TJN[NG Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

Copaight2OO7 TeIdaCaoron

eSe

1EKLA

Drawing Management


N

Contents

10

Drawing Management

.1

10.1

2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 21 23 28 33 35 36 36

10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7

10.8

Copy,ight@ 2007 Tef
Controlling Drawing Revisions Revising General Arrangement Drawings Create revision marks in drawings Handling Revisions to Assembly Drawings Show revision information in a report The Drawing Classifier Modify a drawing using a classifier Cloning Drawings Adding a logo to a drawing template Creating Basic Templates Adding Templates to Layouts Plotting Drawings Exporting Drawings to Other Programs Making PDF Files Sharing Your Entire Model

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

I Oiii

0’ I O-iv

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASiC TRAINING Drawing Management

Cop.ight@O7 TokiaCoiporaxo

I

Drawing Management

In this lesson

In this chapter we will learn further drawing editing and customization tools. Tekia Structures contains a vast array of facilities that allow the user to effectively handle changes to a contract after the drawings have been issued. There are also a collection of tools that allow complete customization of how the drawings look. These topics are covered in more depth dosing advanced training but we can introduce them here and learn some basic functionality. We will introthice How to control and handle revisions to previously issued gena arrangement drawings •

How to handle revisions to assembly drawings The drawing classifier

•

Cloning, as an affective way to minimize repetitive editing

•

How to add a logo to a default template

•

How to make a template and add it to a drawing layout

•

How to plot drawings

Copytight © 2007 Tekta Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TININC

DrawIng Management

10-1

(

10.1 Controlling Drawing Revisions

a

Now we will cover the revision handling features of Tekia Structures. \Vhen the model changes: •

You have to update s revise drawings

•

Attach revision information to the drawings.

Tekia Structures displays the revision information alongside the revision number or the mark in the drawing list and in the revision table within the drawings. The revision table also shows the revision date. You can create a list of revisions in a report. For more information about drawing revisions and creating reports, see the following links: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Working with drawings> Defining drawing revisions Make changes to the model

1.

Modif5’ the model by changing the profile of the columns on gridline A-7 and 3-7 from W16X50 to W16X67.

r

/2

10-2

2.

Number the model—Tools> Numbering> Modified



3.

Open the drawing list. —

Lit’i,_l LI 5•II’ ..c.

Ic.4 ——

•r.

L•d

U,..

r,.4.

,,:,r

A,,, 2v!ca, C?)I2OJ

n.

rr

‘c. C

II:

MI

7TT

mm mm mm I—’

4.

Open the Plan drawing that was created earlier.

AX (N

19’-8

Notice how the columns changed automatically and were updated on the drawing. They are also shown with a magenta cloud. This doesn’t print out and is only there to show the detailer that something has changed. Also note that the beam is highlighted above too. This is because it may have been the same as the other beams on gld.s 5 and 6 before we changed the column depth causing these beams to get slightly shorter.

Revising General Arrangement Drawings Create revision mark

To add a revision mark to a drawing: 1. Select the drawing to revise, right-click and select Revision.., to open the Revision handling dialog box.


TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING

Drawing Management

10-3

Im

F

La

U

C.e,ied

Mome

Re.a,

811

Ste ‘15 828 nlTSQ*

S 332

rS2 828

16Da2s ..

1SJ3?5

ve 3 T

.

:

-

°tt...

[

6 S IL]

I

6

‘I

[iIfi±!J I

r

iwe

j]

1 J

Up to de

Ctfl.F

By pat

Oot. F’zpe4ns Cl, It R

Delete

[“I

115

riper,

Drawnq •

[ZJEIEEI I

Lodc

[1 [_&i]

Freeze Issue Undo Redo

< —

[

ott

open

CtrI+Z

Revision.

-

--

CtrL+V

[yaleni.k;

Ckr.

Lte I

cancel

Enter the revision mark, revision date and description text of the revision in the dialog box as shown below, and click Create.

2.

! Revision handling FcwAppioval

V

Mark

A

Date:

9.30.2006

text

Column Proliles Atei

Save as]

r ‘V

-J

-

--fl

lJ

[ Delete j [ F / F J

[ Create

Cance4

3.

Once the revision is created, a revision number is automatically assigned to the drawing. The revision number is shown in the dialog box.

4.

Check that the revision number is shown in the drawing list.

I

L

F

U

Created 1 SOD 2O(

ModiFied 1503.2005

Revi&on 1

Size 11 52’ 82

Te 6

Mk 131

Nant Steel Fraye

Open the drawing to check that the drawing title and revision table display the revision information correctly.

5.

DIirrrs ProjIe AFFBI&:

REV

DESCRIFTIDN

DATE

EAB NAME F AB AD D RE

SE

FAB-C m-/LS1crE

STEEL FRAME BASIC TRAINING

DESDRIFTIDN

RDEDT &YE

k: —

CLT

DR’Mc

I

O9!292006

‘RAIt C 5 O2

El

0’ 104

TEKLA 5TRuCTURFS 110 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Managem.nt

Copyrigisl © 2007 ToMe

Corporation

A ‘I’

Modify revision information

Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the same revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select multiple drawings from the drawing list. You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default. revision numbers are shown. For more information, see the following links: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> ‘Working with Drawings >Deflning drawing revisions Help: System> Files and folders > Startup batch file.

To modi’ the revision information of an existing revision mark: Right click on the drawing in the drawing list and select Revision. The revision dialog will open and allow you to modi’ or delete any revision marks

V

When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining revision numbers for that drawing.

Create revision marks in drawings We will create revision marks in the drawings to help locate the changes made to the model.

Define revision mark appearance

For more information about creating revision marks in drawings, see Help: Drawing> Editing drawings> Editing drawings reference> Create>Revision mark. To create a revision mark in the drawing: 6.

Select Properties> Revision mark.., from the menu to open the Revision mark properties dialog box.

7.

Select the revision number I in the drop-down box next to the Mark field to obtain the corresponding revision information.

l Revision mark sa,dard Revision

.

[Save as] standard

Appearance

Mark: Date:

E Text: -

El Placfrtg

El

[Pace..]

[P/F] CopyTight © 2007 TekEa Corporation

TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRlNIN0 Drawing Management

10-5

On the Appearance tab, select the Arrow type as shown below, change the Frame color of the revision mark to red and click OK.

8.

Revision mark MipIr

[j

slendard

v

[ Save as]

standard

e

-

.-e Revision Appearance Text Color:

E Height E Font:

Anal

Angle:

0.0000

—zzE1

13/128 [_S&ect.

Arrow

Frame

IEJ Type:

-=1

—.0.

5/64

Leader line:

13/128

OK

9.

j[

Apply

‘I

Type: ,IZD

v• ‘0

Modily

_JIw/rJrnc&__I

Create revision mark in GA drawing

10. Select Create> Revision ma>Arrow on right from the menu and pick a point to place the mark. For example, pick close to the column and its part mark on gridline 7

11. Double-click on the revision mark to obtain its properties. Check that the contents of the revision mark is correct, and its appearance corresponds to the properties set in stepé.

Co

D 01

K” /

Handling Revisions to Assembly Drawings You will notice that once the colunws changed in the model and the numbering was performed that a selection of drawings started to show various flags. ‘IL

10-6

TLKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

Copynghl © 2007 Tekla Corporaton

Up to dale

Changes

C’eaed

UuanlIO3i dec,eased Quariltp dec,eased QuandIp creased Pa,ts modOjed

Rails modified Parts modified Pals Ired Pale rcSed Liked drae.tho chareed

Add a revision mark to the drawings

Revision

MoI,ed

97/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2907 07/11/2007 07/11/200’ 07/01/202 07/11/2007 27,11)2007 27111/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/li /2007 07/11/2007 07)11/2007 07)11/2007 07)11/2007

07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 00/00/0000 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 37/11,2002 00/X07 07/11 i2007 En,00) e3/%/ImJ 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/fl)00W

07/ 1/20fl

rrnrr

Size

lope

Mack

Na,,,

13

A A

[8.10231 )3C2]

A A A A A

(300)

BEAM COLUMN

Ti

0’3/4’20” 0 3/42i3” l3”6’1/2 &‘3/4’20” &‘3/4’20’ 13 0’l ‘2 3r23 1?W 1/2 lrr/2 la-ri,? 13 ‘€“1 /7 1310’ 13’6”1/2 13’81/2 13”$”1/2 13010

A A A A A A A A A

P2001 3.11 API] ID 2001) ID 1999) ID 1008) ID 1007] [0.1009] [0.1095)

COLUMN ‘NOAsS COLUMN COWMN 3ENO OEAV 3 ROTTER I.13ASS ‘NDASS HSS BRAEE BRACE kISS BRACE kISS BRACE HSS BRACE BRACE

, ‘C”l /2

A

RflOR’

0P)A

(PCI C1024( 1C1023l rLS) 91037’ (31

IA

The proarn automatically detects what has changed in the model and cross-references that to the drawing list. Click the Changes column in order to together as shown above.

sort

the drawing list and bring all the changed items

Select each one of the changed drawings and add a revision to the drawing. Wa owe —

j 0 s..tt.

i.bcl&a,..o.d

Lie to dee,

Eha,00,

boded

fl jc.

N

fl A A A fl II

‘l

0117 ‘I ft !!15

.0cc_il

Reawo,

MOOd

.1 “I,,

07.

997

97.

rn

7/I

03

.

tea vi-

.

I

0

Liii (111

Size

I.e.

HaS

Naee

1,•

iY’O’lIB

E3/e20

. . . ru, .!.i1 30’ I

Penpoebos,..

iutota,

Owe-dosed alevoIm..

Luau

07/1/2107 07/1/303? E7fl1/300? C?6’i3 07fl’JV 07/11/2037 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/301?

EOCO2C 03/00/0020 t10 03/tBb ttOD

b*

— aa*C,

tzz Ezi Lea)

Petal,

IIl/l5l15J

the

lii?

4

11flW 1 0 301

lee,

— S,eapsoo

lrL /1 la’V1/2 9070/3

pled

‘0*12

m/00I

rn,?

m/ll/0303 03/00/fl twIll/Mat

301)2 107101’ ire’in

=

La odam

sac

Sden 4

cp,*s

LZ JZ EE1EJ

CwateO’ainmgo 1,1k Entea,

ED LJ

10 Di.,mw

lotand

0

CLotote

Cti-ez

0—Lu

Add the revision information

For Approval

E]Mark

[save asj

Revision

1

1

Date:

3/10/05

text

Columns atA7 and B? altered

L_ CEeate

[ Modify

[Delete

11W / F I ( Cancij

Note that al’ will appear in the revision column in the drawing list. Now update the revised drawings.

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporator

TEKI.AS1RUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Managonleni

10-7

,e — REmus

—

Dh —

— A. — —

Al

— —

:.o.

1.

ROaR.

I Ho4 ByB

Le LosS

I07)11/220? 07/il /2207 07/11/1007 07/11/1007 07/11)2007 07111)1107 57/11)210? SIll ‘12107 SRI]’ /2051

II

—

r&nrii

./3

A

S/C..,

10’%1)2 1 1/2

A A A A A

Hi] ILE1] 0.2001] 10.1001] 10.1000]

A

01007]

A

Ulawl

HIS BRACE

A A

l01I ,t 210010

BRACE

1351/2

I 71 C/ 1 tEl/I 1251/2

‘tin-

“NO ASS.. NO AS S... HIS BRACE

F ‘nor

BRACE HIS BRACE HSS BRACE

009.amuo..b.ad.SsslecNd

Now the system will remake the drawings so that they will match what is now in the model. lisa

Lock

Peeze

Uptodose

0-anges

• • •

ParEs modified Pails modified ParIs modified

•

Drawing updated

•

daled 0 t 7 Otawiig tda]ed

•

DIOWIII

cieac 07)11)2207 07/11/2207 07/11/2207 97/11/2207 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2907 07)11/2007 07)1 1)2907 01)11)2007 07)1112207 0/11112007 07)11)2207 07/11/2207

iHo&md 00)/0000 Cl/il ‘2007 17/11 ‘2007 07)11/2001 00)0010020 07/11)2007 07/11)2007 07)11/2207 07)11/2087 07)11)2007 00)0810000 00/08)0800 00/0810000 (03/00/0000

37/11/2007

08/W,

131(0

07,11/2087

S%h/%/c SN1/lt)I3

3(0i’2

(WIt/mi) Rn/nr.’ermn

‘30’i/2 1 tb

07,11)2%? 07/11/2%? n7/11/7t1fl7

)

V

Revosicr 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sdm 13°B1/2 03/420 03/420 1301/2 11’Ol /2 1TSl/2 35221 3523 0 3/420 53)4295 136’1)2 1361)2 1161)2 S3’Sl /2 3u5!•/7

lype A A A A 4 4 A 9 A A A A A 4 A A A A A

The report drawingjssue_rev shows the revision dates and revision information of drawings. For more information about reports see Lesson 9 Numbering and Reports. To create a report containing the revision information: Click on the Report icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Report dialog box.

report

Select the drawing_issue_rev from the report list and click the Create from all button.

10-8

101 1C1 0.1 10.1 [0.1

131 131 [30 130 ER.: EM. ILP (0

t: 0 0.

E. 3)

Always add the revision before updating the drawing to make sure that you catch every drawing that is altered. The modified flag will disappear after you open and save the drawing.

Show revision information in a report Show revision information in

Ma IP I

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRE,]NING Drawing Management


[lReport

%tJ

standard Report

fe_j standard

Optths

Report templates: flies

cast_unit_cg unit lot list cast unit_part list cast unit_strand_list component_veid_list connection list drawing issue rev cest

lest

drawing

--i T itle2

:z:zzzz

rev

drawing list drawing_revisiot histor cdi a g_dw g_l is t ci c_bar eje_pert_selection 4

Rewt Tile

in eports

Titlel:

—

Title3:

V.

—

Name: drawingJssiae_rev.xsr Sbowj

J [ Browse...

Print.. Create from selected

Lcancel

I

Click on the Show burton to open the report. Check that the revisions are shown correctly in the report drawing issue rev.xsr (Tekia Structures creates the report in the model folder). See the picture below as an example of the drawing issue ev report. Revisions made to the G [3 drawing are marked with a red rectangle. Report DAOiLNG rvIsroN HISTOaY 50r ctrr?Acr Nc:13A3N002 rIrLE: FHASl: Org NAME

rv

No.

AM? HIStORY

Ii] 1

1

AM’?.

DAlY

Page:

Dete:

1 ‘J3fl9.’2Oa

DESCAIprxoN

9.30. 2DO

rziu,rns _°rcfilea Altered

9,3O.2OO

Columns Profil esAltered

10.2 The Drawing Classifier There are always situations where you might like to customize how one item looks on your drawings without affecting everything else. A typical example of this would be where joists are shown on roof plans. Joists are usually out with the supply of the detailing or ffibrcation


TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BPSIC TdNrNG

Drawing Management

10-9

company so dont need to be hilly detailed on the plans. They are normally sho’ii with a phantom line. To do this in Tekla. users have a number of options but the most obvious would be to highlit each joist on the drawing and change it Part representation to a phantom tine This is very time consuming and will be overwritten if the drawing has to be remade. It also means that this work wou]d have to be repeated again on the next contract.

r

—

A better way is to group those items and then apply a rule (a classification) to how you would like these to be handled, then to tell the program exactly how you would like to handle these items. This means that even if the drawing is recreated, the classification will be remembered and the drawing will modi& automatically. You can also take these rules to subsequent contracts or store them in your company wide Firm Folder so that the rule only has to be created once.

Modify a drawing using a classifier Open the drawing

I.

Find the plan at 24-0 level general arrangement drawing that was created earlier.

0

2.

10-10

Notice that the IT Slabs are called out and numbered on the drawing. We will make a classifier that will hide this extraneous information.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAINING

Drawing Management

Copy.igttC 1 Told. Caa*,

TT2 9 cf?J t 7 4 .i6-4 -2 -48 -O -8 -o

.cP2 9 t TT2 7 4 “6-4 -2-48 3.

Group the items

4.

1007

-o -8 -O

Making and running a classifier follow a fairly simple 4 step process. • Group the items you want to handle differently (In this case the TT slabs) • Define the settings that you want to differ from the other items on the sheet •

Create the classifier

•

Refresh the drawing

Make a select filter to group the TT Slabs by double clicking anywhere in the drawing to bring up the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box.

TEILA

STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRNa*G Dmwfng Management

10-11

k11

‘It General arrangement drawing properties Save

2

Load

J

I

Pl&

Name:

El

Title:

PLAN @ ELEV.

t

saej Ran

You can select the scale at the drawing beFore creation. Click on the View... button and load the desired scale. Views

CE

I El

Lici_t.,.

\ie.

2

I

Deta view..

2 2

1

Neighbor part mark...

[ReinForcement marks...]

2 2

[ I

2

I

Dimensions

flEl

2

[Dinierdon..

2 2

I

Marks Part mark... SurFace treatment mark...

Boll mark... Connection mark...

Objects

Er

Part... Stalace bemert

I

Reference oecFs...

J

2! EL

EL________

sir

Bolt... Wetd..

Neighbor parl.. Relorcerrnl.

Grit.

Others

2

[ 5.

10-12

OK

Filet..

Nehrpartfier..

[_UserdeFined attributes...

]I

Apply

jj

Mody

]I

Get

[w/rj[

CanceLEl

Click the Filter button.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASLC TR4INING Drawing Management

Copyiighl

2007 Tekla Corporarpor

1W General

-

filter propertie5

LsaveJ adJ

vI[ J

TTSL4B

T7SI

2 Objedo (nthei tha, coaponent objectol Comection objects Nurràens

Pats

Components

Filter by

Reintcfrig bars User attsibutes

Not

Filter string

Part

El

ElName

I

ElCIass

C

Pro(ile

——

TT

flMaterial

I

:DFinish Secondary I Main parts

L 6.

OK

1L

() 7.

AppIyJ

C

I________

C

Secondary

L

Modi1y]t

sej [Win

Lcancei j

Go to the Parts tab and enter iT in the Profile field. Then save the filter as TISLAB. Do not click Modify. / —

Define the classification

I

Adding the asterisk to the term acts like a wildcard allowing everything that has a profile name the begins with iT to be grouped.

Now go to the Part Mark button on the General Arrangement Properties dialog box.



10—13

RGeneral arrangement drawing properties Save

Load

El Name:

j

PI&

‘V

r

9an

Save as

El PLAN @ ELEV.

Title:

YOU

can select the scale ci the drawing beFore creation.

Click on the View.., button and lo& the desired scale.

‘zzzzzz:

Views

C

Layott.

Eli

Vw..

[

Dksenscn

El

[

El El

I Neighbor part mark... I ReinForcement marks.

El El

I L

El

I

Det& view,

Dimensions

n

Eli

El

Dknension..

Marks

EI[’&rna&.. I El [iriace treatment mark...

J

Bolt mark...

El

[Connection mark,.

-]

Objects

El El El

L

El[

Part Surf ace treatment, ReFerence objects..

BolL Weld.

j El[

Grld..

1

Fer..

Neighbor part.. Reinlorcemer,,

J

Others

El El OK

8.

10-14

I

Pr&ectkn...

j

Netr p& !iker.J

[Usedelined atlributes.

][

Appl , 4 JI

Modify

jJ

Get

][w/rj[

Cance

We want to remove the assembly position, it’s frame and also the section name of the slabs again without affecting the steel members. We want them to remain as they are.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TBAINING

Drawing Management

Eli

Copy I2OO7T&daCpora*n

_

General

-

part mark properties

1iE @J .9C_standard Coraeit

•#•

[i;-€

asJ

Gen&

Main parr AvailaNe elements enbly poiIlon Part position Prolie Materia’ Name Class Finish Size Length Camber Fittings INS/FSI Face drrecfron Sage ol otks0an&,g k Cere;o-cerer dIa Teet Symbol

V

Frame around elenents

Elenents In mark

[
vmbly position i<<

rrorr.e,>

>>

Type:

I 123 l

Cor Font Color:

Remove

Height.

3/32

Fort

M

Userdotined attribute 4

OK

9.

]

Apply

J

ModWy

J[

Get

J[W/rI

[

Cancel

Once the Elements in Mark column is empty we will create the classifier. Again Do not click Modi&. Enter f liter P].an TTSLAB in the Save As field. (ilter_Plan_.TT S LAB

‘H [vasij Iilter_Plan_TTSLAB

•

Using the word filter makes the program recognize that this is a classifier setting.

•

‘Plan’ refers to the type of drang we want this classifier to apply to. This is taken from the name of the settings used to create this drawing. Alternatively, it could be Elevation, Anchor_Plan, Detail or anything that you have defined as settings in the General Arrangement Properties dialog box.

•

‘TTSLAB’ refers to the items that we grouped together under the Filter button. It is the name of the filter we created.

10. Click OK and close each dialog box except the General Arrange Properties box


TEKL.A StRucTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING

Drawing Management

1 0-1 5

Wt General arrangement drawing properties

_lI[

Save

Load

.30 -View •Elevalion PLAN@ ELE .Plan •Stair You can sele’ nchoiFlan Click on the’ nchorPlan_ru-D etails inoborPlan_withouLD C Elevation lann..nn ,.tkn,,F nr

Ri Name: jJ Title:

Ran

.rJi_Saveas

El

Views

-_

ale

CE

I

r 1&,_M[roJ_UL

Dimensions

-H

i-

‘3

-

Ri

De;ai view..

STE ELFAAME tI_Frame Dinns fC_standa,d

Maiks

Ri

;iia.

Part mark,.,

J

L1 [Surface treatment mark...

RI RI

Bolt mark... [Connection mark...]

2 2

I

Neighbor part mark...

jPeinforcement marks.

Objects

EL 2 [

4

2

Part Sizlace t:ealrnert.. Reference objects...

I

RI RI 2

El El

Bolt...

[

We.

Neighbor part. Reréorcemenl.

GI.

Others

[

Protection...

j

Fet..

Ri

I

Ne,bor part fdter.j

I_User-defined allributes... OK

j[

Apply][

Modify

_J

Gel

][i7/r)[,

Cancel

11. Reload the Plan s(The settings you want the classifier to apply to) settings and now click Modify. 12. The drawing should now update, hiding the TISLAB marks but leaving all the steel members as they are.

10-16


Copyrighi © 2007 TeJ
F’

10.3 Cloning Drawings Another way to minimize the amount of cleanup required on drawings is to use cloning. Cloning is exactly as its name suggests where a master drawing is set up and similar drawings are cloned from it. This is particularly usethi when you have repetitive dimsionthg required on a number of similar items. I.

Delete all the HSS Brace Drawings in Phase I (IO series) except one

2.

Open one of the HSS Brace Drawings similar to the one sho below.

L: E

EE-EEZ-iE E

EE

ONE -VERTtCAc HSS ?ACE -01007

3.

Add some dimensions and a note to one end.

Cop.ight @2007 Telda Corporabn

TEKLA sTRUcTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNG Drawing Management

10-17

C)

a)

°

I

0

o o

C

11

00

1.

0

—.

{i

-

a

•

C

C

.4,

-U

a-

a

a

g S

RE1g

II

Q

I

0.

0_a,

a

C 0

a

CD

a a

a a cn

-

(D

LI)

00

a_ow

z

CD 0 ‘a Ct

o

a

a

zn o D2O

LI,

LI)

a

-J

=

pa 1

a

-ia

ON

11/4

lk

0

1

t Drawing cloning Select draving to clone Objects and actions

Action:

Dimensions

Clone

MOdekIg

M

Clone

welds Clone

Obect:

Action:

Texts

Clone

Symbols

Clone

DtPer gI&iC objects

Uone

“

V

Level marks

Clone

V

Reyision maiks

Clone

V

Oth rnks

Create

V

[Clone selected 8.

cbing

Object:

Diawrç v.elds

i[ 6 ngs...

Links Text liles

Clone

V

DWOIDXF

Clone

V.

Hyperlaiks

Clone

V

LCancel

I

Now highlight the items in the model that you want to have clone drawings made from.



10-19

Then click Clone Selected.

9.

r Select dravëig to cbne

Drawings..]

Objects and actions in cloning Object:

Action:

Dimensions

Clone

Drawing welds

V

Clone

v

Mcdeng welds Cbne

v

Level rnaiks

Clone

v

Revision marks Clone

v

Other marks

Object:

Action:

Texts

Clone

Symbols

Clone

Other graphic objects

Cb,e

v.

V

Links Te4%s

Clone

y

DWS/DXF

Clone

v

Hyperlinks

Clone

‘v!

Create v

[

[ i 6 ne selected

Cancel

J

10. Notice that the drawing list now shows the new cloned drawings. t2C

Jointaie

Owoes

Oiawfttoec Dia,rc.pdate

— —

I!.,.,

Cienied 0711/2207

Rrnion

Mo$ied 07111/200?

DIn 1/203’

C7r/103’ /20C7

CL’

CJ11)20D’ Or. 1 /20D7 07111/2027 01111/2027 01,11/2071 07)11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007

3,/V i2OD 07/11/2CC? 07111/2021 07/11)2027 07/11)2027 07/11)2001 07/1 JflT 17

14,2ro7 07/11/2007

07/12/2037 I:.’

01/11/2077 07/11/2007 07/11/2007

See

lj/pe A

89/420”

A

rJ/r2c 0J/4’20 03/4.2ff

A

Cvl1/7

07/1112007 27)11/2077

I

34.20 03/410

A A A A A A

Maic

2C2] 20]

1X1

DL_.’IX COLUMN COLLMI%

1X2 1X3

:0Ljj4 COLLI4,

51

COLLII/k COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN

1121 SCOI [0011 [C.10231 [C.10241

1

0’3/420 83/420 0’3/4’Z7

1

B3/4’20

1

3513’ I,.. l3’S”I/2

A

I: II.i 0.1007]

1 3”6”1/2

A

lo.2onl

1 Y’8”I/2 32r

A 6

IR.20011 12]

A A S

Nntt

F’

COLUMN COLUMN El [:1;:; II H55 SHALE

..

02/07/0200 02/07)0200 07/11/2007

HSS ORAtE RAFTER 51

11. And if you open one of these. the editing made already will be showm

p3

I’

10-20


Copyn h 0 t @2007 Tekla Corporation

10.4 Adding a logo to a drawing template Most users will probably want to customize their standard drawing templates to show their company information and logo automatically. This is covered in detail during the advanced training course and there is farther help on the subject available to users on the extranet. but this chapter outlines a simple method of quickly and easily adding information to the standard drawing templates. In this example we will add the Tekla logo to the drawing but users can add any dxf file of their choice. Drawing borders cbnsist ofa set of rules called Layouts that are made up ofa coflection of Templates which call information from the model and the program.Templates can be textual (for reports) or graphical (for drawings). For example, the Bill of Materials on a drawing is a template. The Title Block is another templaLe. The drawing border is created by adding and locating each of these templates in a Layout

/ —

Help> Introduction to Templates Open the template to be modified

>

Graphical Templates

Now that the logo has been prepared. all that remains is to add that to the styles or layouts to he used. To do this we will open the template being used as for General Arrangement Drawings and add the logo to the Style 1 area Go to File Open and find the TypeGM_TitleBlocks.tpl file —

Load File Lnok,:

..jtempIae .

L

My Recent Docurerds

V

Status_Drawing.ftoom.rpt

J Status Shop.rpt [) status_site.rpt [ Sbuctures.tpl j sts_d_kgt.rpt

Stt1e1Loso. arfacngjst.rpt

i Desktop

JTekJaLogo,ml j]ransmittal.rpt Type_BoMsjl TypeA_caliOff TyjeA_CaiDML.tpl ,

My Documents

r’A_Grkt,1

TypeAF. Th’peAMndr&_t_BOM.i

.TypeAM_HandraiJ_TLyevrsions TypeCu..RebarScheduleuS.Wl TypeG_Anchor8oltTable,tpl

n TypeGIfle6lodcs I

jTypeA_F’tA_8OM.l

My Computer

TypeAyLA_c&loff.tp TypeA_OnHold.l ‘. TypeA_OnHoldtnft.tpl TypeA_Phases, l TypeA_Revisns,l TneA_Y±5io&s.

IJtflI

Old

LI.M

File Dame:

TypeGM_TitleBlocks.tpl

L2K1

Files of jpe:

Template Files Ltpl; .rpt

Cancel

There are several different styles available to use and these can be set up in Project Properties within the model. We will deal with Style I which is at the top of the list.

Copyrighi © 2007 Tekln Corporation

TEKLA STRuCTuRES 13.0 BAsIC TRAINING Drawing Management

10-21

0)

E

C-)

S

0

C,

0)

z

z

00 C) -4

C

o —

l.a C,

€0

I.J

0

D)

S. (0

V m

I

0).

0

-4

z

0 00 0 0 0)

cii

a H

E

n

0’

o

S

0)

“1

a

-.4

t 0

2.

., ‘-<

if,

e.8

.

t

.

Q

V

2.

i (n z

r

0) 0

3<

00,

-‘Cl)

0

0)

z

a

0)

ci

0

0 C (1) (0

0

a

ii,

0,.

a

a 0’ a

0

CD

‘1

C

CD

(0 CD

z

0

in in

0)

0)1

a

a

Ba

0

—4

0)

‘

Q

There are many more functions available to help users create and edit drawing borders and drawings. The basic training course covers only how to create and basically edit drawings. The advanced training course covers topics such as creating drawing wizards, the drawing classifier and how to create and edit drawing templates and layouts in detail.

10.5 Creating Basic Templates There are a number of templates already supplied with Tekia but you can also create any template to show any information you like. In this example we are going to create a very simple template to show a for approval’ or ‘for construction’ stamp on the drawing. / —

1.

Using a template for this type of process makes the stamp appear on every drawing automatically, saving time by avoiding having to open every single drawing and insert a block or add some text many times over.

Start by opening the template

Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation

editor

Tools> Templates

TEKLA sTRuCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

10-23

Ipli W,v

Er

Iret

W.

Op

H*

LL____

Seve

/-

I’

S

0 I

OMS

Sect As... Save Temçtste

Recent Flies

Eat

ad-a

Ps,v,eee Pane Picpersy

-

yates

-

Rea4

-j

2.

Then go to File

3.

Select Graphical Template

>

New in order to create a new template.

Tefrate types “I

Textual te,ndae

r

UK

][

Cancei

Graphical Templates are templates that apply to drawings. Textual Templates are for reports and material exporting thnctions for MIS or CNC programs.

4.

The next stop is to define a row where we will add our content information.

5.

Go to the Insert Menu and choose Component> Row

1% 10-24

TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BASIc TRAINING Drawing Management

copynt fl17 Td Cupamta

___________ __________

FE

tt

Vw

l’ir.

J

OpWe

*

Coreponent

Header

‘3rr.DrI•.r’

-i

r

Page Header

Sorr and dise

—

‘.:,;

TewnAa

Fecie

i

6.

You will be asked for the content type. The content type determines the type of values that you will be able to bring in from the model. For instance an Assembly content type allows attributes that are pertinent to assemblies to be shown. A cast unit content type allows certain concrete cast unit attributes to be shom

7.

Choose Drawing. Select Content Type IF you weni to insert object speciFic attributes, you need to select a content type For the row. Cor*er type V

SSEMBLY BOLT ST_UNIT COMMENT CONNECTION JII

‘IDLE MESH NUT

:

Cancel

This allows us to show the date the drawing was last plotted underneath the stamp. Now go to the insert menu and choose Text

S. 9. Ft

Edit

w

r

Sc#tmg end dran / —

. Teata

C,turs

t*

—‘

.

EA

Une

2

PoMine

I.

et

tun;pIdLol .,n1oe.renae.rrn..nrvne.anaan.eiaenet

crde

*

Fitrn

Ale. IZ

r. Inter, a terd

Valire Add Gra,tctJ Field

1 contonaMtrl

I

10. Type FOR APPROVAL in the text field and then locate it in the middle of the component row. Copyright

2007 Tekle Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRINING orawing Management

10-25

t

L :z...*:

You can change the font, the font size or the color of the text at this stage if you wish.

11. Next we will add the plot date beneath the stamp. Insert another text field using exactly the same process titled Plot Date

::::::IFQR:ApPRQVAL’::::::: ::

jP.LOTOATE::

fl 12. You can aiso add a line by using the Insert> Line command or a box around the stamp by using the Insert> Rectangle tool 13. Now we will insert a value field that will automatica]ly update with the new plot date every time the drawing is plotted.

14. Go to Insert> Value Field and click the point just above the left edge of the underline shown below.

FOR APPROVAL PLOTDATE:±::*.::: p 15. A list of available attributes that can be taken automatically from the model will now appear.

10-26


copyright@ 2007 Tekla Carporafion

-

User attribute Attribute [DRAWINGI D CONTENTTYPE Content type D CURRENT_USER DATE Date DATE_CREATE Creatim date D DATE ISSUE Issue date DATE_MODIFY Modification date DATE_PLOT [late dra’,-ing printed DR_D EFAU LI_H OLE_S IZE DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE DR_PART_POS Drawing Part positbn D HEIGHT Height ID IdentificatIon number NAME Name NAME_EASE Base name PAGE Page Hi PLO TFILE Prt Ie name ot drawing *0 ROW IN PAGE Row i page ED SCALE1 Scale 1 Hi SCALE2 Scale 2 SCALE3 Scale 3 0 SCALE4 Scale 4 Hi SCALE5 ScaleS SIZE Size TIME Time Hi -0 TITLE T:tle hO TITLE1 Title 1 TITLE2 Title 2 TITLE3 Tit’e 3 0 TYPE Type -0 WELD_DEFAULT Weld de!ault size 0 WIDTH Width AS S EtA B LY HISTORY PROJECT V REVISION USERDEFINED 0 NUMBER -

.

-

.

-

-

-

-

.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

16. Choose PLOT_DATE from the list.

FOR APPROVAL PLOT DATh:: &LIJ 17. You can also change the text size and color for value fields too. 18. Finally save the template in the usinnp/templates folder.

Copydght © 2007 Tekla Corporakor’

TEKIJ STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING

Drawing Management

10-27

Tplfli

‘qe

I ,.qI

Lit

plah. i

t:

Iea 1

IIemIanI .ij Wndo-. r,t

I,tect

r.N.

.--

n_t.o

-

—

he

%Ø9 -

—.

—

X

[54

Tt+S. —

--.---——.—. - -

r

—4

I.

Save

o,-.r

Si,ek S.tlr Tenwiate

-

FOR APPROVALI

iN. ‘r• •

.PLOTDATE:

Recent Filet Ed

19. Give the template a name and click OK Save FiteAs

0 t

“

.nddrorts

settr,s .jTplEd 2.2 tamplates My Recent Documents

•

f

BAsE_scHEDuLE,I Cornerlick_BottornRight. tpl CornerTi&_TopLeftlpl

Zcu_s_treittaia,

EnarSe

drawing_e.pa*l

‘

.

j -ENr3_coIumn_sthedu{e2.l

J

__...J

cIJpr.:

J -ENG_conc_pilaster_schedule i -EPJG_pad_thono_stheduIe. l -ENG_sfrip_ftoting_schedule.tpl L Engr_24x36,tpl Engr_3Ox4iI Er_Revab,s.t g_SubnittaIi.1

jCU_Rebar_Bends2.

lE,vsJbmittaI2.$l

My Dzcunerils

CU_Rebar_Ben&l cu_Reira,2,tpI

L3 -

.

Desktop •

-$•

9cu_BoMztpI cu_80r1. tpt CLi_BOMX. CU_Logo.l CUMatfrt

-

Files of type:

J J PC_Er_i PC_Er_i PCrJ

.PCEr; PC_Er: PC_Er_:

,e%iscn

:±‘TVttaI3.

En_5tm

Style1I

IF

e nam& My Computer

&ngr_$t Engr_SC

Graphical Template Ales (.tpl)

v

L

Canc

20. Your template is now available to be added to a drawing. For more information about Templates see: Help Templates

>

Template Editor

>

Introduction to

10.6 Adding Templates to Layouts Now that we have defined the template we need to tell the progran what drawings we want the template to appear on and where on those drawings we would like it to show. We do this by defining layouts. Layouts are what the program uses to make the physical attributes of the drawings, How it looks, what physical size the sheet is and what template are shown on the sheet. A drawing is made up of layout information and templates. To define layouts we go to the Properties> Layout maw. The available list of layouts will appear. There are several layouts included as standard and these are generally sufficient for most normal usage scenarios but users can add their oxri if they wish.

10-28



r

We are going to add the stamp template to our GA Drgs in this exercise so highlight the 5 GAD s r on the list.

Layouts Current layout

sezth1yrgs Ass yCalloff Ass ya 11 OfV

Ii

Tabls layout...

jj

Fired sizes... ather5heet

RanraiL_TL MLJssy_)rg Xultimrgs 050 as P0_Erect i cn Sin;lsrtDrg Sngl eta 110ff

SA_Drs

r

Add OK

J IL

Calculated sizes...

-t Delete

ApplyJ

Cancel

Select the Table Layout button. This opens the available drawin gs that can be used for General Arrangements. We can actually use any type of drawing layout for any catego ry of drawing. By organizing these into sections though, we can allow the system some flexibility in how it creates the drawings. For example we can permit the program to use II xl 7 layouts or 24x36 layouts when creatin g assembly drawings. This helps the program achieve better results autom atically.

CopyrghI

0 2007 Tekta Corporalion

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRArNING Drawing Management

10-29

ii Table layouts

t

Current table layout Margins

Tab Iayaft: 124x36 MlchcrSoit

Widtft

0’

HeIght:

0’

Spaces Horizonlal

0

Vertical:

0

IL 24k36 Add

[

j

OK

Uate Apply

j

ii

Delete

J

[

Cancel

As you can see we can have Anchor Bolt Layouts specific for those types of drawings or we can have a 24x36 sheet set up for all other GA thawing types. To define what templates appear on the 24x36 drawing type, highlight it then click Tables.

n Available tables:

Chosen tables: •1

TypeM Phases

StylelLogo Iyp-ecx_?evisions I yp a ax_Title S icc

TeM_Styie4rid I yp eM St yie4 Phas acrid

Iypel_DaliD±f Iype_InAssyList Typewritlealccks+30M drawing_title_gE

I

a,

V

4

Update Current table Reference

Table

H

H Drawing frame

H

EC

Vecici between corners , 0” y.

[ 10-30

v

OK

Scale: Tra,spaent

&

J

App’

TEKLA5TRUGTURES 130 BASIC TRAiNING Drawing Management

El 1.0000

H Cancel

CopyrighI @2007 TekIa Coirerallon

Then find stamp on the list and click the arrow pointing right to move it across to the column on the ripht i-nd to make it visible on the drawipy.

Available lables:

Chosen tables: Styleltcgc

TypeMfliasea TypeM_Style4Szid l’peMStfle4haserid TyeWCa11Off TypewlnAssynist ypeW lit leE 1cc drawing_title_ga e;i i nfl

I yp eN_evi sic as I yp eC_Ii tie! locks

1MW 4

[

Cuteeni table Reference

Update

J

Table

C

El

C

C

C

DrarFrarr

C Vector between corners ec 0’

Transparent

yr_

flOK

App

Scale:

J

C 1 .00

fl

Lc!ncdl

Now we must tell the program where we want the template to be located. This is done by referencing a point somewhere on the drawing and referencing a point on the template we have made.

Copightt27 Teaa Ceoraton

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

10-31

[1

Tables Avalthle taLks:

C}sen tables:

IyeX_hases

Styleltcgc IypeGMlevisitns TypeGX Title3lccks

—

TypeXstylearid IjpeM_Style4Phasec-zid Type?Da11Dff TypeulnAasyList TypeW_1itie31ck+!CX tawing_titie_ga ZeViSiQn V

Update Current table Reference

Table

LID Drawing frame

Vectoi between corners IL ID jY:

OK

H

U stamp

Scale:

1.0000

Tanspaien

I UPl9

Cancel

We define the reference points by first of all finding the bottom center of the drawing frame. Then we find the bottom center of the stamp template making the template appear centered on the bottom of the drawing. Clicking both corner boxes as shown above acts to center these. I-lad just one box in the corner been selected then the template would appear at that corner of the drawing instead. The 3’ value in the box adjusts the template up 3” vertically on the drawing from its bottom center anchor point. ‘y’

Checking the Transparent box allows the drawing items to overwrite the template or encroach upon the template without being hidden behind it Finally click Update, the OK at each of the dialog boxes until you are back in the model. Then re-open one of your GA drawings. The plot date value will fill in as soon as the system detects you have plotted the drawing

10-32

TEKLA S1ROCT1JRES lit BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

Cupy,igM S 2807 Telda Corporation

r

E!H E

-

F—

1,-i

[I

+-u.rH

For more information about Layouts see Help> Drawing> Drawing Layout

10.7 Plotting Drawings Tekia Structures plots drawings both to selected print devices and to flies. Single drawings can be plotted from the Drawing Editor. Single or multiple drawin gs, which have been selected in the drawing list can be plotted from the Model Editor .

Plotting Plot a single drawing

OO?flht

To plot a single drawing from the Drawing Editor: I.

Open the drawing in the Drawing Editor.

2.

Select File> Print current.., to open the Print drawings dialog box, or click the Print drawings icon on the Drawings: Standard toolbar.

3.

Select the print device (plotter) to be used and click Print.

2007 Tekia Cortrflfl

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC IRAINING Drawing Management

10-33

:

Print drdwings Pir cwiad ece

r

&5Y4flg

P:iae, -,ss-c

Q Prrij in ie Re

Sesienjet24x3

5esii.t 32x42 a,wrj.t4v 1 Lx17 1aser et4v_3—i!2,U1

tynewerintet

ØAjo

Q Prig an rw4fl sheets Nuwbe, ol coes Oi.enlalion

Auto

Print

Entire dravsng

àpe

Frawe,.

Md / EdiL Piint

V

J rierseiup.1

Lcce j

For more information about available plot options, see Help: Dra4.ing> Printing> Printing Drawings> Plot options. Plot multiple drawings

To plot multiple drawings from the Model Editor: -

4.

Open the draw1ng list.

5.

Select at least two drawings in the drawing list

6.

Click on the Print drawings icon on the Standard toolbar.

7.

Select the print device to be used, and click Print / —

If you select several print devices, Tekia Structures sends each drawing to the device with the smallest paper size, on which the drawing will fit.

For more information about printing to print device, see Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings.

Exporting Drawing as Other Formats You can convert Tekla drawings to many commonly used industry format drawing types like DXF, DWG, PLT or even PDF. Before you can do this you must install the printer or print driver in Windows then add the relevant printer to your Printers catalog in Tekla Structures. For more information on adding printers see: Help> Drawing> Printing> The Plotter Catalog

Plot a drawing as a file

Plotting drawings as a file allows you to send drawings electronically for remote printing. To plot the drawing to a file: 1.

Open the drawing list in the Model Editor.

2.

Select the drawing or drawings in the list.

3.

Select File> Print Drawings

r 10-34

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAINING Drawing Mnagenent

cop,ight@2O07TekIa Corporiioo

Print drawings Print &awings selected in the drawkg list. Printer instances:

Print to tile File location: C:\TeklaStructuresM ([Rrcwse j Include revisucti mark to lie nan Scalno

-

designet_24xS designjet3ox42 laserjet4v 1 x17 1nejet4vS—1/2a1L

-

Auto 1.00

OScale

E Prt on mukiple sheets Number of copies:

V.

Orientation:

Landscape

‘

Pr a’ea:

Entke drawir

v

[Add I Edt..]

[_Frames...

[

Prtiter Setup..]

Cancel

4.

Select the type of output you would like and click the Browse button to speci& the location the plot files are to go on your computer.

5.

The Include revision mark to Filename allows users to differentiate between a file printed before revisions and the same file re-printed after a revision was made. It simpiy appends the revision mark to the name of the file it creates and saves on the computer.

Exporting Drawings to Other Programs You can also send drawings to other users in DXF or DWG format so they can be opened and edited by clients or colleagues who don’t have Tekla Structures. I. 2.

Go to FiIe>Export>Drawings to open the Export drawings dialog box. Select DWG as the File Type. Type .\drawings in the Name field, This will define the .ABasicModelCombineddrawings folder as the destination folder of the plot files.

Print duawings selected in the drawing list. Punter instances Ik’r. )XF

designjet_24x3 designjec_30x42 1asejet4v_11xI7

3.

PririttoIIIe fle location.

-..-..

.\duawings

Firowee..

fl Include revision mark to tie name Scaling

Click Print to plot the drawing to DWG.

Copyright © 2007 Telda Corporation

tEKLA SIRUCTURES 12.0 BASIC TRAINING

Drawing Management

10-35

:‘PrioI Ii rwiogs Print dra.irrngs selecled in rho diawng nt.

2 Prir Io 1k

Pirde; rsnLes:

F,e Iocatcei

fl.

ie3ignjt24aS designjet3Oxt1 laseriet8vllxr’

4.

C

I 2awsts\S;eeFrare ‘q

[Browse

I

fri&ide ;eo1 nr to Me nane

Stating

Check that the drawings were successfully plotted to the .ABasicModelcombined\drawings folder. This folder should contain the saved *.dwg drawings. /

If you do not enter a file name for the destination plot file, or you have chosen several drawings, Tekla Structures uses the drawing name(s) as file name(s). If you do not enter a folder name, Tekia Structures creates the file(s) in the current model folder. You can also print a drawing to DWG using the Drawing Editor. Open the selected drawing and follow the above steps, starting at step 3. Tekla Structures does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. For example, a drawing named A. I overwrites a drawing named a.l.

For more information about plotting to file, see: Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings> Printing to DWG/DXF Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings to file For more information about defining drawing plot file names and plot directories, see: Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings to file

>

Switches for naming plotfiles

Making PDF Files PDF Files are the open format employed by Adobe and there is a free viewer available for download on the internet called Adobe Acrobat Reader. There are also a number of free or cheap PDF file maker programs that can be used in conjunction with Tekla Structures to enable sharing of your drawings with clients who may not have a license of Tekla Structures. Once you have chosen and installed a PDF making program you can make and share PDF Files. Many of these program behave like an imaginary printer attached to your computer and instead of creating physical paper as the output they make PDF files that can be sent electronically via email or written to storage media or even printed out locally or remotely.

10.8 Sharing Your Entire Model. It is also possible to share all sorts of information graphically with everyone involved in your contract regardless of whether they have Tekla Structures or not. Users can create a representation of the model in a format that can be viewed in Microsoft Intemet Explorer which is already installed on every machine that is running any form of Microsoft Windows. To export a Web Viewer Model: 1. Go to File> Publish as a Web Page

I 10-36

TEKIA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

Copynghte 2007 Tekla Corpsraton

J New

Ctri-N

Open...

Ctr4C)

W Save

Ctn—S

Save as..

Ti

Print drawings...

Sht*P

Pr1repocts... Report... CNC Pubkh as Web Import Ewort Catalog Reference models,..

Select Publish from the dialog box that appears.

2.

l Publish as Web page Publish what?

() Entie model iDSelected parts Publish as Type:

() XML

CD Sohd

Page title: Tekia Structures model Template:

Tekla Web Viewer

File name: .\PubhcWeb\ModeI.xrt

1

browser

L Cancel 3.

Internet Explorer should now open on your computer. You may see a warning about an ActiveX control that has to be allowed to run.

Copi,pht @2007 Tekla Corporakon

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TR4]NJNG Drawing Management

10-37

rl.ejw4

..

r

‘.1W

411

low-lIol

lI.4)In(er

—

93

*

C

o. Ted.a e’.w&&I •Tdda W

£ TtLo S4at -

T

St9ctsn

Y&la W ..

tThtho’1.

S FC

‘7

W.. 4’sbew

P

.

I’

H, Tttk

0

-

0 cu.. Plot

—

•.-

7,0,

.snt&rattcfreAtfltheafw

1i*

I

-I

.

-

4.

—

1— 2

Click on the bar and Choose Allow Blocked Content Allo., ‘ockur1 content...

5.

10-38

After a few moments the model will appear.

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

Copyright® 2007 Tale Cwporatir

C

‘

Icick Web Vcwc

It•kl.s 54, urlisres sotlLi:eas.cMa3elCoq1b,ned- Wndos’,s Instruct Lxplo.t’

S Ctressthscturegtd& hi 3O,Trthwçfl U 9$

Telde

rnHe Ir,heml

rehJa Excenni

dCsrtEied54bkWthrdx

& TnUe :bnbtx

:Vethoy,e

HSSC

“

A

0- AnticS Exyrns,

5tSda Wa swwes Ydda Stuclises niedel: esadlod.

P Mv TidebIn 0 Chest

-

-

TEKLA’ Structures

‘Pe’

reels-

The Model that Works

seed Il Imh S na s hot Is C linbopid

SmfJQJ Pa 5

II

Done

6.

Cc,rd’I

N*$1zE

• rn. 1004

Leidse 5.5%

d

My Cn’iuittn

•e ‘00%

Now the model can be rotated, zoomed, moved or flown through in the same manner as if you would if you were running the fuI installation of Tekia Structures.

2007 T& Cpori

acRS1RcTLREsI3.o3As1c:ft.’:ING

Drawing Management

10-39

/ —

This isa terrific way to quickly and easily share information about your model. Progress can be tracked visually; Requests for information can be handled easily by highlighting affected items in the model in a different color prior to exporting as a web page. All sorts of information can be shared among those involved via this easy to use system.

I 1040

TEXLASTRucJuRs 110 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management

CopyTight 02007 Telda corporation

_*e

TEKLA

Stairs and Handrails

Tekia Structures Basic Training October 26, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

BSI Stairs and Handrails

3

BS1.1 Create a Stair Finishing the bottom of the stringers Assigning Gage Material attribute to treads BS1,2 Create Stair Handrails Create Stanchions (Posts) at stairs Create Handrails Modify Return Bend Lengths BS1,3Create Handrails Along Landing Create Stanchions Create Handrails Create Corner Elbows Prepare the Assemblies BS1.4 Create Drawings Stair Drawing Handrail Drawing Change the Handrail BOM type

8SO

Copynght@2co5TeklaCcrporattn

4 10 14 16 16 18 19 25 25 30 31 37 42 42 45 47

TEKL4STRUCTRES BASIC TRAINNG Stairs and Handratis

1

‘a (\. jj

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAJNING Stairs and Handrails

Copynght@2005 Tekja Corporation

BSO1

!


In this lesson we will introduce you to some basic miscellaneous modeling tasks that you need to know when detailing projects with miscellaneous assemblies. We will start with a small structure (already modeled in TS) and add a stair and handrails to this model. Many of the basic modeling functions that you learned in previous lessons will be used in this lesson. After the model is completed we will create the necessary drawings for shop fabrication of these assemblies. You will learn how to: •

Model in a stair and handrails using several miscellaneous system components

•

Utilize various components to connect the stair and handrail

•

Utilize various modeling tools to complete the stair and handrail assemblies

•

Create a shop drawing of the stair

•

Create a shop drawing of a handrail assembly

BSOi

Copyright © 2005 Telda Corraton

TEKLA STRUCTUnES BASC TRANING Stairs and Handrails

3

BSI.1

C

Create a Stair In order to add a stair to our model we first must add two points; one at the bottom nosing point and one at the top nosing point. Smdy the contract drawing to determine the locations of these nosing points. Click on the open named view list icon.

This opens the Views dialog box shown below, Move the PLAN AT EL. +12-7’ 112 view into the Visible views side. Click OK.

I.

Select and nve vtws between he do to c* vntWy To select uwAc4e vews. F down ciii key vd* :elcctrç Named wewn. !LrJRTIDII E!.EV?flOH 5VIIIOH ELEVATION ELEVAI ION TIEVAIIOFI ELEt7IION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATICI ELEVATION

vistle .ws ON SIT SN SN ON SIT Ott ON ON CII ON

ORID 1 GRID GRID S

S-RIO 4 5010 GRID 02.10 S-RID GRID 0 GRID GRID F.

3d PNASE

PLAN AT fl

4 to

:4

We will now add the point that will mark the center of the top tread nosing by learning a new tool. Create the work points

Click the Create point array icon. This allows you to locate a point at a reference direction and distance from any other point. “a

Select the intersection at A5 as a reference

—

notice the Origin values change as shown below.

(a 4

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails


BSO1

1 in yMa•J vu n•avsa vi n’IgVP

flahc aJ Coordinet X

5”

‘1’

4’Q”

Z

21/2

-

‘‘°:“

•

alz-7”112

• L

OK

j[

createj[

Reset

][

Cancejj

In the Coordinates section of the Point array window. type the values shown. Then hit the Create button, which adds the red point seen below. DON’T close the dialog box or interrupt the command.

Next we will add a point for the bottom nosing. Go to the 3d view (right-click and select Next window) and zoom in around El. Select the intersection at A6 as the Origin. BSO1

Copyflght @2005 Tekla Corporation


5

r In the Coordinates section of the Point array window, type the values shown. Then hit the Create button, which adds the red point seen above. Click OK and then right-click Interrupt. Select the Create view with two points icon.

nj In the PLAN AT EL +12-7’112 view, select the top nosing point first followed by a perpendicular snap at Grid D as shown here. Right-click Interrupt.

C’ L This will create a-view along the plane which will become the center of the stairs. Double-click in the newly created view to open up the View properties window.

v [aj istandard

otandard View

PHASE 1 STAIR ELEVATION

ENaen& EiAngIe Protection

vIE Rdelon aroundz ID P]ane [@ Orthogonal E Rolarron acoundX

30 000Ô [20 0000

Representation

fl View LIrpe

Rendered

VmwdeØh Up

&.

-

EDo*n

E I

Lifter...

LQ1E

1 I 4c

Ii

Mo&y

if

Gel

IP/rI[

cancat

Change the Angle, Lip, & Down fields and type the view Modify button. Click OK.

name as

shown above and hit the

(. 6

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAStC TRAINING Stairs and Nandrails


8501

Li

Input the stair

Click the Find a component icon.

Enter 74 and hit the Search button.

•

‘.!aP4I

U-S

I

ZpS’4i

Double-click on the Z pan (574) icon to open up its dialog window. On the Picture tab, enter the values shown in the fields below. Picture

Stair setup Z pan

f

Brackek

Perpenciiciiaiv

RI

RI

1..

+

RI Equar

V

t 7!!

/

j3!3!!

1 RIo’

1

Click OK to make these changes active and close the dialog window. Click the lower point that we created at the bottom nosing point first and then the upper point that we created at the top nosing point. This will create a new stairs in our model. Right-click Interrupt. Also close the Component catalog window. Check stair dimensions

Check the stair tread and rise values. Using the create X measure and Create Y measure tools, add the dimensions shown below to the elevation view.

BSD1

Copyright @2005 Tekla Corraon

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stair, and Handrail,

7

n U

C Create X Measure Create Y Measure

If everything has been done correctly, the values should come out to exactly 7” and 11”

5.

C

Looking at the top of the stairs, you will notice that some changes are required to the top tread.

Double-click on any part of the stairs to open up the Z Pan (S74) window. On the Z pan tab enter the values in the fields shown below and hit Modify. Also check that the bottom tread rise value is 6½”

0 B


Copyright @ 2005 TekIa Corporation

BSOI

—

S:Z

s

lio flS

21HZ S in it p C,

The result should look like the image shown below

We also need to go to the Stair setup tab and select the option to make this stairs a complete assembly. Also enter STAIR in the Name field. Hit the Modify button to change the stairs in our model. Pictue

Star seto

Zpan

B,aC*C4

I StingerpoUe

b

C1<2O.1

C

Pot_No c i

St.irioei olalicti P&ionkwlane

Malen&

0

paime IsTAIR

—

H 2tiiddte

alice’ Dose Ito slop

C,ese bottom lsp

ci

Locale asserol4’ Sl’ngeo detenc, fl

BSO1

Copyright l) 2005 TokIa Corporation

0e1ak


9

We also need to change the weld from a field weld to a workshop weld. To do this, click the button which up the dialog box shown here. Change the Wshop!site option from site (flag) to workshop (no flag) for weld #3. Tekia Structures Z Pan (574) No 1

S!:e

1çe

sr1 EZ

rc”o.a

A,4e

••ao

Fn,l,

Leh .O

c.:

Prl,

Edaa/I Wst,ooflfr RFI

U!

V

No

-

El Noel Bc cpt

ho..

—-

V b.

•.

01(00

L —

4

Wied V;;

j;

-

N

—

3

Sllch

—

V

.-—

.—--.—.-——.-—-.

00000

C

0-U0

r

-

rs

v

V

—-

-

“.r”J:’

.H.°[____

1 I ‘i Hit the Modify button to change the stairs in our model. Click OK on this dialog box only.

Due to the complex nature of stairs, not all stairs can be created 100% with the system components. Use the system Stair components to get as much as you can and then model in the rest.

Finishing the bottom of the stringers We will now create the bases for the stringers using regular system components. Firstly though we must change the selection switch from Select Components to Select Objects in Components. Otherwise, the system component we add for the base plate will not know whick member to add the connection to. ‘Select Objects in ComponentW

Now for the bottom of the stair stringers, zoom in at the bottom of the ride side stringer. Add two construction lines using the Create construction line command.

The first one can be added at the foundation line and then moved up 1.2”. Using the will make it easier to add this construction line along the foundation grid line.

1.J snap

t 10

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Kandrails

Copyright @ 2005 TekIa Cerration

BSOI

The second one needs to be created at the centerline of the stringer. Use the Create divided line points command to first add a point somewhere between a point along the top of the stringer and a perpendicular point at the bottom of the stringer as shown below. ‘

The point this creates can be used along with the mid-point at the bottom of the stringer to create the second construction line.

p

The intersection of these construction lines is required to use the system component 1043. Double-click Stairs detail (1043) from the Component catalog.

4 The Stair detail (1043) component dialog opens.

BSO1

Copyright @ 2D05 Tekla Corration

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handralls

1

Tc.kl. St t,tchjeps

Stag

LJ Li

r

It.co Detail ItNif

OtnCt.

——— Ptn

Pat;

Bat

—

-

Select the Base_Condition_Left settings from the drop-down list and hit Load. Enter the value shown in the fields shown above and click Apply.

Pick the stringer and then the snap point as shown. This cuts the stringer as shown and adds a base angle. Right-click Interrupt

ft

La 12


Copyrighi

2005 TekIa Corpotafion

BSO1

Do the same to the left side stringer, but use the Base_Condition_Right settings. 1W lekla Structures Stdir Va%e Detail (1043) Sa

1 E4_Jj

ignore aIhert3ipes Pica,,

P&,

Bogs

S

Biack&

H)

Base_tondRionp,ght

E

-

V Baos_Condit,on_R,ght

1

[_________

[Welds..

G&,e,M

ie

V

z

EE1—

I_QKJ(j

BSO1

[_

!oy

I

Copyright @2005 Ted, Corporaton

—ft —1

Get

j [E/ r

TErQA SIRuC]LRES BASIC 1RI1[NC Stairs and Handraits

13

1

Select the stringer and right-click Inquire> Assembly to see if all intend pieces are shop attached to the stairs.

IL --

-

oterwpo

‘% ..

--

lnqjte

Copy Oe!ete St as reô maw, pa’ c-F assertly Cone- cfgy E,2c1 lsEs F-ide F-we

This reveals that the bottom tread needs to be added to the stair assembly.

Use the create weld command to add the bottom tread to the entire assembly After using the Create weld command, the bottom tread becomes part of the stair assembly.

I

Create weld

Select the left stringer first as the part to weld to, then the tread. Then select the right stringer as the part to weld to then the tread once again.

Assigning Gage Material aftribute to treads The contract drawing calls for the treads to be made of 12 Gage material. The Gage for the tread needs to be identified in the parts User-defined attributes.

14

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRdNINS Stairs and Handralls

Copynight @ 2005 Tekla Corporation

RSD1

lL);,Jal,ihop_

]

Select the bottom tread in the 3d view. Right-click and select User-defined attributes. This opens the User-defined attributes window. k

Tekia Structures Beam (I) Clwiçe ide,; Pa,arnetero

IFU en, hod SISm End code; Woe-flow I;;ue cmtol

U

Rn,

D C C C

Shoder, Ce,,ter P,elo*ia,y rna,k E,ad’n Menibe,

C No

Ui.. ls I

C C C C. C

U,., hell 2 Jet he’d 3

the’ held 4 Merebe, cob hoed d,aoeng men v,e-a

Q F,ore

EIfZ

jcaoe Maleojal

/r,

:J

EIIE1

First hit the (LCJ button to remove all the checks in front of each field. Then on the Parameters tab, select SHTI2GA from the Gage Material option list and hit Modify. DON’T close this dialog box.

A BSO1

This does not physically change the thickness of the treads. It merely adds an attribute that can be used in reports and drawings in place of an imperial thickness value.

Copyrigtfl @ 20D5 Tekia Corrabon

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and -landrails

15

0

In the 3d view, use the Ctrl+P on the keyboard to change the view to a 2d plan view. In this view, select all the treads and then hit Modify in the UDA dialog box. ‘...

BSI.2

Change the view display so that the main parts are rendered (CtrI+4) and the secondary parts are shaded (Shift+2). This will make it easier to pick the treads without accidentally selecting other objects that you do not want to modi&.

Create Stair Handrails To create the required handrail system shown on the contract drawing, we will need to use several system components, a custom component, cutting tools, and model object manipulation techniques. •

Handrail system components S76, 577, 89, 77

•

Custom component Handrail Splice

•

Cutting tools Line cut & Polygon cut

•

Modeling manipulation techniques moving, copying, splitting, & stretching

“a

Create Stanchions (Posts) at stairs Open up the Component catalog and search for component $76.

H Sr,I’7p

Double-click on the Stanchions (S76) icon to open up the dialog box.

‘a $


Copyright

2005 Takla Corporation

BSO1

Jt Tekiji Struclijies Std,,chions (576) Save

] [ Raft,

PICILJIC

Load

.landa,d

daacd

Pa,an,etei,

T

H ::i*

XC:

LiJL_Z7t

L

I

flK

1 [

I Maxi,num

pply

J

[Lád1y

L_4_H

vi

r fiat

j

i,’ri [

çnc&

We need to change the fields shown abvve to affect the number of stanchions, and work point to first post distance. Hit Apply. DON’T close the dialog box, but you may need to move it to the side. Click the midpoint at the bottom of the right stringer.

Then the midpoint at the top end of the right stringer

BS3

Copyright €1 2005 Takia Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAiNING


17

n

Then pick the stringer. Then middle mouse button click. The stanchions will appear up the stringer as shown in the image below. Right-click Interrupt. box.

Close the Stanchion (S76) dialog

Create Handrails Next open up the Component catalog and search for component S77.

C 18

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINJNG Stairs and Handralls

Copydght C 2005 Tekia Coqxration

BS01

Rã,s Sm

Click on the Railings (377) icon.

We will use the default settings for now and will modi& the ends later

5.

6:

Modify Return Bend Lengths Measure the distance to the work point,(Grid Line 6) This is where our handrail will change from being horizontal to sloping.

ESO1

Copyright © 2005 Tekla CorporaUon

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRArNINS Stairs and Handrails

IS

C, Now go to the Railings dialog and input the values as shown. The railing will stand out 2-0’ from the last stanchion. The bends will occur at grid line 6 which is 10 5/16” away from the last stanchion. Therefore we have to input 2-0” minus 10 5/16’ as the value in the dialoge box (1311/16) 1W Fekla SI rod ores Railings (Si!) standrnd

save as

%0

standa,d

ELds_J P,ctLJrv

Parts

Pa,amete,s

Bends

M,dde Rats

Si-cl-a, ,sdecint

:zzzzzp I

HeP..

I

Slancljons

0

Debut

V

2 2

W Ii

OW

IC’

C

1020

I

2

,1

0”

an” 0

Rano postlion

Left

1

Pt&d ,otation

,r.c...,v

I

cJ Li

Moy

I F

g/rj

The result will look like the image shown below.

U 20

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINIftG Stairs and Handrails

Copyright

2005 TelcIa Corporation

BSOI

Now we will modi’ the bottom of the handrail manually to make it conform to the contract drawing. Working in the elevation view. Create work points

Double-click the Create Parallel Points tool

Input the value as shown

o stances EQK

JF

I áPPYJ

[

cancel

Click OK Input the points as shown, rightmost point first.

B501

Copyright © 2005 Tekta Corporaüon

TEKLA s’RucruREs BAsic TRAINING Stairs and Handrails

21

r

Two points will be added 20 below the points clicked.

Now right click and select Interrupt Make sure you have this icon Adjust rails

pressed down.

Next select the bottom elbow piece and then while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard, select the small horizontal piece next to it. Then right-click and chose the Move> Translate option.

CL 22

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRRJNING Stairs and Handrails

CDpyriqhl @

2005 Tekla Corporation

BS01

—.-...-.,,.,,-

Pick the point at the elbow then the point above it that we just added. Make sure the values agree with the graphic shown above. Click the Move button and these pieces will move up as shown below. Right-click Interrupt. DONT close the Move > Translate window. Next select the vertical rail which reveals its yellow start point. Select this start point and hit Move. Click OK.

iptransiaw

The bottom return now looks like this. Delete the two small remaining pieces to the left of the bottom stanchion.

BSOI

Copyrtght © 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TBAINING Stairs and Handr&Is

23

r

Next select the small horizontal rail which reveals its yellow start point. Select this start point and right-click, Move> Translate. Pick the yellow start point and then perpendicular snap at the stanchion.

¶

Clear

j [W / r I

[cancel

I

Hit Move and then click OK. Right-cLick Interrupt Our bottom return now looks like this. Inquire> Assembly to check if all pieces are attached as required.

(3

24

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINING Stairs and Handrails

Copyright® 2005 Tekla Corcration

BSOI

BSI.3

Create Handrails Along Landing Now we will begin adding the horizontal railing along the beam 7-0 North grid of I. We will add this set of posts by working in the PLAN AT EL. 12-7’! view

Create Stanchions Double-click the Stanchion (S76) component from the Component catalog to open it.

Stl

Oe,jrgit@25eaCo’prat,

TEKLA STRUDTURES BASIC WNM3


25

.? Tekla Structures Stanchions (576)

[ Saveas J

Load] sla,djd

Save PcIu;e

Pails

st&daca

P

n

Paiamelei

I__/ 43.0111 LL

[bet

(

3-8%’

C

‘a [oj

fZiitLJ E[5

I Ellun”

[

oKj[

0”

‘aMaeimum

H I—H

vi

Et6’HI

pp.] [NocyJ

J

C

(aceI

The values we entered in earlier should still be present since we applied them before we closed the dialog box. These stanchions will be changed slightly to conform with the drawings. The stanchions are to be bolted to the web of the beam. and the finished floor level is 2’/” above the top flange of the beam so we must add to the overall height of the stanchions Make the changes shown above. Click the Parameters tab and select the Elbow w/plt for the connection at the bottom of the posts.

C 26

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Kandrails


0501

Tekia Structures Stanchions (516)

r

Save

Pwje

j

[

Fats

Load

]

[standard

Save aJ standard

Slnhiai pIO&JcI nane

ERL

Corneclion seting type

2

Dslaut

Stanchion conn&ction type

El

Elbow

w/Plt.

Connection number Connection properties

[

r

2 & &fl&5

pp’y

rrrrr

El standard

i

MDdf

I

r1r1

[W/Tfl I

C El [auto

ancdJ

Click OK. Now use the Endpoint snap to make sure you dick the ends of the beam as shown below.

Once the endpoints have been clicked, select the supporting beam then click the middle mouse button. This adds the stanchions as shown above. Notice it added stanchions based on the spacing we indicating in the dialog box. Add stanchions around corner.

Now add the stanchions around the corner of the landing, Continue adding the Stanchions (S76) component by clicking the points shown below then selecting the supporting beam

BSCI

Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporarion

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TR4INING Stairs and Handrails

27

r

1

Click the middle mouse button. Notice that the setting we used automatically adjusted the spacing of the posts to make sure that the 5 posts we requested in the system component are present. Open the System Component to adjust this.

r

Make sure the Select Components switch is pressed down and double click the stanchions. Change the number of stanchions as shown below and click Modify

C, 28

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAIJING Stairs and Handrails

Copyrighl @ 2005 Tekla corporation

BSO

____I

‘t Tekia Structures Stanchions (576)

E!_1 L Pttuie

rsave as ]

LoJ standara

Pact

standard

[ .]

Parameteic

as’ 1 P

I

Maxmum

vj o’.

L]LiPJ

FMo]

[

j

p/r3

Check that the posts have modified.

SSD

Cz,h@2OO5

Te,a Gcrator

TEICR SRtJCTURES MSIC TR4InG

St&rs and Handrails

29

r

Create Handrails Double-click the Railing (577) component from the Component catalog to open it. W Tekia Structures Railings (S//)

Ldr1

I _I

‘EJ

standard

as

I

standard

El[Wdds_I Picture

Parlt

Parameters

Bends

Mde flails

Slancirion selectnn

Stanchions

EJ

Delassir

V

El°’

U.

El

El

El r Rnç posiat Pmoade msl&n

I ©n* 1 I M°v I I One

0 I

.-

2 Lear El Jz

I [Ffl

_fA V

çancei

Select standard and load the settings. Click OK Now select each of the stanchions around the landing in turn from left to right. Then click the middle mouse button to tend the command.

C 3Q

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC tRAu[fttNO Stairs and Kandrails

Copydght © 2005 Takla Corporaion

8501

‘1

—

I

,7

:ç.

r

Repeat the command for the handrails at the return.

The values we entered in earlier should still be present since we applied them before we closed the dialog box.

Create Corner Elbows Next we wi]l add an elbow at the far right corner Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Component catalog to open it.

BSOI

Copyright tO 2005 Tekia Corporaton

TEKLA T STRU L ’RES C BASIC TINRG

Stairs and Handraits

31

(. Pahng beam to pla tie (88]

On the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Extend and click OK.

Telda Structures Railing beam to plane (89)

DEl EEl :e’onda. C°Q’C

Pcls.e

0

Other pots Pats

Porotreposs

Gooses

Ufldoa’,IrsIth,

0rerend Or

Lee Ir I

-

HI

L.hh2

or

—1

Select the vertical rail and then the horizontal rail. The far right corner of the handrail system should look the image below.

Create elbows at 900 bend in handrail

Now complete the

900

corners.

On the parameters tab of the Railing beam to plane (89) component change the Up Direction to +y

32

TEKLR STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails

Copyght © 2005 Tekia corporaton

BS01

U

Tekla Structures Railing beam to pldne (89)

EJ [ LJ he’ ‘pe,

stanead

v

He j

ntanda,d

g.,C;e

Pictuic

Paiametei 6enei

Paits

Updiiection -

I

.‘

0CDt

Locked

IEIN0

Clan

F

Coiiiection code Aute4acis iula ioup

-

-

l None E Ncq’e

Aweda,ii4eg,

v

I L

I p/rj

Now click the uppermost short rail followed by the uppermost long rail

!

You must have the ‘select objects in components selection switch applied to ensure the program knows exactly which rails you are attempting to connect. Select Objects In Components’

The result should look like the image shown below

BSO1

Copyright@ 2005 Tekla Corporaton

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRRINING Stairs and Handrails

33

(0

On the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Create and click OK and repeat the process for the lower 3 rails. This ensure that the posts remain continuous through the connections rather than the rails. I (kIl Structures RiIing plane to plan (90)

[

Load

]

H

Parameters

Picture[Pasts

vI [ias

standard

modit connection type

]

standard

fleip..

[Welds... General

Method of constpuctton

El àeale

Leg length 1

El’

HI

leg length 2 Fabscalor name

a

j

[MoyJ

[

] lw/F]

[ca’cei)

a

34

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC T4INIWG Stairs and Flandrails

CopyrLght@ 2005 Jeida Corporation

BSCI

L

t

Create return bends at top of stair

FinaLly we will add the bends at the top of the stair where they meet the horizo ntal rails. Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Compo nent catalog to open it.

/ A ading beam to be am (891 For the top rail, on the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Extend. le4cla Sti ‘rIures Railing beam to beam (38)

LSaveJ

r Load

J

atandaid

modify connection type P.chze

Pss

P

.ens

La as lJ [weids

J

andatd

1

Geneia

Method at constiuctian

BSGI

Copyngb @2005 TekIa Corporadon


35

For the remaining rails, on the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Create. lyr Teklo Sb uctures Railing boo’’’ to bean, (88)

ISeJ[Lo1

v[Save] -

L*J

rr’p cycLài e P&ae

Pats

Parncas

6enc,

lI_Creale

Method ci consliLietlon

¶

CL

Now that the modeling of the stair and handrail has been completed the model should now look like this.

36

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINING Stairs and Handrails

Copydght © 2005 Tekla Corporatjon

BSOI

We can now start to create the stair and handrail output.

Prepare the Assemblies Select the Select Assemblies selection switch

Move your mouse over the handrai] and notice that the entire handrailing highlights.

BSOl

CDpyrighl @ 2DDS Tekla Corporalion

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAiNING Stairs and Handrails

37

e

It This means that if we were to produce an assembly drawing of this item, absolutely everything would be shown on the drawing and the result would be difficult to read. To avoid this we will separate this assembly into 3 smaller assemblies by removing the parts that join the assemblies at the locations where we want to split the assemblies. These parts will become ‘ship loose items’ once they are removed. We will split the assembly at the retums at the top of the stair and the 9Q 0 bend on grid line 6

(S

38

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC 1rNING Stairs and Handralls

Copyright ce 25 Tekia Corporation

BSO1

Select the Select Objects in Assemblies selection switch

Highlight the top rail return as shown below then right click on the mouse.

44

4

44

-

—I

Select Remove from assembly from the list

BS3 I

Cgpflh: V 2005 Tea Cocpomn

7EKA STRUCTURES BASIC TRANNG Stairs and -fandrails

39

0, Interrupt

Propertes,. User-defined atfributes... Inquire

I

COPS Move Dee

I.

I.

Set as new main part of assembly Center o’ gravito E:act lines Hide lines Hide Show assembly Fit by parts Create vie.’ Drawing Zoom ,tdate i,ndow Next wnidoo’.’ Add to assemDiy

1/ .

Click Yes to confirm the removal. Delete confirmation

\

Assembly struclure includes weldings or bolts Delete weldings and bolts?

Lxø IL

No

Repeat the process for the lower three parts. Now switch the Select Assemblies selection switch back on and mouse over the stair handrail. Notice that it now only highlights the sloping handrail.

C 40

TFKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails

CopynhI © 2005 TeIcla Corporation

BSO1

Now do the same for the 4 elbows at the 990 bend. Dont forget to switch your Select objects in assemblies back on.

j

Once this has been completed we can run the drawings.

5531

Copyht @ 2005 tekla Cocorator

TEKLA SIRIJCTURES BASIC TRINNG Stairs and Handrails

41

BSI.4

0

Create Drawings

Stair Drawing Next we will create an Assembly drawing of the Stairs, From the Properties menu. select the Assembly drawings which open up the dialog box shown below. “jeer... Sleeper’.,

ci

C&erece pans

•

ace eme. 4 Sj

Bei Gnarnfer ii

Pmjecl... Phaea number. Sirgieperl drwwpg.

-we arwwFng Genera] ermnoe’mer d’swng

!)

Mut].drawirg.

,)

Laycis.

* Assembly drawing properties Save

(j_

--

I

Stail’Mth BUM

Sraprc_w’th._BO

P

ONn .

21. IUciese Saclion Y]ese or devalion o4 beck ,tnng. fl png nsa the mont view peopertes and changing the Ealienia

2 2

[

2 I [ 1

2 2 O 2

LaiorL Gnno. —Pa’maL Picaeclinii

Srasace Iiewrej

[

Dd&tha

v..

2

10 J 12 2

Oensxnin Bel

[

Besrr.lr Canecoeimak Snilace

J.

&i’ In zero

Jo [ s— J [secmacyenfrA I J2Newp.I I 2 LNeto4p&k.] ] [ w Seal 0 1

I’aSTTreal ma.’__j

Ucer-defned akèr4,:

cancal Select the Stairs_with_BOM settings from the drop-down list and hit Load. Then click OK. Select the one of the stringers in the model and then select Assembly drawing from the Drawing menu.

42


Copytght© 2G05 Tekia Corporalpor

5501

‘9 U

0

w

a

Cl,

0)

an

0,

cn

C

C C)

0,

c

m

-4

0) 0•

0

C-)

0)

0 0 Cr

©

0

0

C)

0

CD

C,

0

=00

—

—

01 o

a

0.

<

C

01

a

o

a

a-

oo

t to 0 DI

C

am

01 0) 01 00 (0

n

0

0

0 C0 a 0 0

a

00

a

94;

OCt

a o -I

<0

1

-t

Cr

roe C Ca

E’O

f0

IW

In a

C, 20

‘Pa

“C U

fill [Iii !t:j

55

Is 55

6R

55

ITS

S

I

I

0)

I 0

0

x

x

H

@0

-r

ii

S 5<

1

C

0-

01

a

0 “0 a 01 C Ct

01 00

-

0

-‘

0 -C

—.

-4

-4

01 a Cd’

-

0 Ct

8t

—.

—

= Cs)

z

-

a

)

Ct

aa -

01 00

E

p

-.

U

—C

C

0 0

a

a

0-

0-

p

C

a

a

0

on

0)

0 n 0 01

0;-

p

-4

a Cd’

0

p

a

a

on

01

,

o

0

-

LJ

-

<:<20

ri

-

Go to the Attributes 2 tab and change the Minimum Cut Part Length as shown.

if View properties Sae Attrues 1

Load

Attrivtes 2

I

fliaveas

j 1yti,bM

Label

Aeptesentation oF deformed objects

Urilolded

No

EUebrm

No

V

Shortening Yes

Cut pails:

Cut skew parts:

No

V

I

Minimum cut part length: Space between cul pails: L1)128 Other

No

1] Datum point for elevations:

Specified

v’

Dattxn level:

ft

Click Modify

/

—

This setting shortens items on the drawing when it detects there are no events’ (bolts, holes, plates etc.) along the item for each section of the specified dimension. The result is that the smaller the dimension specified is, the more the part will be shortened.

By speci1’ing a large dimension here we have reduced the programs capacity to shorten the item. Thus the stair looks better on the drawing.

-

Propertes..,

Once the drawing redraws, the views may be outside the border. Right click your mouse in blank space and select Place Views in order to correct this.

Place views Part marks Update marks Update veids Nce:lJnhide

tiCS Loom

Update F4ext ‘,.‘indow

(1 44

TEK STRUCTURES BASIC TINING Stairs and Handralis

pynghI @25 TekEa rporaIior

BSOI

Finish cleaning up the stair drawing by adding, deleting, and movin g any and all necessary dimensions required for your shop. Once finished, close and save the stair drawing.

Handrail Drawing Repeat the steps to create a drawing for one of the handrails. Howev er, this time use the setting Handrail_withfioM from the drop-down list. Assembly drawing properties Save

Ii

ioaJ

]j F

HandteiL with BUM

ElNsre

RANDRML

21 T&

CoMes h&ta

i’ing

e#h mend

&j

Add sections and dir,ensione en required

Save as

2)r-

.-

J 21 [

HdLvuth.

re d -ee& thrnrn. -

-

Men Part’s Rotation in Model r,eeds robe FRONt

E Dimensen.

I

—

—

--

-

-—

rsvzI Dimensiodni

fl

I 2) Eo, ntoI.. 12)It

The handrail drawing should look like this.

The default settings for handrails is to list Total Length in the drawin gs BOM.

BSO1

qyi

@ 25 Tekia Corpo,attn

TEK,A

STRuCTURES BASIC TINiNG Stairs and Handrails

45

CT

HPJI

C)

ERLAL T BILL OF MA Ceszqr-—.

‘:LpKs

I PIPHI-lr2SCHdtI

Q-&3il’-

ROD L4

1. DI

93—0

If this is desired then all part marks need to be removed from the drawings.

Double-click in the drawings background. Then click the Part mark button. Assenbiy

-

port mark propertit.

Øc— —

“‘ ““

Tj.

F

-

HØi

3132

F,-

iA

:e--

-

V

EZ

rz

-

EE ZZr

0

In the Main part section, remove the <> element.

c AssmbIy

-

part nark properties

Caacn

2 A.’.—

-

ii”-

is

‘— —

tJ::— t: F,

A..

-

an

C—.,—— a 4

—

3

LEZiLfJ In the Secondary part section, remove the <> element.

V

46

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TF{AININC Stairs and Handrails

Copyright

2005 Tekla CorraIion

BSOI

C

Finish cleaning up the handrail drawing by adding, deleting, and moving any and all necessary dimensions required for your shop. Once finished, close and save the handrail drawing.

Change the Handrail BOM type From the Properties menu, select the Project option. Then hit the User-defined attributes button to open up the dialog box shown here. PsoktL Ii)

BILL OP MATERIAL ‘_

.

tTAfl

LJ L±J

USL

On the More Drawing Switches tab, change the option shown above to No and click Modify. Click OK. 3!LL C MATERIAL

MARK

‘IR’

0Th’

-

5*

—: S&

--

REMARKS

Now when you re-open the handrail drawing the BOM list each individual part as shown here.

‘-r-,

.itP’ jn/

ENGW

RAil

1

:4 m46

DE:C,F1JN

‘;H-!,

::‘1.*

PIPE.1:’.’il;H4fl

:il,CEMO

I

PI}’il—i

S

PfPPI 1;SOO

Copyriçht @ 2005 Tda Corran

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASC TR NIG


47

1

is

Tekla Handbook LT

Recommend Documents